This is a modern-English version of The missing chums, originally written by Dixon, Franklin W..
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

THE HARDY BOYS
The Hardy Boys
THE MISSING CHUMS
By FRANKLIN W. DIXON
By Franklin W. Dixon
Author of
The Hardy Boys: The Tower Treasure
The Hardy Boys: The Secret of the Old Mill
Creator of
The Hardy Boys: The Tower Treasure
The Hardy Boys: The Mystery of the Old Mill
ILLUSTRATED BY
Walter S. Rogers
Illustrated by
Walter S. Rogers
NEW YORK
GROSSET & DUNLAP
PUBLISHERS
NEW YORK
GROSSET & DUNLAP
PUBLISHERS
Made in the United States of America
Made in America
Copyright, 1928, by
GROSSET & DUNLAP, Inc.
Copyright, 1928, by
GROSSET & DUNLAP, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
All Rights Reserved
The Hardy Boys: The Missing Chums
The Hardy Boys: The Missing Chums

HE CRAWLED ON HANDS AND KNEES.
HE CRAWLED ON HIS HANDS AND KNEES.
CONTENTS
I. | The Three Strangers |
II. | Quick Thinking |
III. | A Sketchy Trio |
IV. | The Farewell |
V. | No Word from the Friends |
VI. | Missing |
VII. | Debris |
VIII. | The Weird Letter |
IX. | Blacksnake Island |
X. | The Kid on the Deck |
XI. | The Isle |
XII. | Into the Cave |
XIII. | The Four Guys |
XIV. | The Storm |
XV. | A Shocking Announcement |
XVI. | The Alert |
XVII. | Capture |
XVIII. | Back to the Cave |
XIX. | Separated |
XX. | Taking the Boats |
XXI. | At the island |
XXII. | The Pursuit |
XXIII. | Back Home |
THE HARDY BOYS:
THE MISSING CHUMS
CHAPTER I
The Three Strangers
The Three Strangers
"You certainly ought to have a dandy trip."
"You should definitely have a great trip."
"I'll say we will, Frank! We sure wish you could come along."
"I'll say we will, Frank! We really wish you could join us."
Frank Hardy grinned ruefully and shook his head.
Frank Hardy smiled wryly and shook his head.
"I'm afraid we're out of luck. Joe and I may take a little trip later on, but we can't make it this time."
"I'm sorry, but it looks like we're out of luck. Joe and I might go on a little trip later, but we can't do it this time."
"Just think of it!" said Chet Morton, the other speaker. "A whole week motorboating along the coast! We're the lucky boys, eh, Biff?"
"Just think about it!" said Chet Morton, the other speaker. "A whole week of motorboating along the coast! We're the lucky ones, right, Biff?"
Biff Hooper, at the wheel of his father's new motorboat, nodded emphatically.
Biff Hooper, behind the wheel of his dad's new motorboat, nodded vigorously.
"You bet we're lucky. I'm glad dad got this boat in time for the summer holidays. I've been dreaming of a trip like that for years."
"You bet we're lucky. I'm glad Dad got this boat just in time for the summer break. I've been dreaming of a trip like this for years."
"It won't be the same without the Hardy Boys," returned Chet. "I had it all planned out that Frank and Joe would be coming along with us in their own boat and we'd make a real party of it."
"It won't be the same without the Hardy Boys," Chet replied. "I had it all figured out that Frank and Joe would join us in their own boat, and we would really make a party of it."
"Can't be done," observed Joe Hardy, settling himself more comfortably in the back of the boat. "There's nothing Frank and I would like better—but duty calls!" he exclaimed dramatically, slapping himself on the chest.
"Can't be done," Joe Hardy said, getting more comfortable in the back of the boat. "There’s nothing Frank and I would like more—but duty calls!" he added dramatically, slapping his chest.
"Duty, my neck!" grunted Frank. "We just have to stay at home while dad is in Chicago, that's all. It'll be pretty dull without Chet and Biff around to help us kill time."
"Duty, my neck!" Frank grunted. "We just have to stay home while Dad is in Chicago, that's it. It'll be pretty boring without Chet and Biff here to help us pass the time."
"You can put in the hours thinking of Biff and me," consoled Chet. "At night you can just picture us sitting around our campfire away up the coast, and in the daytime you can imagine us speeding away out over the bounding main." He postured with one foot on the gunwale. "A sailor's life for me, my hearties! Yo, ho, and a bottle of ink!"
"You can spend all the time you want thinking about Biff and me," Chet reassured. "At night, you can just picture us sitting around our campfire up the coast, and during the day, you can imagine us zooming across the open sea." He struck a pose with one foot on the edge of the boat. "A sailor's life for me, my friends! Yo, ho, and a bottle of ink!"
The boat gave a sudden lurch at that moment, for Biff Hooper had not yet mastered the art of navigation and Chet wavered precariously for a few seconds, finally losing his balance and sitting down heavily in a smear of grease at the bottom of the craft.
The boat suddenly rocked at that moment because Biff Hooper hadn't yet figured out how to navigate, and Chet wobbled dangerously for a few seconds before finally losing his balance and landing hard in a patch of grease at the bottom of the boat.
chanted Frank Hardy, as the boys roared with laughter at their chum's discomfiture.
chanted Frank Hardy, as the boys burst into laughter at their friend's embarrassment.
"Poet!" sniffed Chet, as he got up. Then, as he gingerly felt the seat of his trousers: "Another pair of pants ready for the cleaners. I ought to wear overalls when I go boating." He grinned as he said it, for Chet Morton was the soul of good nature and it took a great deal more than a smear of grease to erase his ready smile.
"Poet!" Chet huffed as he stood up. Then, feeling the seat of his pants cautiously, he said, "Another pair of pants that needs to go to the cleaners. I should wear overalls when I go boating." He smiled as he said it because Chet Morton was always in good spirits, and it took a lot more than a smudge of grease to wipe away his cheerful grin.
The four boys, Frank and Joe Hardy, Chet Morton and Biff Hooper, all chums in the same set at the Bayport high school, were out on Barmet Bay in the Envoy, the Hooper motorboat, helping Biff learn to run the craft. Their assistance consisted chiefly of mocking criticisms of the luckless Biff's posture at the helm and sundry false alarms to the effect that the boat was springing a leak or that the engine was about to blow up. Each announcement had the effect of precipitating the steersman into a panic of apprehension and sending his tormentors into convulsions of laughter.
The four boys, Frank and Joe Hardy, Chet Morton, and Biff Hooper, who were all friends at Bayport High School, were out on Barmet Bay in the Envoy, the Hooper family motorboat, helping Biff learn to drive the boat. Their help mainly involved mocking Biff's awkward stance at the wheel and shouting fake alerts about the boat leaking or the engine about to explode. Each announcement made Biff panic, which only sent his friends into fits of laughter.
Biff had made good progress, however, as he had been with the Hardy boys on previous occasions in their own motorboat, the Sleuth, and he had picked up the rudiments of handling the craft. He was anxious to be a first-rate pilot before starting up the coast on his projected trip with Chet Morton the following week. He had an aptitude for mechanics and he was satisfied that he would have a thorough understanding of his boat by the time they were ready to start.
Biff had made good progress, though, since he had been with the Hardy boys before in their own motorboat, the Sleuth, and he had learned the basics of handling the boat. He was eager to be a top-notch pilot before heading up the coast on his planned trip with Chet Morton the following week. He had a knack for mechanics and was confident that he would completely understand his boat by the time they were set to go.
"If the coast guards find two little boys like you roaming around in a great big motorboat they're likely to give you a spanking and send you back home," laughed Frank. "I'll bet you'll be back in Bayport inside of two days."
"If the coast guards spot two little boys like you wandering around in a huge motorboat, they’re probably going to give you a spanking and send you back home," laughed Frank. "I bet you’ll be back in Bayport in two days."
"Rats!" replied Chet, inelegantly, if forcefully. "If our grub holds out we'll be away more than the week."
"Rats!" Chet responded, awkwardly but emphatically. "If our food lasts, we'll be gone for over a week."
"There's no danger of that. Not with you along," Joe remarked, and deftly dodged a wad of waste that Chet flung at him. Chet Morton's enormous appetite was proverbial among the chums.
"There's no way that's happening. Not with you around," Joe said, skillfully avoiding a ball of trash that Chet threw at him. Chet Morton's massive appetite was well-known among the friends.
"Just sore because you can't come along with us," Chet scoffed. "You know mighty well that the two of you would give your eye-teeth to be on this trip. Oh, well, we'll tell you all about it when we get back."
"Just jealous because you can't come with us," Chet scoffed. "You know perfectly well that both of you would do anything to be on this trip. Oh well, we'll fill you in when we get back."
"A lot of comfort that will be!"
"A lot of comfort that will be!"
"A leak!" roared Chet suddenly, pounding Biff on the back. "The boat has sprung a leak. Get a pail!"
"A leak!" Chet shouted suddenly, hitting Biff on the back. "The boat's got a leak. Grab a bucket!"
"What!" shouted Biff, in alarm, starting up from the wheel. Then, for the fifth time that afternoon, he realized that he had been fooled and he sank back with a look of disgust on his face.
"What!" Biff shouted, alarmed, jumping up from the steering wheel. Then, for the fifth time that afternoon, he realized he had been tricked, and he sank back with a look of disgust on his face.
"Some time that boat will spring a leak and I won't believe you," he warned, settling down to his steering again.
"At some point, that boat will spring a leak and I won't believe you," he warned, settling back into his steering again.
"I'll be good," promised Chet, sitting down and looking out over the bay. "Say, there's a big brute of a motorboat coming along behind us, isn't it?"
"I'll behave," Chet promised, sitting down and looking out over the bay. "Hey, there's a huge motorboat coming up behind us, right?"
"I'll say she's big," Frank agreed, looking back. "I don't remember ever having seen that boat around here before."
"I'd say she's big," Frank agreed, glancing back. "I don't recall ever seeing that boat around here before."
"Me neither," declared Joe. "I wonder where it came from."
"Me neither," Joe said. "I wonder where it came from."
The strange craft was painted a dingy gray. It was large and unwieldy and did not ride easily in the water. Although that boat was some distance in the wake of their own craft the boys could distinguish the figures of three men, all seated well up toward the front. Biff glanced back.
The weird-looking boat was painted a dull gray. It was big and clumsy and didn’t float smoothly in the water. Even though that boat was quite a way behind their own, the boys could make out the shapes of three men, all sitting near the front. Biff looked back.
"It's a new one on me," he said. "I've never seen it before."
"It's new to me," he said. "I've never seen it before."
"Sure has lots of power, anyway," Chet commented. The roar of the engine could be plainly heard across the water. In spite of its clumsy appearance, the big boat ploughed ahead at good speed, and, as Bill had the Envoy, his craft, throttled down, the second boat was slowly overtaking them.
"Definitely has a lot of power," Chet said. The engine's roar was clearly audible across the water. Despite its awkward look, the large boat pushed forward at a solid speed, and as Bill had the Envoy, his boat, throttled down, the second boat was gradually catching up to them.
"Let's wait till they get abreast of us and give them a race," Chet suggested.
"Let's wait until they catch up to us and then challenge them to a race," Chet suggested.
"Not on your life," objected Biff. "I'm only learning to run this tub and I'm not in the racing class yet. Besides, there are too many other boats out in the bay this afternoon. I'd be sure to run into one of them."
"Not a chance," Biff replied. "I'm just learning how to handle this boat and I'm not ready for racing yet. Plus, there are way too many other boats out in the bay this afternoon. I'd definitely end up crashing into one of them."
The boys watched as the other craft overtook them. The big motorboat ploughed noisily ahead, keeping directly in their wake.
The boys watched as the other boat passed them. The big motorboat roared ahead, staying right in their wake.
"I wonder if the man at the helm is asleep," said Frank. "He doesn't seem to be making any attempt to pull over."
"I wonder if the guy driving is asleep," said Frank. "He doesn’t look like he’s trying to pull over."
"He's awake, all right," declared Chet. "I can see him talking to the man beside him. He won't run us down. Don't worry—not with Captain Hooper at the helm, my hearties!"
"He's definitely awake," Chet said. "I can see him chatting with the guy next to him. He won't run us over. Don't stress—especially not with Captain Hooper steering, my friends!"
The roaring of the pursuing craft suddenly took on a new note and the big boat seemed to leap out of the water as it increased its speed and bore rapidly down on the Envoy. Spray flew about the heads of the helmsman and his two passengers and a high crest of foam rose from either side of the bow. Biff Hooper shifted the wheel slightly and the Envoy veered in toward the shore. To the surprise of the boys, the other boat also changed its course and continued directly in their wake.
The sound of the chasing boat suddenly changed, and the big vessel seemed to spring out of the water as it sped up and raced toward the Envoy. Spray flew around the helmsman and his two passengers, and a tall crest of foam rose on either side of the bow. Biff Hooper adjusted the wheel slightly, and the Envoy turned toward the shore. To the boys’ surprise, the other boat also altered its course and continued right behind them.
"The idiots!" exclaimed Biff.
"The idiots!" shouted Biff.
"I don't get the idea of this at all," muttered Frank Hardy to his brother. "What are they following us so closely for?"
"I don’t understand this at all," Frank Hardy said to his brother. "Why are they following us so closely?"
Joe shrugged. "Probably just trying to give us a scare."
Joe shrugged. "Probably just trying to freak us out."
The other boat was now almost upon their craft. It nosed out to the right and drew alongside, coming dangerously close. The boys could see the three men clearly and they noticed that all three scrutinized them, seeming to pay particular attention to Chet and Biff.
The other boat was now almost next to theirs. It veered to the right and pulled up alongside, getting uncomfortably close. The boys could see the three men clearly and noticed that all three were studying them, seeming to focus especially on Chet and Biff.
The men were unsavory looking fellows, unshaven, surly of expression. The man at the helm was sharp-featured and keen-eyed, while the other two were of heavier build. One of the pair wore a cap, while the other man was bare-headed, revealing a scant thatch of carroty hair so close-cropped that it seemed to stick out at all angles to his cranium. This man, the boys saw, nudged his companion and pointed to Biff, who was too busy at the helm of his own craft to notice.
The guys looked pretty rough, unshaven and grumpy. The guy steering the boat had sharp features and a sharp gaze, while the other two were stockier. One of them wore a cap, and the other was bare-headed, showing a thin patch of red hair that was cut so short it stuck out in all directions. This guy nudged his friend and pointed at Biff, who was too focused on steering his own boat to notice.
"Not so close!" yelled Chet, seeing that the other boat was running broadside in dangerous proximity to the Envoy.
"Not so close!" shouted Chet, noticing that the other boat was dangerously close to the Envoy.
In reply, the man at the helm of the other craft merely sneered and brought his boat in until the two speeding launches were almost touching sides.
In response, the guy steering the other boat just sneered and brought his vessel in until the two fast launches were nearly side by side.
"What's the idea?" Joe shouted. "Trying to run us down?"
"What's going on?" Joe shouted. "Are you trying to run us over?"
Biff Hooper shifted the wheel so that the Envoy would edge away from the other boat, and in this effort he was successful, for a gap of water was soon apparent between the speeding craft. But in escaping one danger he had risked another.
Biff Hooper turned the wheel so the Envoy would steer away from the other boat, and he managed to do so, as a gap of water quickly appeared between the two speeding vessels. However, in avoiding one danger, he had put himself in another risky situation.
Two sailboats that had been flitting about Barmet Bay that afternoon were racing with the wind, and they now came threshing along with billowing canvas, immediately into the course of the motorboat. Biff had seen the sailboats previously and had judged his own course accordingly, but in his efforts to get away from the mysterious launch he had unwittingly maneuvered the Envoy into such a position that a collision now seemed inevitable.
Two sailboats that had been moving around Barmet Bay that afternoon were racing with the wind, and they now came rushing in with full sails right into the path of the motorboat. Biff had noticed the sailboats earlier and had adjusted his own route, but in his attempts to escape the mysterious launch, he had unintentionally maneuvered the Envoy into a spot where a collision now appeared unavoidable.
The sailboats seemed to loom right up before him, not more than a hundred yards away. They were racing close together, one boat but a nose in the lead. They were scudding along with the wind at high speed and the motorboat roared down upon them.
The sailboats looked like they were right in front of him, just a hundred yards away. They were racing closely together, with one boat barely ahead. They were flying along with the wind at high speed while the motorboat zoomed toward them.
Biff Hooper bent desperately over the helm. He was so close that no matter which way he turned it seemed impossible that he could miss one or the other of the sailboats. If he turned to the right he would crash into them head-on; if he turned to the left he would run before them and a general smash-up might be the result.
Biff Hooper leaned anxiously over the steering wheel. He was so close that no matter which way he turned, it seemed impossible for him to avoid hitting one of the sailboats. If he turned right, he would crash into them head-on; if he turned left, he would sail right into them, leading to a likely collision.
The men in the sailboats were also aware of their danger.
The guys in the sailboats also knew they were in danger.
The boys had a glimpse of one man waving his arms. One of the boats veered out abruptly and the yardarm swung around. The sailboat was lying directly in the path of the Envoy.
The boys saw a man waving his arms. One of the boats suddenly swerved, and the yardarm swung around. The sailboat was right in the path of the Envoy.
The roaring of the engine, the threshing of the sails, the warning shouts of the boys, all created a confusion of sound. The white sails seemed to loom high above the speeding boat. A hideous collision appeared to be inevitable.
The roar of the engine, the flapping of the sails, the shouting of the boys, all created a chaotic blend of sounds. The white sails seemed to tower above the fast-moving boat. A terrifying crash seemed unavoidable.
CHAPTER II
Quick Thinking
Fast Thinking
Every second was precious.
Every moment was valuable.
Frank Hardy realized the full extent of their peril and in the same moment he realized the only way of averting it.
Frank Hardy understood just how dangerous their situation was, and at that same moment, he figured out the only way to avoid it.
Without a word he sprang toward the helm, brushing Biff Hooper aside. In this emergency, Biff was helpless. Swiftly, Frank bore down on the wheel, bringing the boat around into the wind. At the same time, he opened up the throttle so that the Envoy leaped forward at her highest speed.
Without saying a word, he jumped toward the wheel, pushing Biff Hooper aside. In this situation, Biff felt powerless. Quickly, Frank took control of the wheel, turning the boat into the wind. At the same time, he pushed the throttle wide open, making the Envoy surge forward at full speed.
The motorboat passed just a few inches in front of the bow of the first sailboat; so close, Chet Morton said afterward, that he "could count every stitch on the patch in the sailcloth." But the danger was not yet over. There was still the other sailboat to be considered. It was pounding along immediately ahead of them; the man at the tiller was making frantic efforts to get out of the way, but the danger lay in the fact that in trying to guess the possible course of the Envoy he might make a false move that would have him shoot directly across its path.
The motorboat zoomed just a few inches in front of the bow of the first sailboat; so close, Chet Morton later said, that he "could count every stitch on the patch in the sailcloth." But the danger wasn't over yet. They still had to think about the other sailboat. It was rushing along right in front of them; the guy at the tiller was desperately trying to steer clear, but the risk was that in trying to guess the possible path of the Envoy, he might make a wrong move and end up directly in its path.
Frank swung the helm around again. Once more, the Envoy veered to the left so sharply that a cloud of spray drenched the boys. Another shift of the wheel and the motorboat zig-zagged safely past the sailboat and on out into open water.
Frank spun the wheel again. Once more, the Envoy turned to the left so abruptly that a splash of water soaked the boys. With another turn of the wheel, the motorboat zigzagged safely past the sailboat and out into open water.
Not one of the boys had uttered a word during this. They had been tense and anxious, but now that the peril of a smash-up had been averted, they sank back with sighs of relief.
Not one of the boys had said anything during this. They had been on edge and worried, but now that the danger of a crash had been avoided, they relaxed with sighs of relief.
"I sure thought we were headed for Davy Jones' locker that time!" breathed Chet.
"I really thought we were going to end up at the bottom of the ocean that time!" Chet said.
Biff Hooper looked up at Frank.
Biff Hooper glanced up at Frank.
"Thanks," he said. "I'd have never got out of that mess if you hadn't taken the wheel. I was so rattled that I didn't know what to do."
"Thanks," he said. "I would have never gotten out of that mess if you hadn't taken the wheel. I was so shaken up that I didn't know what to do."
"After you've run the boat a few more weeks you'll get so used to it that it'll be second nature to you. But that sure was a tight squeeze," Frank admitted. "It mighty near meant that you wouldn't have had any motorboat left to go on that trip with."
"After you've been running the boat for a few more weeks, you'll get so used to it that it will feel like second nature. But that was definitely a tight fit," Frank admitted. "It almost meant you wouldn't have had any motorboat left for that trip."
"It mighty near meant that we wouldn't have been left to make the trip at all," Chet declared solemnly. "What say we go home? I've had enough excitement for one day."
"It almost meant that we wouldn't have been able to make the trip at all," Chet said seriously. "How about we go home? I've had enough excitement for one day."
"It's beginning to rain, anyway," Biff remarked, glancing up at the sky. "I guess we may as well go back."
"It's starting to rain, anyway," Biff said, looking up at the sky. "I guess we should head back."
The sky had clouded over in the past hour and the eastern sky was black, while scurrying masses of ragged clouds flew overhead before the stiffening wind. A few drops of water splashed into the boat, then came a gust of rain, followed by a light shower that passed over in a few minutes. The big motorboat that had crowded them had disappeared.
The sky had turned cloudy in the last hour, and the eastern horizon was dark, while hurried bands of tattered clouds raced overhead, driven by the strengthening wind. A few raindrops splattered into the boat, then a gust of rain followed, quickly giving way to a brief shower that lasted only a few minutes. The large motorboat that had been so close to them was now gone.
"A real storm coming up," Frank said. "Let's make for the boathouse."
"A real storm is coming," Frank said. "Let's head to the boathouse."
The Envoy headed for Bayport.
The Envoy was headed to Bayport.
"I'd like to tell those three fellows in that other boat what I think of them," declared Biff. "They got us into that jam. They were crowding me so close that I didn't have a chance to keep an eye on the sailboats."
"I want to tell those three guys in the other boat what I really think of them," Biff said. "They got us into this mess. They were so close that I couldn't even keep an eye on the sailboats."
"I still can't see why they drew up alongside," Joe observed. "They seemed mighty inquisitive. Gave us all the once-over."
"I still can't understand why they pulled up next to us," Joe said. "They seemed really curious. Gave us a good look."
Chet offered a solution.
Chet proposed a solution.
"Perhaps they thought we were some one else and when they found out their mistake they went away."
"Maybe they thought we were someone else, and when they realized their mistake, they left."
"But they didn't go away," Frank pointed out. "They kept crowding us over. And one of them pointed at Biff."
"But they didn't go away," Frank pointed out. "They kept pushing us back. And one of them pointed at Biff."
"At me?"
"At me?"
"Yes."
Yes.
"I didn't notice that."
"I didn't see that."
"He seemed to recognize you and was pointing you out to the other men."
"He seemed to recognize you and was pointing you out to the other guys."
"Well, if he recognized me I can't return the compliment. I never saw any of them before in my life."
"Well, if he recognized me, I can’t return the favor. I’ve never seen any of them before in my life."
"He was probably pointing you out as a unique specimen," ventured Joe, with a grin. "Probably those fellows are from a museum, Biff. They'll likely make an offer for your carcass after you're dead and they'll have it stuffed and put it on display in a glass case. That's why they were so interested."
"He was probably highlighting you as a one-of-a-kind example," Joe suggested with a smirk. "Those guys are probably from a museum, Biff. They’ll likely want to buy your body after you’re gone and have it mounted and displayed in a glass case. That’s why they were so curious."
Joe's suggestion elicited warm words from Biff and a friendly struggle ensued. Inasmuch as Biff Hooper was the champion boxer and wrestler of Bayport High, Joe was at a disadvantage, and paid for his derogatory remarks by being held over the side by the scruff of the neck and given a ducking until he pleaded for mercy.
Joe's suggestion got a cheerful response from Biff, and a playful tussle broke out. Since Biff Hooper was the champion boxer and wrestler at Bayport High, Joe was at a disadvantage and paid for his teasing comments by being held over the side by the collar and dunked until he begged for mercy.
By the time the boys reached Bayport it was raining heavily, and after leaving the Envoy in the boathouse they raced up the street to the Hardy boys' home. The barn in the back yard was a favorite retreat of the chums and there they spent many of their Saturday afternoons. The barn was fitted up as a gymnasium, with parallel bars, a trapeze, boxing gloves and a punching bag, and was an ideal refuge on a rainy day. The thrilling experience with the sailboats and the mystery of the strange motorboat were soon forgotten.
By the time the boys arrived in Bayport, it was pouring rain. After leaving the Envoy in the boathouse, they dashed up the street to the Hardy boys' house. The barn in the backyard was a favorite hangout for them, and they spent many of their Saturday afternoons there. The barn was set up as a gym, equipped with parallel bars, a trapeze, boxing gloves, and a punching bag, making it the perfect spot on a rainy day. The exciting time they had with the sailboats and the mystery of the strange motorboat quickly faded from their minds.
Phil Cohen and Tony Prito, school chums of the Hardy boys, drifted in during the afternoon, as well as Jerry Gilroy and "Slim" Robinson. This comprised the "gang," of which the two Hardy boys were the leading spirits.
Phil Cohen and Tony Prito, school friends of the Hardy boys, wandered in during the afternoon, along with Jerry Gilroy and "Slim" Robinson. This made up the "gang," with the two Hardy boys as the main leaders.
Frank and Joe Hardy were the sons of Fenton Hardy, an internationally famous detective. Mr. Hardy had been for many years a detective on the New York police force, where he was so successful that he went into practice for himself. His two sons already showed signs of inheriting his ability and in a number of instances had solved difficult criminal cases.
Frank and Joe Hardy were the sons of Fenton Hardy, a world-renowned detective. Mr. Hardy had worked for many years on the New York police force, where he was so successful that he started his own detective agency. His two sons already showed signs of inheriting his skills and had successfully solved several challenging criminal cases.
The first of these was the mystery of the theft of valuable jewels and bonds from Tower Mansion, an old-fashioned building on the outskirts of Bayport. How the Hardy boys solved the mystery has already been related in the first volume of this series, entitled, "The Tower Treasure."
The first mystery was the theft of valuable jewels and bonds from Tower Mansion, an old-style building on the edge of Bayport. How the Hardy boys solved the mystery is explained in the first book of this series, titled "The Tower Treasure."
In the second volume, "The House on the Cliff," the Hardy boys and their chums had a thrilling experience in a reputedly haunted house on the cliffs overlooking Barmet Bay. This was the starting point of an exciting chase for smugglers, in which the Hardy boys came to the rescue of their father after undergoing many dangers in the cliff caves.
In the second volume, "The House on the Cliff," the Hardy Boys and their friends had an exciting adventure in a supposedly haunted house on the cliffs that overlook Barmet Bay. This was the beginning of a thrilling pursuit of smugglers, during which the Hardy Boys saved their father after facing numerous dangers in the cliff caves.
The third volume of the series, "The Mystery of the Old Mill," which precedes the present book, relates the efforts of the Hardy boys to run to earth a gang of counterfeiters operating in and about Bayport and their efforts to solve the mystery surrounding an abandoned mill in the farming country back of Barmet Bay.
The third volume of the series, "The Mystery of the Old Mill," which comes before this book, tells the story of the Hardy boys as they try to track down a group of counterfeiters working in and around Bayport, as well as their attempts to uncover the mystery of an abandoned mill in the farmland behind Barmet Bay.
Frank Hardy, a tall, dark-haired boy of sixteen, was a year older than his brother Joe, and usually took the lead in their exploits, although Joe was not a whit behind his brother in shrewdness and in deductive ability.
Frank Hardy, a tall, dark-haired 16-year-old, was a year older than his brother Joe and usually took the lead in their adventures, although Joe was just as sharp and skilled in reasoning as his brother.
Mrs. Hardy viewed their passion for detective work with considerable apprehension, preferring that they plan to go to a university and direct their energies toward entering one of the professions; but the success of the lads had been so marked in the cases on which they had been engaged that she had by now almost resigned herself to seeing them destined for careers as private detectives when they should grow older.
Mrs. Hardy looked at their passion for detective work with a lot of worry, wishing instead that they would plan to go to college and focus their efforts on entering a profession. However, the boys' success in the cases they had worked on was so impressive that she had nearly come to accept that they were meant for careers as private detectives when they grew up.
Just now, however, detective work was farthest from their thoughts. Frank and Tony Prito were engaged in some complicated maneuvers on the parallel bars, Joe was taking a boxing lesson from Biff Hooper, and Phil Cohen was trying to learn how to walk on his hands, under the guidance of Jerry Gilroy and Slim Robinson.
Just now, though, detective work was the last thing on their minds. Frank and Tony Prito were doing some tricky moves on the parallel bars, Joe was taking a boxing lesson from Biff Hooper, and Phil Cohen was trying to learn to walk on his hands with help from Jerry Gilroy and Slim Robinson.
As for Chet Morton, the mischief-maker, he was sitting on the window-sill, meditating. And when Chet Morton meditated, it usually meant that a practical joke was in the offing.
As for Chet Morton, the troublemaker, he was sitting on the windowsill, deep in thought. And when Chet Morton was deep in thought, it typically meant that a practical joke was coming up.
"I'll bet you can't 'skin the cat' on that trapeze, Jerry," he called out suddenly.
"I'll bet you can't do a trick on that trapeze, Jerry," he said suddenly.
Jerry Gilroy looked up.
Jerry Gilroy looked up.
"Skin the cat?" he said. "Of course I can."
"Skin the cat?" he asked. "Of course I can."
"Bet you can't."
"Bet you can't do it."
"Bet I can."
"I bet I can."
"Can't."
"Cannot."
"Can."
"Can."
"Do it, then."
"Go ahead and do it."
"Watch me."
"Check this out."
As every boy knows, "skinning the cat" is an acrobatic feat that does not necessarily embrace cruelty to animals. Jerry Gilroy was not unjustly proud of his prowess on the trapeze and Chet Morton's doubt of his ability to perform one of the simplest stunts in his repertoire made him resolve to "skin the cat" as slowly and elaborately as lay within his power.
As every boy knows, "skinning the cat" is an acrobatic move that doesn't have to involve harming animals. Jerry Gilroy was rightfully proud of his skills on the trapeze, and Chet Morton’s skepticism about his ability to pull off one of the easiest tricks in his routine motivated him to "skin the cat" as slowly and elaborately as he could.
He grasped the trapeze bar with both hands, then swung forward, raising his feet from the floor, bending his knees. Chet edged forward, presumably to get a better view of proceedings, but at the same time he tightened his grip on a long, flat stick that he had found by the window ledge.
He grabbed the trapeze bar with both hands, then swung forward, lifting his feet off the ground and bending his knees. Chet moved closer, likely to get a better look at what was happening, but he also tightened his grip on a long, flat stick he had found by the window ledge.
Jerry slowly doubled up until his feet were above his head, immediately below the bar, and then commenced the second stage of the elaborate back somersault, coming down slowly toward the floor. At this juncture the rear of his trousers was presented as a tempting mark to the waiting Chet. This was the stage of the feat for which the joker had been waiting and he raised the flat stick, bringing it down with a resounding smack on his human target.
Jerry gradually bent over until his feet were above his head, right under the bar, and then began the second part of the tricky backflip, slowly descending towards the floor. At this moment, the back of his pants became an inviting target for Chet, who had been eagerly awaiting this moment. He lifted the flat stick and brought it down with a loud smack on his unsuspecting target.
There was a yelp of pain from Jerry and a roar of laughter from Chet. Doubled up on the bar as he was, Jerry could not immediately regain the floor, and Chet managed to belabor him twice more before the unfortunate acrobat finally found his footing. There he stood, bewildered, rubbing the seat of his trousers, with a rueful expression on his face, while Chet leaned against the wall, helpless with laughter.
There was a yelp of pain from Jerry and a burst of laughter from Chet. Stuck at the bar, Jerry couldn't quickly get back on his feet, and Chet managed to hit him two more times before the poor acrobat finally balanced himself. He stood there, confused, rubbing the back of his pants, looking regretful, while Chet leaned against the wall, unable to contain his laughter.
The other boys joined in the merriment, for they had stopped to witness the incident, and after a while Jerry achieved a wry smile, although he looked reflectively at his tormentor as though wondering just what form his revenge should take.
The other boys joined in the fun, having stopped to watch the scene unfold, and after a while, Jerry managed a crooked smile, although he looked thoughtfully at his tormentor as if contemplating what kind of revenge he should plan.
No one enjoyed Chet Morton's practical jokes more than he did himself. He whooped with laughter, wiped the tears from his eyes, and leaned out of the window, spluttering with mirth.
No one enjoyed Chet Morton's practical jokes more than he did himself. He laughed loudly, wiped the tears from his eyes, and leaned out of the window, gasping with joy.
"Oh, boy!" he giggled. "The expression—on your—face—!" Then he was away again, leaning across the window-sill weakly, shaking with laughter.
"Oh, wow!" he laughed. "The look—on your—face—!" Then he was off again, leaning weakly across the window-sill, shaking with laughter.
Jerry Gilroy tiptoed quietly up behind him. A quick movement and he lowered the window until it was against Chet's back.
Jerry Gilroy quietly tiptoed up behind him. With a quick motion, he lowered the window until it pressed against Chet's back.
The practical joker suddenly stopped laughing, and turned his head.
The prankster suddenly stopped laughing and turned his head.
"Hey! What's the matter?" he inquired.
"Hey! What’s up?" he asked.
He was pinned down by the window and he could not see Jerry picking up the flat piece of board that had been the instrument of torture a few minutes previously. But a suspicion of the truth came to him, and a roar of laughter from the other boys warned him that vengeance was due.
He was stuck by the window and couldn’t see Jerry picking up the flat piece of wood that had been used to torture him a few minutes earlier. But a feeling of the truth hit him, and a loud laugh from the other boys clued him in that payback was coming.
It came.
It arrived.
Smack!
Smack!
Chet Morton wriggled and squirmed, but he was pinned helplessly by the weight of the window against his shoulders, and he presented a more tempting target for Jerry's ministrations with the flat stick, and a more stationary target as well, than Jerry had presented for him.
Chet Morton wiggled and squirmed, but he was stuck helplessly by the weight of the window pressing down on his shoulders, making him an easier target for Jerry's playful strikes with the flat stick. He was also a more stationary target than Jerry had been for him.
Smack! Smack! Smack!
Smack! Smack! Smack!
He roared with pain and, helpless as he was, danced vainly on the floor in his efforts to escape. Jerry Gilroy belabored him across the rear with that stinging stick until his desire for revenge had been fully satisfied, while the other boys howled with glee at the manner in which the tables had been turned.
He screamed in pain and, feeling helpless, danced uselessly on the floor trying to get away. Jerry Gilroy hit him across the backside with that sharp stick until he felt completely satisfied with his revenge, while the other boys laughed joyfully at how the tables had turned.
Finally, when Jerry tossed the flat stick away and joined the others in their laughter, Chet managed to raise the window and escape.
Finally, when Jerry threw the flat stick aside and joined the others in their laughter, Chet managed to open the window and get away.
"Can't see what you're all laughing at," he grumbled, as he sat down carefully on a near-by box. Then he rose hurriedly and rubbed the tender spot.
"Can't see what you’re all laughing at," he muttered as he sat down cautiously on a nearby box. Then he quickly stood up and rubbed the sore spot.
"He laughs best who laughs last," quoted Jerry Gilroy.
"He laughs best who laughs last," quoted Jerry Gilroy.
"Guess I've got to get home," announced Biff, a moment later, and soon he and the others were on their way, dodging through the rain.
"Looks like I need to head home," Biff said after a moment, and soon he and the others were on their way, weaving through the rain.
Then Frank and Joe put the barn in order and went into the house. They felt particularly carefree and never dreamed of the news they were to hear or of how it was to affect them and their chums.
Then Frank and Joe organized the barn and went into the house. They felt especially carefree and had no idea of the news they were about to hear or how it would affect them and their friends.
CHAPTER III
A Shady Trio
A Sketchy Trio
"I am sure my man is in Chicago. I know for a fact that he went West, and the Windy City would naturally be his hiding place."
"I’m sure my guy is in Chicago. I know for sure he headed West, and the Windy City would totally be his hideout."
Fenton Hardy tapped the library table reflectively with a pencil. Mrs. Hardy put aside the magazine she had been reading.
Fenton Hardy tapped the library table thoughtfully with a pencil. Mrs. Hardy set down the magazine she had been reading.
"Are you going to follow him?"
"Are you going to go after him?"
"I'll trail him right to the Pacific Coast if necessary."
"I'll follow him all the way to the Pacific Coast if I have to."
Frank and Joe Hardy, who had been standing by the window, disconsolately watching the rain streaking down the pane, looked around.
Frank and Joe Hardy, who had been standing by the window, sadly watching the rain run down the glass, looked around.
"Who is he, dad?" asked Frank.
"Who is he, Dad?" asked Frank.
"One of the cleverest and most daring bank robbers in the country. I've been after him for almost a year now and it's only been within the last few weeks that I've ever come anywhere near catching him."
"One of the smartest and boldest bank robbers in the country. I've been chasing him for almost a year now, and it's only been in the last few weeks that I've gotten close to catching him."
"What's his name?"
"What's his name?"
Fenton Hardy laughed. "I've made you curious, eh? Well, this chap has about a dozen names. He has a new alias every week, but so far as the police are concerned he's known as Baldy Turk, because he's as bald as an egg. He and his gang held up a bank in a small New Jersey town about a month ago and got away with over ten thousand dollars in broad daylight. That's how I managed to get trace of him again. Even the police didn't know Baldy Turk was mixed up in the affair because he was wearing a wig that day, but he double-crossed one of the members of his gang out of his share in the loot."
Fenton Hardy laughed. "I've got you curious, huh? Well, this guy has about a dozen names. He comes up with a new alias every week, but as far as the police are concerned, he's known as Baldy Turk, because he's as bald as an egg. He and his gang robbed a bank in a small New Jersey town about a month ago and got away with over ten thousand dollars right in broad daylight. That's how I was able to track him down again. Even the police didn’t realize Baldy Turk was involved because he was wearing a wig that day, but he betrayed one of his gang members and cheated him out of his share of the loot."
"And that fellow told the police," ventured Joe.
"And that guy told the police," Joe suggested.
Mr. Hardy shook his head.
Mr. Hardy shook his head.
"Not the police. He didn't dare go near them because he was wanted for two or three robberies himself. But he came to me and tipped me off as to where Baldy Turk could be found. He wanted revenge. I went to New York, where Baldy was in hiding; but evidently some of his friends knew I was on his trail and he disappeared before I could lay my hands on him."
"Not the cops. He didn't dare go near them because he was wanted for two or three robberies himself. But he came to me and gave me a heads-up about where to find Baldy Turk. He wanted payback. I went to New York, where Baldy was hiding, but it seemed like some of his friends knew I was after him, and he vanished before I could get my hands on him."
"Where did he go then?" asked Frank, with interest.
"Where did he go then?" Frank asked, intrigued.
"He hid out on Long Island for a while, but I managed to pick up the trail again and went after him, but he was too smart for me. He got away in a fast automobile and took a couple of shots at me in the bargain. I managed to get the number of the car and traced it to Manhattan and later found that Baldy Turk had left the East altogether. He bought a ticket to Cleveland, doubled back to Buffalo and managed to shake me off."
"He stayed hidden on Long Island for a bit, but I picked up his trail again and went after him, though he was too clever for me. He made a getaway in a fast car and even fired a couple of shots at me while he was at it. I was able to note the car's license plate and traced it to Manhattan, only to find out later that Baldy Turk had left the East for good. He bought a ticket to Cleveland, then went back to Buffalo and successfully lost me."
"What makes you think he is in Chicago?"
"What makes you think he's in Chicago?"
"Because another member of his gang went to Chicago just a week ago. So I imagine Baldy Turk was to meet him there. In any case, Chicago is a thieves' paradise, so it seems logical that Baldy Turk would make for there."
"Because another member of his gang went to Chicago just a week ago. So I guess Baldy Turk was supposed to meet him there. In any case, Chicago is a thieves' paradise, so it makes sense that Baldy Turk would head there."
"And you're going after him! Gee, I wish I could go," declared Joe.
"And you're going after him! Man, I wish I could go," Joe said.
Fenton Hardy smiled.
Fenton Hardy grinned.
"It's no job for a boy," he said. "Baldy Turk is a bad man with a gun. If I ever do find him it will take some maneuvering to get the handcuffs on him, I'll tell you."
"It's not a job for a kid," he said. "Baldy Turk is a dangerous guy with a gun. If I ever do find him, it'll take some fancy moves to get the handcuffs on him, I swear."
"You'll be careful, won't you, Fenton," said Mrs. Hardy anxiously. "I'm always frightened whenever I know you're after one of these desperate criminals."
"You'll be careful, right, Fenton?" Mrs. Hardy said anxiously. "I always get scared whenever I know you're going after one of these dangerous criminals."
"I'll be as careful as I can, Laura," promised her husband; "but in my business I have to take chances. Baldy Turk knows I'm after him and he doesn't mean to be caught if he can help it. He or any of the men in his gang would shoot me on sight. There's a standing reward of five thousand dollars out for Baldy and, besides, the Bankers' Association have promised me a handsome fee if I can get him behind the bars and break up the gang."
"I'll be as careful as I can, Laura," her husband promised. "But in my line of work, I have to take risks. Baldy Turk knows I'm after him, and he won’t get caught if he can avoid it. He or any of his gang would shoot me on sight. There’s a standing reward of five thousand dollars for Baldy, and on top of that, the Bankers' Association has promised me a nice fee if I can get him locked up and shut down the gang."
"I won't rest easy in my mind until you're back home safe," Mrs. Hardy declared.
"I won't be at ease until you're back home safe," Mrs. Hardy declared.
"Don't worry about me," replied her husband, going over to her and patting her shoulder reassuringly. "I'll get back safely all right, and Baldy Turk will be in jail if I have to chase him all over the States. The boys will look after you while I'm away."
"Don't worry about me," her husband said, moving closer and giving her shoulder a reassuring pat. "I'll be back safely, and if I need to, I'll track down Baldy Turk all over the country to make sure he's in jail. The guys will take care of you while I'm gone."
"You bet we will!" Frank promised.
"You bet we will!" Frank promised.
"I'm sorry it keeps you from going on that motorboat trip with Chet and Biff," Mr. Hardy remarked. "Perhaps you can arrange another jaunt after I come back."
"I'm sorry this stops you from going on that motorboat trip with Chet and Biff," Mr. Hardy said. "Maybe you can plan another outing after I get back."
"We're not worrying about that, dad. We don't mind staying at home."
"We're not worried about that, Dad. We don't mind staying home."
"That's the spirit," approved their father.
"That's the spirit," their father said with approval.
"When do you leave?" Frank asked.
"When are you leaving?" Frank asked.
"I'm waiting for a letter from a friend of mine in Chicago. If he writes as I expect he will write, I should be away by the day after to-morrow."
"I'm waiting for a letter from a friend in Chicago. If he writes like I think he will, I should be leaving the day after tomorrow."
"Then let Baldy Turk watch his step!" observed Joe.
"Then let Baldy Turk watch his step!" said Joe.
"We'll both have to watch our step," answered Mr. Hardy, smiling. "If I don't get him, he'll probably get me."
"We both need to be careful," Mr. Hardy replied with a smile. "If I don't catch him, he might catch me."
"Well, I'm betting on you."
"Well, I’m counting on you."
Mrs. Hardy shook her head doubtfully, but said nothing. She knew that her detective husband had escaped death at the hands of desperate criminals many times in the course of his career and there seemed to be no reason why he should not bring Baldy Turk to book just as he had captured many other notorious criminals in the past; but this time she had a vague premonition of danger. She knew that her husband would laugh at her fears if she expressed them, so she remained silent.
Mrs. Hardy shook her head uncertainly but didn't say anything. She knew that her detective husband had narrowly avoided death at the hands of desperate criminals many times throughout his career, and there seemed to be no reason he shouldn't catch Baldy Turk just like he had captured many other infamous criminals before; but this time, she had a vague feeling of danger. She knew her husband would laugh at her worries if she voiced them, so she kept quiet.
The rain had stopped, as Frank noticed when he glanced out the window again.
The rain had stopped, as Frank saw when he looked out the window again.
"It's clearing up. What say we go out for a spin, Joe?"
"It's clearing up. How about we go for a drive, Joe?"
"Suits me."
"Sounds good to me."
"Let's go."
"Let's roll."
"Don't be late for supper," warned Mrs. Hardy, as the boys started out the door.
"Don't be late for dinner," warned Mrs. Hardy as the boys headed out the door.
"We'll be in time," they promised, and the door closed behind them.
"We'll be on time," they promised, and the door closed behind them.
The Hardy boys went out to the shed where they kept their motorcycles. Both Joe and Frank had machines, given to them by their father, and in their spare time they spent many hours speeding about the roads in and around Bayport.
The Hardy Boys went out to the shed where they stored their motorcycles. Both Joe and Frank had bikes that their dad gave them, and in their free time, they spent hours racing around the roads in and around Bayport.
Their native city had a population of about fifty thousand people and was on the Atlantic coast, on Barmet Bay. There were good roads along both northern and southern arms of the bay, besides the State highway and the numerous country roads that led through the farming country back of Bayport.
Their hometown had a population of around fifty thousand and was located on the Atlantic coast, at Barmet Bay. There were well-maintained roads along both the northern and southern sides of the bay, in addition to the State highway and several country roads that ran through the farmland behind Bayport.
Chet Morton, whose father was a real estate dealer with an office in the city, lived on a farm some distance off the road along the north arm of the bay, Chet making the daily journey to school and back in a roadster that had been given to him by his father. Chet was as proud of his roadster as the Hardy boys were proud of the motorboat that they had bought from the money they had received as reward for solving the Tower Mystery.
Chet Morton, whose dad was a real estate agent with an office in the city, lived on a farm a bit off the road along the north side of the bay. Chet made the daily trip to school and back in a roadster that his father had given him. Chet was just as proud of his roadster as the Hardy boys were of the motorboat they bought with the money they got as a reward for solving the Tower Mystery.
"Where shall we go?" asked Joe, as the Hardy boys rode out of the lane.
"Where should we go?" asked Joe as the Hardy boys rode out of the lane.
"Let's go to the Morton farm and see Chet."
"Let's head over to the Morton farm and check in on Chet."
"Good idea. I wonder if he's able to sit down yet," replied Joe, alluding to Chet's practical joke earlier in the day.
"Good idea. I wonder if he can sit down yet," replied Joe, referring to Chet's practical joke earlier in the day.
The motorcycles roared and spluttered as the boys sped along the gleaming pavements of the city. They rode through the main streets, threading their way easily through the traffic until at last they were at the outskirts of Bayport. Finally they left the city behind and reached the road leading toward the Morton farm. The leaves of the trees were still wet with rain and the luxuriant grass by the road-side glistened with the heavy drops. The air was cool and sweet after the storm. The roads had dried quickly, however, and the boys experienced no inconvenience.
The motorcycles roared and sputtered as the guys sped along the shiny pavements of the city. They cruised through the main streets, weaving easily through the traffic until they finally reached the outskirts of Bayport. They left the city behind and hit the road leading to the Morton farm. The leaves on the trees were still damp from the rain, and the lush grass by the roadside shimmered with heavy droplets. The air was cool and fresh after the storm. However, the roads dried quickly, and the guys faced no issues.
They reached the Morton farmhouse in good time and Chet's sister, Iola, answered their knock. Iola was a pretty girl of about fifteen, one of the few girls at whom Joe Hardy had ever cast more than a passing glance. He lowered his eyes bashfully when she appeared in the doorway.
They arrived at the Morton farmhouse on time, and Chet's sister, Iola, answered the door. Iola was a pretty girl of about fifteen, one of the few girls Joe Hardy had ever looked at more than just briefly. He dropped his gaze shyly when she showed up in the doorway.
"Chet just left in the car about ten minutes ago," she said smilingly, in answer to their inquiry. "It's strange you didn't meet him."
"Chet just left in the car about ten minutes ago," she said with a smile, responding to their question. "It's odd you didn't see him."
"He probably went by the other road. We'll catch up to him."
"He probably took the other road. We'll catch up to him."
"Won't you come in?"
"Will you come in?"
"N-no thanks," stammered Joe, blushing. "Guess we'll be going."
"N-no thanks," Joe stammered, blushing. "I guess we'll be heading out."
"Oh, do come in," said Iola coaxingly. "Callie Shaw is here."
"Oh, please come in," Iola said sweetly. "Callie Shaw is here."
"Is she?" Frank brightened up at this intelligence, and at that moment a brown-eyed, dark-haired girl about his own age appeared in the hall.
"Is she?" Frank perked up at this news, and just then a brown-eyed, dark-haired girl around his age appeared in the hall.
"Hello!" she called, smiling pleasantly, and displaying small, even teeth of a dazzling whiteness.
"Hey!" she said, smiling invitingly, showing her small, straight teeth that were brilliantly white.
"Let's go," muttered Joe, tugging at Frank's sleeve. He was incurably shy in the presence of girls, especially Iola.
"Let's go," Joe whispered, pulling on Frank's sleeve. He was hopelessly shy around girls, especially Iola.
But Frank did not go just then. He chatted with Callie Shaw for a while, and Iola tried to make conversation with Joe, whose answers were mumbled and muttered, while he inwardly wished he could talk as freely and without embarrassment as his brother. At length Frank decided to go and Joe sighed with relief. The girls bade them good-bye after again urging them to come inside the house, and the boys departed.
But Frank didn’t leave right away. He talked with Callie Shaw for a bit, while Iola tried to strike up a conversation with Joe, whose replies were quiet and barely audible, as he secretly wished he could speak as easily and without awkwardness like his brother. Eventually, Frank chose to leave, and Joe let out a sigh of relief. The girls said goodbye to them, again encouraging them to come inside the house, and the boys left.
"Whew!" breathed Joe, mopping his brow. "I'm glad that's over."
"Whew!" Joe said, wiping his forehead. "I’m glad that’s done."
Frank looked at him in surprise.
Frank was surprised as he looked at him.
"Why, what's the matter? I thought you liked Iola Morton."
"What's wrong? I thought you liked Iola Morton."
"That's just the trouble—I do," answered Joe mysteriously, and Frank wisely forbore further inquiry.
"That's just the problem—I do," Joe replied mysteriously, and Frank wisely chose not to ask more questions.
They mounted their motorcycles again and rode down the lane, out to the road. Hardly had they gone more than a few hundred yards, however, than Frank suddenly gestured to his brother and they slowed down.
They got back on their motorcycles and rode down the lane to the road. Just a few hundred yards in, Frank suddenly signaled to his brother, and they slowed down.
Pulled up beside the road was an automobile, and as the boys drew near they saw that three men were in the car. The men were talking together and they looked up as the boys approached.
Pulled up beside the road was a car, and as the boys got closer, they saw that three men were inside. The men were talking amongst themselves and looked up as the boys approached.
Something in the attitude of the trio aroused Frank's suspicions, and this prompted him to ride slower. There seemed no apparent reason why the men should have pulled their car up beside the road, for they were not repairing a breakdown and they were still a little distance from the lane leading to the Morton farmhouse. Then, as the motorcycles slowly passed the car and the three men sullenly regarded the two boys, Frank suppressed an exclamation of surprise.
Something about the trio's demeanor made Frank suspicious, so he decided to slow down. There didn’t seem to be any good reason for the men to have parked their car by the side of the road; they weren’t fixing a breakdown, and they were still a bit away from the lane leading to the Morton farmhouse. Then, as the motorcycles slowly went past the car, the three men looked at the two boys with a gloomy expression, and Frank held back a gasp of surprise.
The three men in the car were the three men who had pursued the boys in the motorboat earlier in the day!
The three guys in the car were the same three guys who had chased the boys in the motorboat earlier that day!
Frank and Joe drove past, conscious of the scrutiny of the unsavory trio in the automobile. The men did not speak, although Frank noticed that one of them drew his cap down over his eyes and muttered something to one of his companions.
Frank and Joe drove by, aware of the watchful gaze of the shady trio in the car. The men didn't say anything, but Frank noticed that one of them pulled his cap down over his eyes and muttered something to one of his friends.
When they had gone by, Joe glanced back. The man were paying no further attention to them, but were leaning close together, evidently having resumed their interrupted conversation. There was something stealthy and secretive in their demeanor that was far from reassuring.
When they passed by, Joe looked back. The men weren't paying any more attention to them; instead, they were huddled together, clearly back to their interrupted conversation. There was something sneaky and secretive about their behavior that felt far from comforting.
"Did you recognize them?" asked Frank, when they were out of earshot.
"Did you recognize them?" Frank asked when they were out of earshot.
"I'll say I did! The same gang that followed us in the motorboat."
"I'll say I did! The same group that followed us in the motorboat."
"I wonder what they're up to."
"I wonder what they're up to."
"Up to no good, by the looks of them."
"Looks like they're up to no good."
"That's a queer place to park their car—so close to the Morton farm, too."
"That's a strange place to park their car—right next to the Morton farm, too."
"They look like a bad outfit to me," remarked Joe.
"They look like a terrible outfit to me," Joe said.
"I'd like to know more about them. There was something funny about the way they chased us in the boat. And don't you remember how closely they looked at Chet and Biff? It seems funny to see them hanging around the farm."
"I want to learn more about them. There was something strange about the way they pursued us in the boat. And don’t you remember how closely they watched Chet and Biff? It seems odd to see them loitering around the farm."
"Well, they haven't done us any harm. I suppose it's none of our business—but I'd sure like to know what their game is. Let's find Chet and tell him."
"Well, they haven't hurt us. I guess it's not our concern—but I'm really curious about what they're up to. Let's find Chet and let him know."
They increased their speed and before long overtook Chet Morton on the shore road. But Chet laughed at their fears.
They sped up and soon passed Chet Morton on the shore road. But Chet just laughed at their worries.
"You're too suspicious," he said. "They had probably just stopped to fix a tire when you came along. However, we'll go back to the farm and see if they're still on hand."
"You're being too paranoid," he said. "They probably just pulled over to fix a tire when you showed up. But let's head back to the farm and see if they're still around."
But when the boys drove back to the Morton farm they found that the mysterious trio in the automobile were no longer in sight.
But when the boys drove back to the Morton farm, they discovered that the mysterious trio in the car was no longer in sight.
CHAPTER IV
The Send-Off
The Farewell
On Monday, Chet Morton and Biff Hooper set out on their motorboat trip up the coast. They were well equipped with provisions and supplies and had been up since six o'clock that morning getting the boat in readiness.
On Monday, Chet Morton and Biff Hooper embarked on their motorboat trip up the coast. They were well stocked with food and supplies and had been up since six that morning preparing the boat.
The Hardy boys went down to the dock to bid them good-bye, and although they chaffed the adventurers and laughed with them, neither Frank nor Joe could repress the disappointment they naturally felt at being unable to go with their chums.
The Hardy boys went down to the dock to say goodbye, and even though they joked around and laughed with the adventurers, neither Frank nor Joe could hide the disappointment they felt about not being able to join their friends.
Chet was busy stowing away the last of the provisions and Biff was tuning up the engine when the Hardy boys arrived. In a few minutes Tony Prito, at the helm of his own motorboat, arrived on the scene with Jerry Gilroy and Phil Cohen. Then, down the dock, came tripping Iola Morton and Callie Shaw.
Chet was busy packing away the last of the supplies, and Biff was tuning the engine when the Hardy boys showed up. A few minutes later, Tony Prito, in his own motorboat, showed up with Jerry Gilroy and Phil Cohen. Then, down the dock, Iola Morton and Callie Shaw came walking up.
"Hail, hail, the gang's all here!" roared Chet, when he saw them.
"Hooray, hooray, everyone's here!" shouted Chet when he saw them.
"Oy, what a fine day you pick for your trip!" exclaimed Phil Cohen, looking up at the clouds. For the sky was overcast and there was no sun.
"Oy, what a great day you chose for your trip!" Phil Cohen exclaimed, looking up at the clouds. The sky was overcast and there was no sun.
"That's all right," answered Chet. "We made up our minds to start to-day and we'd start if there was a thunderstorm on."
"That's fine," Chet replied. "We decided to start today and we would go even if there was a thunderstorm."
"Brave sailors!" mocked Callie Shaw, with a smile.
"Brave sailors!" Callie Shaw teased with a smile.
"How long will you be away?" shouted Frank.
"How long will you be gone?" shouted Frank.
"Until the grub runs out."
"Until the food runs out."
"That should be about next December," ventured Iola. "It looks to me as if you have enough provisions there to last you a year."
"That should be around next December," Iola suggested. "It seems to me like you have enough supplies there to last you a year."
"Not with Chet Morton on the trip, we haven't," grunted Biff Hooper, looking up from the engine. "We'll be lucky if it lasts us a week. I've seen him eat before."
"Not with Chet Morton on the trip, we haven't," grunted Biff Hooper, looking up from the engine. "We'll be lucky if it lasts us a week. I've seen him eat before."
"I'll do my share," Chet promised modestly.
"I'll do my part," Chet promised humbly.
"We should have had the City Band down to give you a proper send-off," Joe Hardy remarked.
"We should have brought in the City Band to give you a proper send-off," Joe Hardy said.
"It doesn't matter. We'll forgive you this time. But be sure and have the band here to welcome us when we come back."
"It’s all good. We’ll let it slide this time. But make sure the band is here to welcome us when we return."
"You'll be back by to-morrow night," declared Iola. "I know you! Why, I'll bet you'll both be scared green when darkness comes on. One night will cure you of sleeping in the open."
"You'll be back by tomorrow night," Iola announced. "I know you! I bet you'll both be so scared when night falls. One night will make you think twice about sleeping outdoors."
"Rats!" replied Chet good-naturedly. "I'm not afraid of the dark."
"Rats!" Chet replied cheerfully. "I'm not scared of the dark."
"Cut out the jawing and let's get started," said Biff Hooper. "No use hanging around here. Are you ready?"
"Stop talking and let's get started," said Biff Hooper. "There's no point in hanging around here. Are you ready?"
"All set!"
"All ready!"
"Let's go then. Good-bye, everybody."
"Let's go then. Goodbye, everyone."
"Good-bye!" every one shouted. Frank and Joe cheered, the girls clapped their hands, and the Envoy slowly moved away from the dock, with Chet Morton and Biff Hooper waving to their chums.
"Goodbye!" everyone shouted. Frank and Joe cheered, the girls clapped their hands, and the Envoy slowly pulled away from the dock, with Chet Morton and Biff Hooper waving to their friends.
Tony Prito swung his motorboat around.
Tony Prito turned his motorboat around.
"I'll go along with you to the end of the bay," he shouted.
"I'll go with you to the end of the bay," he yelled.
Frank glanced at Joe.
Frank looked at Joe.
"Why didn't we think of that?"
"Why didn’t we think of that?"
"It isn't too late yet. Let's get the boat."
"It’s not too late yet. Let's grab the boat."
"Would you and Iola care to come?" said Frank to Callie. "We're going to get our boat and follow them down the bay a bit."
"Do you and Iola want to join us?" Frank asked Callie. "We're going to grab our boat and follow them down the bay for a bit."
"Oh, that'll be great!" exclaimed Callie. "I'd love to go. Wouldn't you, Iola?"
"Oh, that sounds awesome!" Callie exclaimed. "I’d love to go. How about you, Iola?"
"I'll say!" Iola replied, slangily.
"Totally!" Iola replied, slangily.
They hurried down from the dock and went along the roadway back of the boathouses until they came to the boathouse where Frank and Joe kept their craft.
They rushed down from the dock and walked along the path behind the boathouses until they reached the boathouse where Frank and Joe stored their boat.
In a few minutes, the Sleuth was nosing its way out into Barmet Bay, but already Chet and Biff were a considerable distance in the lead.
In just a few minutes, the Sleuth was making its way out into Barmet Bay, but Chet and Biff were already a good distance ahead.
"We'll have to step on it," said Joe.
"We need to hurry," said Joe.
"We'll catch them, all right. There isn't a boat on the bay can beat the Sleuth."
"We'll catch them, no problem. There's not a single boat on the bay that can outrun the Sleuth."
The engine roared and the boat seemed fairly to leap out of the water as it plunged forward. Spray dashed over the bows as the fleet launch headed out in pursuit of the others.
The engine roared, and the boat almost jumped out of the water as it surged forward. Spray flew over the front as the fleet launch sped off in chase of the others.
Frank glanced at the sky.
Frank looked up at the sky.
Biff and Chet had certainly chosen a bad day for their departure. The sky had been none too promising at dawn, but now it was clouding over with every promise of a downpour, and there was a heavy cloud on the horizon. Then, too, there was a suspicious absence of wind, and the bay was in a flat calm.
Biff and Chet had definitely picked a bad day to leave. The sky hadn't looked great at dawn, and now it was getting cloudier by the minute, with all signs pointing to a heavy rainstorm, and a dark cloud hanging on the horizon. Plus, there was a noticeable lack of wind, and the bay was completely still.
"I wish they'd picked some other day," he remarked quietly to Joe. "It looks like squally weather out at sea."
"I wish they had chosen a different day," he said softly to Joe. "It looks like rough weather out at sea."
"I don't like the looks of the sky myself. However, they're away, so there's no use saying anything. It might alarm Iola."
"I don't like the way the sky looks myself. However, they're gone, so there's no point in saying anything. It might worry Iola."
The Sleuth was rapidly overhauling the other boats, although Tony and Biff were engaging in a spirited race down the bay. The girls enjoyed the swift progress and were laughing with excitement as they saw the distance narrowing between Frank and the others.
The Sleuth was quickly catching up to the other boats, while Tony and Biff were having a lively race down the bay. The girls loved the fast pace and were laughing with excitement as they noticed the gap closing between Frank and the others.
Suddenly a low rumble of thunder caused Frank to glance up at the sky again. With remarkable rapidity, the huge cloud he had previously noticed had spread over the entire sky, causing gloom to spread over the bay. A few white caps were apparent on the surface of the water and there was a splatter of rain.
Suddenly, a low rumble of thunder made Frank look up at the sky again. With surprising speed, the huge cloud he had seen before had covered the entire sky, spreading darkness over the bay. A few white caps were visible on the surface of the water, and there was a light drizzle of rain.
"Guess we'd better turn back," he said, turning to the others.
"Looks like we should head back," he said, turning to the others.
"Why, what's the matter?" asked Callie.
"What's up?" Callie asked.
"Storm coming up."
"Storm is approaching."
The girls had been so intent on the chase that they had not noticed the lowering clouds, but now Callie gave a murmur of astonishment.
The girls had been so focused on the chase that they hadn't noticed the darkening clouds, but now Callie let out a surprised murmur.
"Why, it's going to pour! And I haven't brought my slicker with me. We'll be drenched."
"Wow, it's about to pour! And I didn't bring my raincoat. We'll be soaked."
"But what about Biff and Chet?" exclaimed Iola.
"But what about Biff and Chet?" Iola exclaimed.
"I think they'll turn back too when they see what they're heading into," replied Frank. "It looks like a bad storm."
"I think they'll turn back too when they see what they're about to face," Frank said. "It looks like a really bad storm."
As though in corroboration of his words, a sheet of lightning and a violent clap of thunder heralded the beginning of the downpour. The wind came in from the sea with a violence that surprised them, came whistling down across the bay over a wide line of tossing whitecaps, driving before it a leaden wall of rain.
As if to confirm his words, a flash of lightning and a loud clap of thunder signaled the start of the heavy rain. The wind rushed in from the sea with a force that caught them off guard, whistling across the bay over a broad line of churning whitecaps, pushing ahead a heavy wall of rain.
The two motorboats in the lead were blotted from view, although Frank had seen that Tony Prito was already turning back before the gloomy wall of rain hid him from sight. Slowly, he brought the motorboat around.
The two motorboats in the lead disappeared from sight, though Frank had noticed that Tony Prito was already turning back before the dark wall of rain concealed him. Gradually, he turned the motorboat around.
The moaning of the wind rose in volume. Waves slapped at the sides of the boat. White spray rose above the bows. The sky was black. The speeding craft fled before the oncoming storm.
The wind howled louder. Waves crashed against the sides of the boat. White spray flew up over the front. The sky was dark. The speeding vessel raced away from the approaching storm.
But the wall of rain swept down upon them with a whistle and a howl. The streaming sheets of water poured from the dark sky, whirled onward by the raging wind. The boat rocked in the tossing waves.
But the wall of rain came crashing down on them with a whistle and a howl. The sheets of water poured from the dark sky, swirling forward in the fierce wind. The boat rocked in the rough waves.
Frank crouched at the helm, his jaw set, his face stern. The girls huddled in the stern, seeking protection from the sudden downpour.
Frank crouched at the helm, his jaw tightened, his face serious. The girls gathered in the back, trying to stay dry from the sudden rain.
Joe found a sheet of tarpaulin in a locker, and gave it to the two girls, who draped it over their heads, and it afforded them some shelter. The boat was swaying madly as it ran on through the huge waves that surged on every side.
Joe found a tarp in a locker and handed it to the two girls, who threw it over their heads for some shelter. The boat was rocking wildly as it moved through the massive waves that crashed all around.
Frank could scarcely see Bayport ahead through the blinding rain and gloom.
Frank could barely see Bayport ahead through the pouring rain and darkness.
"Where is the other boat?" shouted Joe, above the clamor of the storm.
"Where's the other boat?" shouted Joe, over the noise of the storm.
Frank looked back.
Frank glanced back.
Tony Prito's boat had disappeared. Frank wondered how the other boys were faring. He had every confidence that Tony would make land in safety, for the Italian lad was skilful at the helm and he had iron nerves, but he was not so sure that Biff Hooper and Chet Morton would weather the gale so easily. Biff had only mastered the rudiments of motorboating and a storm such as this was enough to test the mettle of the most skilful sailors.
Tony Prito's boat was gone. Frank wondered how the other guys were doing. He was confident that Tony would reach shore safely since the Italian kid was skilled at handling the boat and had nerves of steel, but he wasn't so sure that Biff Hooper and Chet Morton would handle the storm as well. Biff had only learned the basics of motorboating, and a storm like this could challenge even the most experienced sailors.
He wondered if he should not turn back and go in search of Biff and Chet. When he had last seen them they had been heading directly into the teeth of the gale, out to the open sea. Surely they would not be foolhardy enough to go on!
He wondered if he should turn back and look for Biff and Chet. The last time he saw them, they were heading straight into the storm, out to the open sea. Surely they wouldn’t be reckless enough to keep going!
He glanced back and when he saw Iola's frightened face he knew that it was impossible to turn back now, for he was responsible for the safety of the girls and there was grave peril in braving the storm just then. He opened the throttle further and felt the Sleuth respond as it leaped ahead into the tossing whitecaps through the shifting screen of rain.
He looked back, and when he saw Iola's scared face, he realized that turning back was no longer an option. He was responsible for the girls' safety, and facing the storm now was extremely dangerous. He pushed the throttle further and felt the Sleuth surge ahead into the churning whitecaps, cutting through the rain.
Thunder rolled and crashed. Lightning flickered across the gray void and rent the dark sky in livid streaks. The waves were tossing like white-crested monsters seeking to devour them. Frank peered through the raging gale and he could vaguely discern the city lying ahead. A few lights were twinkling feebly, for the storm brought the darkness of twilight with it.
Thunder rumbled and crashed. Lightning flickered across the gray nothingness, tearing through the dark sky in vivid streaks. The waves tossed like white-crested monsters trying to swallow them whole. Frank squinted through the howling wind and could just make out the city ahead. A few lights were faintly twinkling, as the storm brought the darkness of dusk with it.
The gale had sprung up so suddenly that they had been entirely unprepared. Frank devoutly wished that he had taken heed of the warning given by that ominous sky before he started out in the motorboat. He was greatly alarmed for the safety of the girls, because he knew that the storm was one of the worst that had ever swept over Barmet Bay.
The wind had picked up so suddenly that they were completely unprepared. Frank fervently wished he had paid attention to the warning from the threatening sky before he set out in the motorboat. He was really worried about the girls' safety because he knew this storm was one of the worst that had ever hit Barmet Bay.
"We'll be lucky if we make it!" he muttered to himself. Then, to reassure the others, he turned and grinned.
"We'll be lucky if we make it!" he muttered to himself. Then, to reassure the others, he turned and smiled.
"We'll make it, all right!" he shouted, the wind whisking the words away so that the others scarcely heard him.
"We'll make it, for sure!" he shouted, the wind carrying his words away so that the others barely heard him.
A great wave broke over the side. The boat reeled as though it had been struck by a giant hand.
A massive wave crashed over the side. The boat swayed as if it had been hit by a huge hand.
CHAPTER V
No Word from the Chums
No Word from the Friends
Frank Hardy bore down on the helm as the boat heeled over. For a breathless second he thought the craft would be swamped. Water poured over the gunwales. The girls screamed. Joe was thrown off his balance and went sprawling into the stern.
Frank Hardy tightened his grip on the wheel as the boat tilted. For a heart-stopping moment, he thought the vessel would capsize. Water surged over the sides. The girls screamed. Joe lost his balance and fell back into the rear of the boat.
But the Sleuth was staunch. In a moment it recovered, righted itself, and surged on through the storm. Frank breathed a sigh of relief. The engine throbbed steadily and, although the boat was rocking and swaying in the turbulent sea, it was drawing nearer shore and already he could distinguish the line of boathouses through the downpour.
But the Sleuth was resilient. In a moment, it bounced back, righted itself, and pushed through the storm. Frank sighed with relief. The engine pulsed steadily and, although the boat was rocking and swaying in the rough sea, it was getting closer to shore, and he could already make out the line of boathouses through the downpour.
For all its violence, the storm was brief. The wind began to die down, although the rain continued as though the heavens had been opened up. In a few minutes Frank was able to pick out his own boathouse and he headed the Sleuth directly for it. The sturdy craft sped swiftly toward the open doorway, then Frank shut off the engine and the boat came to rest.
For all its chaos, the storm was short-lived. The wind started to calm down, but the rain kept pouring as if the sky had been unleashed. In a few minutes, Frank spotted his boathouse and steered the Sleuth straight toward it. The sturdy boat moved quickly toward the open doorway, then Frank turned off the engine and the boat stopped.
"Some trip!" remarked Joe, shaking himself like a dog emerging from the water, so that spray flew from his clothing in every direction.
"What a trip!" Joe said, shaking himself like a dog coming out of the water, sending spray flying from his clothes in every direction.
"My hair is all wet, and I won't be able to do a thing with it," mourned Callie Shaw, with feminine concern for her appearance first of all. In spite of the shelter afforded by the tarpaulin, both girls were thoroughly drenched. As for the boys, their clothing clung limply to their bodies. Frank clambered out of the boat and moored it fast, while Joe helped the girls up onto the landing.
"My hair is completely wet, and I can't do anything with it," complained Callie Shaw, focused on her looks above all else. Despite the cover of the tarpaulin, both girls were totally soaked. The boys weren't any better, their clothes sticking to them. Frank scrambled out of the boat and tied it up securely while Joe helped the girls onto the dock.
"We're mighty lucky to be back at all," Iola Morton said. "I was sure the boat would be swamped."
"We're really lucky to be back at all," Iola Morton said. "I thought for sure the boat would be flooded."
"It takes a pretty big storm to swamp our boat," boasted Joe. "Although, to tell the truth, I was pretty nervous for a while."
"It takes a pretty big storm to capsize our boat," Joe bragged. "But honestly, I was kind of nervous for a bit."
"I was so frightened I couldn't speak," confessed the girl. "I do hope Chet and Biff turned back. They would never get through that storm alive."
"I was so scared I couldn't talk," the girl admitted. "I really hope Chet and Biff turned back. There's no way they could survive that storm."
Frank went to the door.
Frank went to the door.
"No sight of them yet," he reported. Then he peered through the driving screen of rain again. "Just a minute—I hear a boat coming this way."
"No sign of them yet," he said. Then he looked through the pouring rain again. "Wait a second—I hear a boat coming this way."
"Perhaps it's Tony."
"Maybe it’s Tony."
"I hope it's one or the other. I couldn't see the Napoli at all after the rain started."
"I hope it’s one or the other. I couldn’t see the Napoli at all after the rain started."
In a few minutes they discerned a motorboat heading inshore. It was Tony Prito's craft, the Napoli.
In a few minutes, they spotted a motorboat coming toward the shore. It was Tony Prito's boat, the Napoli.
"Good!" exclaimed Joe. "Chet and Biff should be along, too. They won't start on that trip to-day."
"Great!" Joe exclaimed. "Chet and Biff should be here soon, too. They won't start that trip today."
"I should hope not!" exclaimed Iola.
"I really hope not!" Iola exclaimed.
But when Tony's boat drew near the entrance of the boathouse on the way to its own shelter a short distance away, Tony shouted to Frank:
But when Tony's boat got close to the entrance of the boathouse on the way to its own spot a short distance away, Tony shouted to Frank:
"All safe?"
"All good?"
"Everybody O.K.! How about you?"
"Everyone good! How about you?"
"We're all right. Had a tough time getting back, though."
"We're good. It was a rough time getting back, though."
"So did we," Frank shouted. "Did Biff turn back?"
"So did we," Frank shouted. "Did Biff come back?"
Tony shook his head. "Not a chance. We signaled to him that he'd better come back but he just shook his head, and Chet pointed to the end of the bay. They kept right on going. The last we saw of them they were heading right into the storm."
Tony shook his head. "No way. We signaled to him that he should come back, but he just shook his head, and Chet pointed to the end of the bay. They kept going. The last we saw of them, they were heading straight into the storm."
"Good night!" Frank exclaimed. "They'll be swamped."
"Good night!" Frank shouted. "They're going to be overwhelmed."
"They're taking an awful chance. Oh, well, perhaps they gave in after all. They may have headed in toward one of the villages along the shore. They'll probably be back."
"They're taking a huge risk. Oh, well, maybe they gave in after all. They might have gone toward one of the villages along the shore. They'll probably be back."
"Let's hope so!" exclaimed Iola. "I won't have a minute's rest until I'm sure they're safe."
"Let’s hope so!" Iola said excitedly. "I won't have a moment's peace until I'm sure they're safe."
Tony went on toward his own boathouse, with Jerry Gilroy and Phil Cohen, drenched to the skin, sitting ruefully in the stern. The Hardy boys and the two girls left the boathouse and were fortunate enough to meet a school chum who happened to be driving past in his car, so they drove home in shelter from the rain. Frank and Joe got off at their home after the chum had volunteered to drive the girls home.
Tony headed toward his boathouse, with Jerry Gilroy and Phil Cohen, completely soaked, sitting sadly in the back. The Hardy boys and the two girls left the boathouse and were lucky enough to run into a school friend who was driving by in his car, so they got a ride home out of the rain. Frank and Joe got out at their house after the friend offered to take the girls home.
"And I'll make it snappy, too," he promised. "I guess you're in a hurry to get into dry clothes."
"And I'll make it quick, too," he promised. "I guess you're in a rush to get into dry clothes."
"I feel like a drowned rat," declared Callie. "And I suppose I look like one too."
"I feel like a drowned rat," Callie said. "And I guess I look like one too."
After the others drove away, the Hardy boys went into the house and made a complete change of clothes so that, fifteen minutes later, in dry garments, they were feeling at peace with the world. When they went downstairs again to tell their parents of the adventure they had just experienced, they found Mr. Hardy just snapping the catch of his club-bag, while a packed suitcase stood near by.
After the others left, the Hardy boys went into the house and changed into fresh clothes, so that, fifteen minutes later, in dry outfits, they felt at ease with everything. When they went downstairs again to share their recent adventure with their parents, they found Mr. Hardy just closing the latch on his golf bag, while a packed suitcase sat nearby.
"Going away now?" they asked, in surprise.
"Are you leaving now?" they asked, surprised.
"Off to Chicago. I just got a fresh clue as to Baldy's whereabouts."
"Heading to Chicago. I just got a new lead on where Baldy is."
"He's there all right, is he?"
"He's definitely there, right?"
The detective nodded. "I'll just have time to catch this train."
The detective nodded. "I’ll just have time to catch this train."
Mrs. Hardy entered the room at that moment.
Mrs. Hardy walked into the room right then.
"I telephoned for a taxi." Her face was troubled. "I do wish you didn't have to make this journey, Fenton."
"I called for a taxi." Her face was worried. "I really wish you didn't have to take this trip, Fenton."
Mr. Hardy laughed.
Mr. Hardy chuckled.
"You've never worried about me so much before, Laura. I've gone away on cases as bad as this dozens of times without causing you as much anxiety."
"You've never stressed about me this much before, Laura. I've gone off on cases this serious dozens of times without making you this anxious."
"I know—but somehow I have a feeling that this case is a good deal more dangerous than any of the others."
"I know—but I have this feeling that this case is way more dangerous than the others."
"I'll be back in a few days, never fear." Mr. Hardy turned to his sons. "Look after your mother while I'm away, boys. Don't let her get worried."
"I'll be back in a few days, don't worry." Mr. Hardy turned to his sons. "Take care of your mother while I'm gone, boys. Don't let her get stressed."
"There's nothing to be worried about, dad. You'll get your man all right."
"There's nothing to worry about, Dad. You'll get your guy for sure."
Mrs. Hardy shook her head. "You will be careful, won't you, Fenton? From what you've told me of this Baldy Turk I imagine he wouldn't stop at anything if he thought you were going to catch him."
Mrs. Hardy shook her head. "You will be careful, won't you, Fenton? From what you've told me about this Baldy Turk, I can imagine he wouldn't hesitate to do anything if he thought you were going to catch him."
"He's a pretty tough character, but I guess I can handle him," said the detective lightly. "Well, here's my taxi. I'll have to be going. Good-bye." He kissed his wife, shook hands with the boys, then picked up his suitcase and club-bag and departed. From the front doorway they watched him clamber into the waiting taxi. He waved at them as the car got under way, then it went speeding out of sight along the shimmering pavement.
"He's a pretty tough guy, but I think I can manage him," the detective said casually. "Well, there's my taxi. I've got to go. Bye." He kissed his wife, shook hands with the boys, then grabbed his suitcase and club bag and left. From the front doorway, they watched him climb into the waiting taxi. He waved at them as the car took off, then it sped out of sight along the glimmering pavement.
Mrs. Hardy turned away. "I expect he'll think I'm foolish for worrying so much about him this time, but I have a queer sort of feeling that this Baldy Turk is the most dangerous criminal he has ever had to deal with."
Mrs. Hardy turned away. "I bet he thinks I'm silly for worrying so much about him this time, but I have a weird feeling that this Baldy Turk is the most dangerous criminal he's ever faced."
"He'll deal with him, mother," declared Frank, with conviction. "Trust dad to know what he's doing. He'll clap the handcuffs on Baldy Turk in no time. There's nothing to worry about."
"He'll handle it, Mom," Frank said confidently. "Trust Dad to know what he's doing. He'll have Baldy Turk in handcuffs before you know it. There's nothing to worry about."
"Well, I hope you're right," she replied. "Still, I can't help but be anxious—"
"Well, I hope you're right," she said. "Still, I can't help but feel anxious—"
With that she let the matter drop, and her fears for Fenton Hardy's safety were not expressed again, although the boys knew that anxiety still weighed heavily upon her mind. By evening, however, she appeared to be in better spirits and the boys did their best to amuse her and make her forget their father's absence and his perilous errand.
With that, she dropped the subject, and her worries about Fenton Hardy's safety weren't mentioned again, though the boys knew that she was still very anxious. By evening, though, she seemed to be in a better mood, and the boys did their best to entertain her and help her forget about their father's absence and his dangerous mission.
Next day the boys went down to the boathouse where Biff Hooper kept the Envoy, but there was no sign of the craft. The storm of the previous day had lasted well into the afternoon and there had been no doubt in their minds but that Chet and Biff had set back for Bayport, but the absence of the motorboat indicated otherwise.
The next day, the boys went down to the boathouse where Biff Hooper kept the Envoy, but there was no sign of the boat. The storm from the day before had gone on well into the afternoon, and they were sure that Chet and Biff had headed back to Bayport, but the missing motorboat suggested otherwise.
"Let's go up to Morton's farm and see if they did come back," Frank suggested.
"Let's head up to Morton's farm and check if they came back," Frank suggested.
"Iola was saying that Chet promised to send a post card from the first village they stopped at. They were to have spent the night at Hawk Cove and he said he'd drop a line from there so that his folks would know everything was all right."
"Iola was saying that Chet promised to send a postcard from the first village they stopped at. They were supposed to spend the night at Hawk Cove, and he said he'd send a note from there so his family would know everything was okay."
Hawk Cove was a small fishing village on the coast and, under normal conditions, Chet and Biff should have reached the place early the previous evening. A postal card would have caught the morning mail to Bayport.
Hawk Cove was a small fishing village on the coast, and under normal circumstances, Chet and Biff would have gotten there early the night before. A postcard would have made it onto the morning mail to Bayport.
"Let's go, then," Frank said. "If they went on to Hawk Cove and wrote from there we'll know that everything is all right."
"Let's go, then," Frank said. "If they went to Hawk Cove and sent a message from there, we'll know everything is fine."
"I'm with you."
"I've got your back."
The Hardy boys brought their motorcycles out of the shed and drove out toward the Morton farm. They made speed on the run because both were anxious to learn if anything had been heard of their chums. But when they reached the farmhouse and saw Iola's worried face as she greeted them at the door they knew without being told that no word had been received from Chet.
The Hardy boys pulled their motorcycles out of the shed and rode toward the Morton farm. They sped along because both were eager to find out if there was any news about their friends. But when they arrived at the farmhouse and saw Iola's concerned face as she welcomed them at the door, they realized without needing to be told that there was still no word from Chet.
"They didn't turn back," said Iola, almost tearfully. "We waited all afternoon and evening expecting Chet back, but he didn't come. They must have gone straight ahead into the storm."
"They didn't turn back," Iola said, almost in tears. "We waited all afternoon and evening expecting Chet to come back, but he didn’t. They must have gone straight into the storm."
"Did the post card come?" asked Joe.
"Did the postcard arrive?" Joe asked.
She shook her head.
She nodded no.
"We haven't heard from him at all. And Chet promised faithfully he'd write to us from Hawk Cove. The card should have been in the morning mail. Chet always keeps his promises. I'm so afraid something dreadful has happened."
"We still haven't heard from him. Chet promised he would write to us from Hawk Cove. The card should have arrived with the morning mail. Chet always keeps his promises. I'm really worried that something terrible has happened."
"Oh, there's no need to be alarmed," consoled Frank. "Perhaps the storm delayed them so that they didn't reach Hawk Cove until it was too late to catch the mail. Or perhaps they stopped off at one of the other fishing villages down at the entrance to the bay. A dozen things might have happened. You'll probably hear from him to-morrow—or to-night, perhaps."
"Oh, there's no need to worry," Frank reassured. "Maybe the storm held them up, so they didn't get to Hawk Cove in time to catch the mail. Or maybe they stopped at one of the other fishing villages by the entrance to the bay. A lot of things could have happened. You'll probably hear from him tomorrow—or maybe tonight."
"That storm was too terrible!" declared the girl. "They should never have gone on. They should have turned back when the rest of us did."
"That storm was way too intense!" the girl said. "They definitely should not have continued. They should have turned back when the rest of us did."
"I guess they didn't want to turn back once they had started," ventured Joe. "Biff doesn't like to admit he's licked."
"I guess they didn't want to go back once they started," Joe suggested. "Biff doesn't like to admit he's beaten."
"Neither does Chet," the girl replied. "They're both headstrong and I guess they thought we'd make fun of them if they had to come back to Bayport and start over again."
"Neither does Chet," the girl replied. "They're both stubborn, and I guess they thought we'd laugh at them if they had to come back to Bayport and start over again."
"Well, we'll be back to-morrow. I'm sure you'll hear from him by then," said Frank reassuringly. "And if we hear anything we'll let you know."
"Well, we'll be back tomorrow. I'm sure you'll hear from him by then," said Frank reassuringly. "And if we hear anything, we'll let you know."
"Please do."
"Sure, will do."
The Hardy boys walked back to their motorcycles. When they were out of hearing Frank remarked in a low voice:
The Hardy boys walked back to their bikes. Once they were out of earshot, Frank said quietly:
"I don't like the looks of this, at all! I'm beginning to think something has happened."
"I really don't like how this looks! I'm starting to think something has happened."
CHAPTER VI
Missing
Missing
No word came from Chet Morton or Biff Hooper the following day. Although the parents of the chums tried to allay their fears by assuming that the lads had not stopped off at Hawk Cove after all or had neglected to write, as is the way of boys the world over, when three days passed without further news, the situation became serious.
No word came from Chet Morton or Biff Hooper the next day. Even though their parents tried to ease their worries by thinking that the guys hadn't stopped at Hawk Cove after all or had just forgotten to write, which is typical of boys everywhere, when three days went by without any updates, the situation turned serious.
"They were wrecked in that storm, I know it!" declared Iola Morton, with conviction, when the Hardy boys called at the farmhouse on the third day. "Mother is almost frantic and daddy doesn't know what to do. It isn't like Chet to make us wait this long for some word of where he is, particularly when he knew we'd be anxious."
"They were caught in that storm, I’m sure of it!" Iola Morton declared firmly when the Hardy boys visited the farmhouse on the third day. "Mom is almost beside herself, and Dad doesn’t know what to do. It’s not like Chet to leave us waiting this long for any news about where he is, especially when he knew we’d be worried."
"The Hoopers are terribly worried about Biff," Joe put in. "We went over there last night to see if they had heard anything. Mr. Hooper had telephoned to nearly all the fishing villages up the coast, but none of them had seen anything of the boat."
"The Hoopers are really worried about Biff," Joe added. "We went over there last night to check if they had heard anything. Mr. Hooper had called almost all the fishing villages up the coast, but none of them had seen anything about the boat."
Iola turned pale.
Iola went pale.
"They hadn't seen the boat at all?"
"They didn't see the boat at all?"
Frank shook his head.
Frank shook his head.
"Either the boys were wrecked or they were swept out to sea," said the girl. She turned away and dabbed at her eyes with a handkerchief. She was on the verge of breaking down. "Oh, can't something be done to find trace of them?"
"Either the boys are gone or they got swept out to sea," the girl said. She turned away and wiped her eyes with a tissue. She was about to break down. "Oh, can't anything be done to find them?"
"It's time we were getting busy," Frank agreed. "I think we'd better organize a searching party."
"It's time we got to work," Frank agreed. "I think we'd better put together a search party."
"With the motorboats?" asked Joe.
"With the motorboats?" Joe asked.
"Yes. We can take our boat. Perhaps Tony Prito will be able to come along with the Napoli and we'll get the rest of the fellows. We can cruise along the bay and up the coast and perhaps we'll find some trace."
"Yeah. We can take our boat. Maybe Tony Prito will be able to come along with the Napoli and we'll get the rest of the guys. We can sail along the bay and up the coast and maybe we'll find some clues."
"Will you do that?" asked Iola, brightening up. "Oh, if you only will! At least we'll know that some one is searching for them."
"Will you do that?" Iola asked, her spirits lifting. "Oh, if you really will! At least we'll know that someone is looking for them."
"I've been thinking that possibly their boat got wrecked and they were washed up on an island or on some part of the coast a long way from any village," Frank observed. "I don't think they've been drowned. They are both good swimmers and it would take a lot to kill either of them."
"I've been thinking that maybe their boat got wrecked and they washed up on an island or some part of the coast far from any village," Frank said. "I don't think they've drowned. They're both strong swimmers and it would take a lot to take either of them down."
"Well, if we're going to go we may as well get started."
"Well, if we're going to go, we might as well get started."
"All right, Joe. We'll take some grub with us and count on staying until we find some trace of them. Perhaps two or three days."
"Alright, Joe. We'll bring some food with us and plan to stay until we find some sign of them. Maybe two or three days."
A sudden thought struck Joe.
A sudden idea hit Joe.
"How about mother?"
"What about mom?"
Frank whistled.
Frank whistled.
"Gosh—I'd forgotten! But perhaps she can get some one to stay with her. Seeing it isn't a pleasure trip we're going on, she might let us go."
"Gosh, I totally forgot! But maybe she can find someone to stay with her. Since we’re not going on a pleasure trip, she might let us go."
"Oh, I hope she does!" exclaimed Iola. "As long as we know you boys are out searching for Chet and Biff we'll be a lot easier in our minds."
"Oh, I really hope she does!" Iola exclaimed. "As long as we know you guys are out looking for Chet and Biff, we'll feel a lot better."
"Well, let's go back home and see what arrangements we can make," Frank said briskly. "The sooner we get away, the better."
"Alright, let’s head back home and figure out what we can set up," Frank said quickly. "The sooner we leave, the better."
The lads mounted their motorcycles and turned toward the city. The idea of organizing a searching party for the missing chums had occurred to Frank previously, but he had been waiting, hoping against hope that some word might be received regarding the two boys. The fact that Mrs. Hardy would be left alone at home had been the one circumstance that had prevented him from starting out in search of the chums before this, but now the situation seemed to warrant action at all costs.
The guys hopped on their motorcycles and headed towards the city. Frank had thought about putting together a search party for their missing friends before, but he had been waiting, hoping that they would hear something about the two boys. The only thing that had held him back from going to find them sooner was the fact that Mrs. Hardy would be home alone, but now it felt like the situation called for action at any cost.
"If mother is afraid to stay at home alone, I guess the trip is off," he said to Joe. "But when she knows how serious it is, I don't think she'll mind."
"If Mom is scared to be home alone, I guess the trip is canceled," he told Joe. "But once she realizes how important it is, I doubt she'll care."
"I don't like to leave her alone, myself," replied Joe. "But some one has to organize a searching party. I've been more worried about Chet and Biff than I'd like to admit."
"I don't like leaving her alone, to be honest," Joe replied. "But someone has to put together a search party. I've been more concerned about Chet and Biff than I want to admit."
"Me too."
"Same here."
When the lads returned to the house they found Mrs. Hardy opening the morning mail. She had a letter in her hand as they entered the living room and she glanced up with a smile of pleasure.
When the guys got back to the house, they found Mrs. Hardy going through the morning mail. She had a letter in her hand when they walked into the living room and looked up with a smile of delight.
"We're going to have a visitor."
"We're going to have a visitor."
"Who?"
"Who is it?"
"Your Aunt Gertrude!"
"Your Aunt Gert!"
Frank glanced at his brother.
Frank looked at his brother.
Well did they know their Aunt Gertrude. She was a maiden lady of middle-age who spent the greater part of her life in a sort of grand circuit series of visits to all her relatives, far and near. Aunt Gertrude had no fixed place of abode. Accompanied by numerous trunks, satchels and a lazy yellow cat by the name of Lavinia, she was apt to drop in at any time in the course of a year, brusquely announcing her intention of remaining for an indefinite stay. Then she would install herself in the guest room and proceed to manage the household until the hour of her departure.
They knew their Aunt Gertrude very well. She was a middle-aged single woman who spent most of her life going on a sort of grand tour to visit all her relatives, both near and far. Aunt Gertrude didn’t have a permanent home. With a bunch of trunks, bags, and a lazy yellow cat named Lavinia, she would show up at any time during the year, bluntly announcing her plan to stay for an unclear period. After that, she would settle into the guest room and take charge of the household until it was time for her to leave.
Aunt Gertrude was formidable. Her word was law. And, because she was possessed of a small fortune and a sharp tongue, none dared offend her. Relatives had discovered that the best plan was to suffer her visits in silence and pray for her speedy departure.
Aunt Gertrude was intimidating. Her word was final. And, since she had a bit of money and a sharp tongue, no one dared to upset her. Relatives found that the best approach was to endure her visits quietly and hope for her quick exit.
Now she was coming to visit the Hardys.
Now she was coming to visit the Hardys.
"Aunt Gertrude is coming? Isn't that great?" exclaimed Joe.
"Aunt Gertrude is coming? Isn't that awesome?" exclaimed Joe.
Mrs. Hardy looked at her son suspiciously. The Hardy boys had never been known to evince much enthusiasm over Aunt Gertrude's visits before. The worthy lady had a habit of regarding them as though they were still in swaddling clothes and she invariably showed a tendency to dictate as to their food, their hours of rising and going to bed, their companions, and their choice of literature. Many a Sunday afternoon she had thrust on them a weighty volume of Pilgrim's Progress and sat guard over them as they miserably strove to pretend an interest in the allegorical adventures of Bunyan's hero.
Mrs. Hardy looked at her son with suspicion. The Hardy boys had never shown much excitement about Aunt Gertrude's visits before. The dear lady had a way of treating them as if they were still babies, and she always tended to dictate their meals, wake-up times, bedtimes, friends, and book choices. Many a Sunday afternoon, she had forced them to read a heavy copy of Pilgrim’s Progress and sat nearby, watching as they awkwardly tried to feign interest in the allegorical adventures of Bunyan's main character.
"I didn't think you cared for Aunt Gertrude," ventured Mrs. Hardy when she saw that both Frank and Joe were beaming with satisfaction.
"I didn’t think you cared about Aunt Gertrude," Mrs. Hardy said cautiously when she noticed that both Frank and Joe were smiling with satisfaction.
"When will she be here?"
"When's she arriving?"
"This afternoon, according to her letter. She never gives one a great deal of notice."
"This afternoon, based on her letter. She never gives you much of a heads-up."
"She couldn't have come at a better time. For once in her life, Aunt Gertrude will be useful," Frank declared, and with that, he told his mother of their desire to organize a searching party for the missing chums.
"She couldn't have arrived at a better time. For the first time in her life, Aunt Gertrude will actually be helpful," Frank said, and with that, he informed his mother about their plan to put together a search party for the missing friends.
Mrs. Hardy had been deeply concerned over Chet and Biff since their departure from Bayport and now she agreed that a search should indeed be conducted.
Mrs. Hardy had been really worried about Chet and Biff since they left Bayport, and now she agreed that a search should definitely be carried out.
"And now that Aunt Gertrude is coming, you won't be afraid to stay here alone," Joe pointed out.
"And now that Aunt Gertrude is coming, you won't be scared to stay here by yourself," Joe pointed out.
Mrs. Hardy smiled. "And you'll leave me here all alone to the mercies of that managing woman?"
Mrs. Hardy smiled. "So, you're just going to leave me here all by myself at the mercy of that controlling woman?"
"There's not much use having us all here. Aunt Gertrude will run things anyway, whether there's three of us or a hundred."
"There's really no point in having us all here. Aunt Gertrude will take charge regardless, whether there are three of us or a hundred."
"Yes, I suppose so. Well, I shan't be afraid to stay here as long as Aunt Gertrude is in the house. I imagine any burglar would rather deal with a vicious bulldog. Go ahead on your trip. When do you intend to start?"
"Yeah, I guess so. Well, I won't be scared to stay here as long as Aunt Gertrude is in the house. I figure any burglar would prefer to deal with a nasty bulldog. Go ahead and take your trip. When do you plan to leave?"
"As soon as we can see Tony Prito and the rest of the boys. We want to make a real searching party of it. By the way, when will Aunt Gertrude arrive?"
"As soon as we can spot Tony Prito and the other guys. We want to turn it into a real search party. By the way, when is Aunt Gertrude getting here?"
"On the four o'clock train, I expect."
"On the four o'clock train, I guess."
"Then we'll leave at about three o'clock," declared Frank, with a grin, for the boys' dislike of their tyrannical aunt was no secret in the Hardy household.
"Then we'll head out around three o'clock," Frank said with a grin, since the boys' dislike for their overbearing aunt was no secret in the Hardy household.
Mrs. Hardy smiled reprovingly, and the lads hustled away in search of Tony and the other boys.
Mrs. Hardy smiled disapprovingly, and the guys hurried off to find Tony and the other boys.
Tony Prito was afire with enthusiasm when they broached the subject to him. A few words with Mr. Prito, and he obtained permission to have the use of the Napoli for as long as would be necessary.
Tony Prito was filled with excitement when they brought up the topic with him. A quick chat with Mr. Prito, and he got the green light to use the Napoli for as long as needed.
"We'll start out as soon as we can get ready," Frank told him. "See if you can get Jerry and Phil to go with you, and we'll go and look up Perry Robinson. Perhaps he'll come along with us. We don't want to lose any time."
"We'll head out as soon as we're ready," Frank said to him. "Try to get Jerry and Phil to join you, and we'll go find Perry Robinson. Maybe he'll come with us. We don't want to waste any time."
Perry Robinson, more familiarly known as "Slim," readily agreed to accompany the boys on the search.
Perry Robinson, better known as "Slim," happily agreed to join the guys on the search.
"You bet I'll go," he declared. "When do we start?"
"You bet I'll go," he said. "When do we start?"
"Three o'clock, if we can be ready by then. Meet us at the boathouse and bring along some grub."
"Three o'clock, if we can be ready by then. Meet us at the boathouse and bring some food."
"I'll be there," promised Slim.
"I'll be there," promised Slim.
The Hardy boys carried blankets and a small tent down to the boat and stowed them away. Then came cooking utensils and a supply of food sufficient to last them for several days. They would, of course, be able to get supplies at the fishing villages along the coast, but as they had no idea where their search would lead them they were determined to take no chances.
The Hardy boys brought blankets and a small tent down to the boat and packed them away. Next, they loaded cooking utensils and enough food to last them several days. They knew they could get supplies at the fishing villages along the coast, but since they had no idea where their search would take them, they were set on not taking any chances.
"Thank goodness we'll be away from here before Aunt Gertrude arrives," chuckled Frank, as the boys were putting on their outing clothes at two o'clock that afternoon.
"Thank goodness we’ll be out of here before Aunt Gertrude gets here," laughed Frank, as the boys were putting on their outing clothes at two o'clock that afternoon.
"She'll be madder than a wet hen when she finds we've escaped her. If there's anything she likes better than bossing us around and showing us our faults, I don't know what it is."
"She'll be angrier than a wet hen when she discovers we've escaped her. If there's anything she enjoys more than ordering us around and pointing out our mistakes, I can't think of what it could be."
Alas for the best laid plans! Aunt Gertrude must have had some premonition of the truth. She advanced the time of her arrival by a good two hours. The two o'clock train brought her to Bayport, bags, baggage, and Lavinia, the cat. The boys were first apprised of her advent when they heard a taxicab pull up in front of the house. Joe peeped out the window of their room.
Alas for the best laid plans! Aunt Gertrude must have had some sense that something was up. She moved up her arrival by a solid two hours. The two o'clock train brought her to Bayport, along with her bags, luggage, and Lavinia, the cat. The boys first learned of her arrival when they heard a taxi pull up in front of the house. Joe peeked out the window of their room.
"Sweet spirits of nitre! Aunt Gertrude herself!"
"Sweet spirits of nitre! Aunt Gertrude herself!"
"No!"
"No!"
"Yes!"
"Absolutely!"
"Let me see!"
"Let me check!"
Frank rushed to the window in time to see Aunt Gertrude, attired in voluminous garments of a fashion dating back at least a decade, laboriously emerging from the taxicab. She was a large woman with a strident voice, and the Hardy boys could hear her vigorously disputing the amount of the fare. This was a matter of principle with Aunt Gertrude, who always argued with taxi drivers as a matter of course, it being her firm conviction that they were unanimously in a conspiracy to overcharge her and defraud her at all times.
Frank rushed to the window just in time to see Aunt Gertrude, dressed in oversized clothes that were at least a decade out of style, struggling to get out of the taxi. She was a big woman with a loud voice, and the Hardy boys could hear her passionately arguing about the fare. This was a matter of principle for Aunt Gertrude, who always argued with taxi drivers as a habit, firmly believing that they were all part of a conspiracy to overcharge and cheat her.
With Lavinia under one arm and a huge umbrella under the other, Aunt Gertrude withered the taxicab driver with a fiery denunciation and, when he helplessly pointed to the meter and declared that figures did not lie, she dropped both cat and umbrella, rummaged about in the manifold recesses of her clothing for a very small purse, produced the exact amount of the fare in silver, counted it out and handed it to the man with the air of one giving alms.
With Lavinia under one arm and a big umbrella under the other, Aunt Gertrude scolded the taxi driver with a heated rant. When he helplessly pointed to the meter and insisted that the numbers didn't lie, she dropped both the cat and the umbrella, fished around in the various pockets of her clothing for a tiny purse, pulled out the exact fare in coins, counted it out, and handed it to the man as if she were giving away charity.
"And, just for your impudence, you shan't have a tip!" she announced. "Carry my bags up to the house."
"And, just for your cheek, you won't get a tip!" she said. "Take my bags up to the house."
The driver gazed sadly at the silver in his hand, pocketed it and clambered back into the car.
The driver looked sadly at the coin in his hand, put it in his pocket, and climbed back into the car.
"Carry 'em up yourself!" he advised, slamming the door. The taxi roared away down the street.
"Carry them up yourself!" he yelled, slamming the door. The taxi sped off down the street.
Frank chuckled.
Frank laughed.
"That's one on Aunt Gertrude!"
"That's a win for Aunt Gertrude!"
But Aunt Gertrude had no intention of carrying the bags up to the house. Suddenly she glared up at the window from which the two boys had been watching the scene.
But Aunt Gertrude had no plans to carry the bags up to the house. Suddenly, she glared at the window where the two boys had been watching the whole thing.
"You two boys up there!" she shouted. "I see you. Don't think I can't see you! Come down here and carry up my bags. Hustle now!"
"You two up there!" she yelled. "I can see you. Don’t think I can’t see you! Come down here and bring my bags up. Hurry up!"
They hustled.
They worked hard.
CHAPTER VII
Wreckage
Wreckage
"Good night! We'll be lucky if we get away on the trip at all!" exclaimed Frank, as he and Joe hastened down the stairs.
"Good night! We'll be lucky if we even manage to go on the trip!" Frank exclaimed, as he and Joe rushed down the stairs.
Mrs. Hardy was already at the front door welcoming Aunt Gertrude, who was expatiating on the wickedness of taxi drivers in general.
Mrs. Hardy was already at the front door welcoming Aunt Gertrude, who was going on about how terrible taxi drivers are in general.
"So!" she ejaculated, as the boys appeared. "Standing up at a front window laughing at your great-aunt instead of coming down and helping carry up her bags like little gentlemen! I'm surprised at you!"
"Wow!" she exclaimed as the boys showed up. "Staying at the front window giggling at your great-aunt instead of coming down to help her with her bags like polite young men! I'm really disappointed in you!"
"We were just getting dressed, Aunt Gertrude," explained Frank meekly.
"We were just getting ready, Aunt Gertrude," Frank explained softly.
"Getting dressed, eh!" snorted Aunt Gertrude, taking in their attire. "Getting dressed! What kind of an outfit do you call that?" She poked Joe in the ribs with her umbrella, indicating the faded khaki shirt he was wearing. "Speak up, boy! What kind of an outfit is that? No necktie. Holes in your trousers. Shoes not shined."
"Getting dressed, huh!" snorted Aunt Gertrude, looking at what they were wearing. "Getting dressed! What kind of outfit is that?" She poked Joe in the ribs with her umbrella, pointing at the worn khaki shirt he had on. "Speak up, boy! What kind of outfit is that? No necktie. Holes in your pants. Shoes not shined."
"We were just getting ready to go on a boat trip, Aunt Gertrude," Joe explained.
"We were just about to head out for a boat trip, Aunt Gertrude," Joe explained.
"Boat trip! Boat trip! No! That settles it!" declared Aunt Gertrude, coming into the house and banging the umbrella decisively on the floor by way of emphasis. "I shan't allow it. The very idea! Laura," she said, turning to Mrs. Hardy, "I'm surprised at you. Ab-so-lute-ly astonished! The very idea of letting these children go out in a boat! Don't you remember what happened to my Cousin Peter? He went out in a boat, didn't he? And what happened? The boat upset. He might have been drowned if the water had been deep enough. Thank goodness he was only a few feet from shore. But it only goes to show what can happen. If these boys go out in a boat they'll be drowned. I can't permit them to be drowned. They shan't go on any boat trip. That settles it!" She strode into the living room. "Boys—bring in my bags!" she commanded.
"Boat trip! Boat trip! No! That's it!" Aunt Gertrude declared, marching into the house and slamming the umbrella on the floor for emphasis. "I won’t allow it. The very idea! Laura," she said, turning to Mrs. Hardy, "I'm shocked at you. Absolutely shocked! The thought of letting these kids go out on a boat! Don’t you remember what happened to my Cousin Peter? He went out in a boat, right? And what happened? The boat tipped over. He could have drowned if the water had been deep enough. Thank goodness he was only a few feet from shore. But it just shows what can happen. If these boys go out in a boat, they'll drown. I can't let them drown. They won’t go on any boat trip. That's it!" She strode into the living room. "Boys—bring in my bags!" she commanded.
Mrs. Hardy smiled, for she was quite accustomed to the eccentricities of Aunt Gertrude, and the Hardy boys scuttled down the front steps for the baggage.
Mrs. Hardy smiled, as she was used to Aunt Gertrude's quirks, and the Hardy boys hurried down the front steps to get the luggage.
"Do you think she means it?" whispered Joe.
"Do you think she really means it?" whispered Joe.
"Sure, she means it. But we'll get out somehow. She'll rave for a while, but she'll forget all about it when she starts to show mother how to run the house."
"Sure, she really means it. But we'll figure out a way to escape. She'll be upset for a bit, but she'll forget all about it once she begins to show Mom how to manage the house."
The boys deposited Aunt Gertrude's luggage in the guest room, then went downstairs for inspection. By this time the old lady had taken off her coat and hat and was seated in the most comfortable chair, fanning herself with a newspaper.
The boys dropped off Aunt Gertrude's luggage in the guest room, then headed downstairs to check things out. By then, the old lady had taken off her coat and hat and was sitting in the comfiest chair, fanning herself with a newspaper.
"Boat trip!" she was snorting, as they entered the room. "Never heard of such a thing. Letting little boys like that go out in a boat alone. If they were my boys I wouldn't let them out of my sight. Up to some mischief, I'll be bound."
"Boat trip!" she snorted as they walked into the room. "I've never heard of such a thing. Letting little boys like that go out on a boat by themselves. If they were my boys, I wouldn't let them out of my sight. They're definitely up to some trouble, I can guarantee it."
"They are going out to look for two chums of theirs who have been lost for three days," Mrs. Hardy explained.
"They're going out to look for two of their friends who have been missing for three days," Mrs. Hardy explained.
"And serve them right! I suppose they were out on a boat trip, too. I knew it! And now they're lost. That's what happens when you let children go out in boats. They get lost. Or drowned. And now you would let these two youngsters go out in a boat, too. And I suppose in a few days some of their chums would have to go out in a boat to look for them. They'd get lost, too. And then some more little boys would go out to look for them. And they'd get lost. By the end of the summer there wouldn't be a boy left in Bayport. Not that it would be much of a loss," sniffed Aunt Gertrude; "but I hate to see people making fools of themselves."
"And serves them right! I guess they were out on a boat trip, too. I knew it! And now they're lost. That's what happens when you let kids go out in boats. They get lost or drown. And now you want to let these two kids go out in a boat, too. I suppose in a few days some of their friends will have to go out in a boat to look for them. They'll get lost, too. And then some more little boys will go out to look for them. And they'll get lost. By the end of summer, there won't be a single boy left in Bayport. Not that it would be much of a loss," sniffed Aunt Gertrude; "but I hate to see people making fools of themselves."
"Did you have a pleasant journey?" asked Mrs. Hardy, anxious to change the subject.
"Did you have a nice trip?" asked Mrs. Hardy, eager to change the subject.
"Did I ever have a pleasant journey?" countered Aunt Gertrude. "What with the rudeness of conductors and ticket-sellers and baggage-men and taxi drivers there's no enjoyment in traveling nowadays. But I put 'em in their place. I know my rights and I insist on them!"
"Did I ever have a nice trip?” Aunt Gertrude shot back. “With how rude conductors, ticket-sellers, baggage handlers, and taxi drivers are, there’s no fun in traveling these days. But I set them straight. I know my rights, and I make sure to stand up for them!"
She glared ferociously about the room as though confronting a multitude of conductors, baggage-men and taxi drivers awaiting judgment.
She glared fiercely around the room as if facing a crowd of conductors, baggage handlers, and taxi drivers waiting for her decision.
"Now, boys! what are you staring at? Don't you know it's rude to be staring at people? Run away and play. I want to talk to your mother. Run away and play! Shoo!" She brandished the umbrella at them and the Hardy boys left the room precipitately. Their mother excused herself for a moment and followed them into the hall.
"Hey, boys! What are you staring at? Don’t you know it’s rude to look at people like that? Go on and play. I want to talk to your mom. Go on, shoo!" She waved the umbrella at them, and the Hardy boys hurried out of the room. Their mom quickly apologized and followed them into the hall.
"Run!" she said, smiling. "I'll take care of Aunt Gertrude. Run along while you have the chance."
"Run!" she said with a smile. "I’ll handle Aunt Gertrude. Go on while you still can."
They kissed their mother good-bye and hastily departed, wondering how she was to explain their flight to the terrible Aunt Gertrude, in view of that lady's melancholy predictions concerning their fate should they venture out in the boat.
They kissed their mom good-bye and quickly left, wondering how she would explain their departure to the awful Aunt Gertrude, considering that lady's gloomy predictions about what would happen to them if they went out in the boat.
They found Slim Robinson waiting for them at the boathouse, and with many chuckles the boys told him of their escape from the tyrant who would have prevented their departure.
They found Slim Robinson waiting for them at the boathouse, and with lots of laughs, the boys shared the story of how they escaped from the bully who was trying to stop them from leaving.
"We'd better hurry or she'll be down here after us if she finds we've got away from her," declared Joe.
"We should hurry or she'll come down here after us if she finds out we've escaped from her," Joe said.
"Tony and the other fellows are over in the other boathouse," Slim told them. "I think they're ready now."
"Tony and the other guys are over in the other boathouse," Slim told them. "I think they're ready now."
"All right. Let's be going."
"Okay. Let's get going."
Frank started the engine of the Sleuth and the motorboat moved slowly out into the open bay. He steered a course for the entrance to Prito's boathouse, where Tony and the others were waiting. As soon as Tony saw him he started his own craft, and the Napoli nosed its way out abreast of them.
Frank started the engine of the Sleuth and the motorboat slowly made its way into the open bay. He set a course for the entrance to Prito's boathouse, where Tony and the others were waiting. As soon as Tony spotted him, he fired up his own boat, and the Napoli edged out alongside them.
"All set?" shouted Frank.
"Ready to go?" shouted Frank.
"All set."
"Ready to go."
"Away we go."
"Off we go."
The two boats drummed their way out into Barmet Bay and headed out toward the sea, side by side, picking up speed when they had threaded their way through the shipping near the docks.
The two boats made their way out into Barmet Bay and headed toward the sea, side by side, picking up speed as they navigated through the shipping near the docks.
It was evening before they reached the first village on the coast, after leaving the bay, and although they made numerous inquiries they failed to find any trace of their chums. No one in the village had seen or heard a motorboat during the storm, although they readily admitted that the craft might have passed without being noticed, owing to the gloom and the violence of the gale. The chums spent the night at this village and resumed their journey the next morning, going farther up the coast.
It was evening by the time they arrived at the first village along the coast after leaving the bay. Despite asking many questions, they couldn't find any sign of their friends. No one in the village had seen or heard a motorboat during the storm, although they agreed that the boat could have gone by unnoticed because of the darkness and the fierceness of the gale. The friends spent the night in this village and continued their journey the next morning, heading further up the coast.
Their progress was necessarily slow because there were numerous small villages and they stopped at them all to make inquiries.
Their progress was necessarily slow because there were many small villages, and they stopped at each one to ask questions.
But in every case the answer was the same.
But in every case, the answer was the same.
No motorboat answering to the description of the Envoy had been seen. None of the fishermen had heard of the craft.
No motorboat that matched the description of the Envoy had been spotted. None of the fishermen had heard of the boat.
"It's ten chances to one that they was wrecked in that storm," an old fisherman at one of the villages declared when they told him their story. "Unless they were mighty lucky they wouldn't get past Ragged Reef. They might get this far up the coast, but they'd never get past the Reef."
"It's ten to one that they were wrecked in that storm," an old fisherman from one of the villages said when they shared their story. "Unless they were really lucky, they wouldn't have made it past Ragged Reef. They might have gotten this far up the coast, but they would never get past the Reef."
"Where is that?"
"Where's that?"
"Not far from here. Up past the next point. Seems to me I heard one of the boys sayin' this mornin' that there was some wreckage on the reef yesterday. There's none of our boats missin' from hereabouts, so mebby it's them young fellers."
"Not far from here. Up past the next point. I think I heard one of the guys saying this morning that there was some wreckage on the reef yesterday. None of our boats are missing around here, so maybe it's those young guys."
The two motorboats thereupon started for Ragged Reef. The lads were downhearted. They had little hope that they would ever find their two companions alive. The words of the old fisherman struck terror into their hearts.
The two motorboats then headed for Ragged Reef. The guys were feeling pretty down. They had little hope of ever finding their two friends alive. The old fisherman's words struck fear into their hearts.
When they rounded the point they saw the black and ominous line of Ragged Reef before them. A jagged and irregular series of rocks jutting above the surface of the water in the form of a huge semicircle—this was the reef on which the Envoy might have come to grief.
When they turned the corner, they saw the dark and threatening line of Ragged Reef in front of them. A sharp and uneven series of rocks sticking out of the water, forming a massive semicircle—this was the reef where the Envoy could have met its doom.
Fortunately, the day was calm so that the searchers were able to venture more closely to the reef than they might have otherwise dared. Frank edged the Sleuth in toward the rocks as closely as possible. Suddenly he gave an exclamation:
Fortunately, the day was calm, allowing the searchers to venture closer to the reef than they might have otherwise dared. Frank steered the Sleuth in toward the rocks as close as possible. Suddenly, he exclaimed:
"The fisherman was right! There is wreckage there!"
"The fisherman was right! There is wreckage there!"
He pointed to a few broken fragments of wood that could be discerned against the rocks. Joe picked up the marine glasses and peered at the fragments for some time.
He pointed to a few broken pieces of wood that were visible against the rocks. Joe grabbed the binoculars and examined the fragments for a while.
"It's wreckage of a boat of some kind," he declared gravely, lowering the glasses at last. "But whether it's from the Envoy or not, I couldn't say."
"It's wreckage from some kind of boat," he said seriously, finally putting down the glasses. "But I can't tell if it's from the Envoy or not."
Slim also looked through the glasses. He was able to see more fragments of wreckage farther along the reef.
Slim also looked through the glasses. He could see more pieces of wreckage further along the reef.
"Some boat has been battered to pieces along here. There isn't enough wreckage left to tell whether it was a motorboat or a sailing vessel." He scrutinized the mainland. "Nothing there," he announced finally. "Not a sign of life—nor wreckage either. It's all on the reef."
"Some boat has been smashed to bits here. There's not enough debris left to tell if it was a motorboat or a sailboat." He looked closely at the mainland. "Nothing there," he said at last. "Not a trace of life—or wreckage either. It's all on the reef."
So interested had the boys been in the fragments of broken wood on the jagged rocks that they had not noticed that the motorboat was edging in closer to the reef. There was a strong current at this point and, unnoticed by the boys, the boat was being carried irresistibly forward.
So fascinated were the boys by the pieces of broken wood on the sharp rocks that they hadn't noticed the motorboat getting closer to the reef. There was a strong current here, and without realizing it, the boat was being pulled forward.
A warning shout from the lads in the Napoli told them of their danger.
A warning shout from the guys in the Napoli alerted them to their danger.
Frank had throttled down the engine so that the Sleuth had been almost drifting. Now he sprang for the helm, conscious of the peril that had crept so insidiously upon them.
Frank had slowed the engine so that the Sleuth was almost drifting. Now he jumped for the helm, aware of the danger that had quietly approached them.
The great black rocks of the reef loomed closer. The motorboat seemed to be dragged mercilessly toward its doom. The powerful current had the craft firmly in its grasp!
The huge black rocks of the reef came into view. The motorboat felt like it was being pulled relentlessly toward disaster. The strong current had the boat firmly in its hold!
CHAPTER VIII
The Strange Letter
The Weird Letter
The engine roared as Frank Hardy opened the throttle and bore down on the helm of the Sleuth.
The engine roared as Frank Hardy pressed the throttle and took control of the Sleuth.
The grip of the current about the reef was so strong that, for a moment, it seemed that the motorboat could not fight against it. Then, slowly, the craft swung about, seemed to remain motionless for a moment, and then began to forge ahead, away from the reef.
The current around the reef was so powerful that, for a moment, it looked like the motorboat couldn’t overcome it. Then, slowly, the boat turned, seemed to pause for a moment, and then started to move forward, away from the reef.
Fighting against the force of the current, the motorboat made slow progress. Still, it was gaining ground. The boys waited tensely, as the craft struggled out of danger. Gradually, the Sleuth drew away from the reef, gradually the grip of the current relaxed. Frank cautiously nosed the boat over to the left and managed to get out of the current altogether.
Fighting against the current, the motorboat made slow progress. Still, it was catching up. The boys waited anxiously as the boat struggled out of danger. Little by little, the Sleuth pulled away from the reef, and the current's grip loosened. Frank carefully turned the boat to the left and succeeded in getting out of the current completely.
The whole affair had occurred in a few seconds, but it had seemed an eternity to the boys in the boat and their chums in the other craft. It would only have been a matter of moments before they might have been swept swiftly down onto the treacherous reef.
The whole thing happened in just a few seconds, but it felt like forever to the boys in the boat and their friends in the other craft. It would have only taken a moment for them to be quickly swept onto the dangerous reef.
"That'll teach me to watch where I'm going," said Frank, as he sat back and mopped his brow.
"That'll teach me to pay attention to where I'm going," Frank said, as he leaned back and wiped his forehead.
"There was mighty near a lot more wreckage on that reef," remarked Slim soberly. "The boat wouldn't have lasted long if we'd piled up on those rocks."
"There was really a lot more wreckage on that reef," Slim said seriously. "The boat wouldn't have lasted long if we had crashed into those rocks."
"I'll say it wouldn't! I think we'd better get away from here. We'll never be able to get close enough to identify that wreckage. Might as well go on up the coast."
"I'll be honest, it wouldn't! I think we should just leave this place. We'll never get close enough to figure out that wreckage. We might as well head up the coast."
They drew up alongside the Napoli and, after discussing the narrow escape they had just had from being cast up on the reef, acquainted the other boys with their decision to continue the search.
They pulled up next to the Napoli and, after talking about the close call they had just experienced from running aground on the reef, informed the other boys of their decision to keep searching.
"There's no use trying to get closer to that wreckage," declared Frank. "It's all in small pieces and we probably wouldn't be able to say whether it was from the Envoy or not, if we did reach it. We may as well go on up the coast and keep making inquiries at the other villages."
"There's no point in trying to get closer to that wreckage," Frank said. "It's all in small pieces, and we probably wouldn't be able to tell if it was from the Envoy or not, even if we did get there. We might as well continue up the coast and keep asking around in the other villages."
This plan they followed, but to no avail.
This plan they followed, but it didn't work.
Their inquiries were fruitless. The Envoy, with Chet and Biff, seemed to have vanished into thin air. At none of the fishing villages were they able to find any one who had seen or heard of the missing motorboat. As for the wreckage on the reef, no one was found who could enlighten them. Two or three fishing boats had been wrecked during the storm, but they had met their fate farther up the coast and in each case the scene of the wreck was known to the fishermen.
Their inquiries didn’t lead to any results. The Envoy, along with Chet and Biff, appeared to have disappeared completely. In none of the fishing villages were they able to find anyone who had seen or heard anything about the missing motorboat. As for the wreckage on the reef, no one was around who could shed any light on it. A couple of fishing boats had been wrecked during the storm, but those incidents happened further up the coast, and in each case, the fishermen were aware of where the wreck had occurred.
"It might have been your friend's boat, and it might have been only some old wreckage washed down the coast by the storm," said one keen-eyed salt. "You'd best give up the search. If they're drowned, they're drowned, and that's all there is to it. If they were wrecked and managed to save themselves they'll make their way to the nearest village and they'll get home from there without any trouble. If you haven't found any trace of them by now there isn't much use going any further, for they would never have got this far up the coast having been seen by some of the fishermen."
"It could have been your friend's boat, or maybe it was just some old wreckage washed ashore by the storm," said one sharp-eyed sailor. "You should probably give up the search. If they drowned, they drowned, and that's all there is to it. If they were wrecked and managed to save themselves, they'll find their way to the nearest village and get home from there easily. If you haven't found any sign of them by now, there's not much point in continuing the search, because they wouldn't have made it this far up the coast without being spotted by some of the fishermen."
The boys reluctantly agreed that his advice was sound. They turned back for Bayport.
The boys reluctantly agreed that his advice made sense. They headed back to Bayport.
When they returned to the city and reported that their quest had been unsuccessful they were scarcely prepared for the sensation that the news aroused. The Hoopers were frantic with anxiety, as their last hopes were dashed. The Mortons were almost stunned. They had hoped against hope that the search would bring them at least some news of the missing boys.
When they got back to the city and said that their quest had failed, they were barely ready for the reaction that the news caused. The Hoopers were in a panic, as their last hopes were shattered. The Mortons were nearly in shock. They had hoped against all odds that the search would at least provide some information about the missing boys.
The local papers featured the story and the city was aroused. In every village and town along the coast, to north and south, people were discussing the mysterious disappearance of the motorboat and its human freight. Fishermen were on the lookout for any trace of the craft. The coast guards promised to do all in their power to clear up the mystery.
The local newspapers ran the story, and the city was buzzing. In every village and town along the coast, both to the north and south, people were talking about the mysterious disappearance of the motorboat and its passengers. Fishermen were keeping an eye out for any sign of the boat. The coast guard pledged to do everything they could to solve the mystery.
But, when three days more went by and there was still not the slightest solution in sight, the opinion became general that the boat had been wrecked in the storm and had gone to the bottom. The two boys were given up for lost. The Hardy boys and their chums were gradually forced to the belief that Chet and Biff had perished.
But when three more days passed and there was still no sign of a solution, everyone started to think that the boat had been wrecked in the storm and had sunk. The two boys were given up for lost. The Hardy boys and their friends gradually began to believe that Chet and Biff had died.
Then came an incident that temporarily drove the tragic affair from the minds of Frank and Joe, because it concerned their own home more intimately.
Then came an incident that briefly took the tragic situation off Frank and Joe's minds, because it was more directly related to their own home.
Aunt Gertrude had greeted them on their return with a barrage of scathing comment on their disobedience in leaving on the trip in spite of her avowed disapproval, and she expressed the greatest amazement because they had returned alive after all.
Aunt Gertrude welcomed them back with a flood of harsh criticism about their decision to go on the trip, even though she had clearly disapproved. She expressed her astonishment that they had come back alive after all.
"You may thank Providence that you got back," she declared in her characteristically brusque fashion. "It was through no skill of your own, I'll be bound. Your poor mother and me were worried to death all the time you were away—gallivanting over the ocean."
"You should be grateful to fate that you made it back," she said in her usual straightforward manner. "It wasn’t because of anything you did, I can assure you of that. Your poor mother and I were worried sick the entire time you were off having fun across the ocean."
Aunt Gertrude did not add that Mrs. Hardy's worries had been chiefly occasioned by her aunt's dire predictions of the certain death that awaited the boys on the search. However, her tone was modified somewhat when she realized that they had indeed been hunting for the missing chums and she made it her business to call on the Hoopers and the Mortons to condole with them, for she was a good-hearted soul in her own way—although it is to be feared that her condolences did more to add to the certainty that the boys were drowned than they served to cheer up the sorrowing parents.
Aunt Gertrude didn’t mention that Mrs. Hardy’s concerns mostly came from her aunt’s grim predictions about the boys’ certain death during the search. However, her tone softened a bit when she realized they had actually been looking for their missing friends, and she decided to visit the Hoopers and the Mortons to express her sympathy. She was kind-hearted in her own way—though it’s likely that her condolences only increased the fear that the boys had drowned rather than comforting the grieving parents.
The third day after the Hardy boys returned she was sorting over the morning mail, having duly taken charge of every department of the household.
The third day after the Hardy boys came back, she was going through the morning mail, having taken charge of every part of the household.
"Ha!" she exclaimed, holding a letter up to the light. "Here's a letter addressed to Fenton Hardy. Bad news in it, I'll be bound."
"Ha!" she exclaimed, holding a letter up to the light. "Here's a letter addressed to Fenton Hardy. I bet it's bad news."
Aunt Gertrude could smell bad news a mile away, Frank often said.
Aunt Gertrude could sense trouble from a mile away, Frank often said.
"Bad news in it. I can tell. I dreamed about haystacks last night. Haystacks! Whenever I dream about haystacks it means bad news. I never knew it to fail. Open the letter, Laura."
"There's bad news in there. I can sense it. I dreamed about haystacks last night. Haystacks! Whenever I dream about haystacks, it means bad news. It’s never been wrong. Open the letter, Laura."
"But it isn't addressed to me," objected Mrs. Hardy.
"But it isn't addressed to me," Mrs. Hardy protested.
"Fiddlesticks! It's addressed to your husband, isn't it? You have as much right to open it as he has. More. It's a wife's duty to help her husband as much as she can and look after his affairs for him. Man and wife are one, aren't they? Open the letter."
"Fiddlesticks! It’s addressed to your husband, right? You have just as much of a right to open it as he does. Actually, more. It’s a wife’s responsibility to support her husband as much as possible and manage his matters for him. A husband and wife are one, aren’t they? Go ahead and open the letter."
Mrs. Hardy, with some misgivings, slit open the envelope and Aunt Gertrude, who was possessed of an insatiable curiosity, immediately seized the letter.
Mrs. Hardy, feeling a bit hesitant, opened the envelope, and Aunt Gertrude, who was incredibly curious, immediately grabbed the letter.
"I'll read it for you!" she offered.
"I'll read it for you!" she said.
"'Fenton Hardy—Bayport,'" she began. "'Dear Sir: We wish to inform you that we have—' My goodness! What's this? What's this? Gracious me!" She lapsed into unintelligible mutterings as she read the rest of the letter to herself, frequently giving vent to exclamations of surprise while her eyes widened with astonishment.
"'Fenton Hardy—Bayport,'" she began. "'Dear Sir: We want to let you know that we have—' Oh my goodness! What’s this? What’s this? Wow!" She trailed off into mumbled words as she read the rest of the letter quietly, often gasping in surprise as her eyes grew wide with amazement.
Mrs. Hardy and the boys could hardly contain their impatience until at last Aunt Gertrude laid down the letter and peered triumphantly at them over her spectacles.
Mrs. Hardy and the boys could barely hold back their excitement until finally Aunt Gertrude put down the letter and looked at them triumphantly over her glasses.
"Didn't I say so?" she demanded stridently. "Didn't I say there was bad news in this letter? Didn't I tell you I dreamed of haystacks last night? Haystacks always mean bad news." She looked at the letter again. "Although for the life of me I can't imagine what the man means. Hum! Kidnapped!" She looked up suddenly at the Hardy boys and glared at them.
"Didn't I say that?" she asked sharply. "Didn't I say there was bad news in this letter? Didn't I tell you I dreamed about haystacks last night? Haystacks always mean bad news." She glanced at the letter again. "Although I honestly can't figure out what the guy means. Hmm! Kidnapped!" She suddenly looked up at the Hardy boys and glared at them.
"You boys haven't been kidnapped lately? No. Of course not. What nonsense! Has any one tried to kidnap you?"
"You guys haven’t been kidnapped recently, right? No. Of course not. What a silly thing to say! Has anyone tried to kidnap you?"
"No, Aunt Gertrude," said Frank, utterly mystified.
"No, Aunt Gertrude," Frank said, completely confused.
"Then," demanded Aunt Gertrude, pushing the letter across to Mrs. Hardy and folding her arms as though prepared to wait until doomsday for a satisfactory answer, "what does this letter mean?"
"Then," demanded Aunt Gertrude, pushing the letter across to Mrs. Hardy and folding her arms as if ready to wait forever for a satisfactory answer, "what does this letter mean?"
Mrs. Hardy picked up the letter and read it aloud, while an expression of amazement crossed her face.
Mrs. Hardy picked up the letter and read it aloud, a look of surprise crossing her face.
"Fenton Hardy—Bayport," ran the letter. "Dear Sir: We wish to inform you that we are holding your two sons in a safe place and that we will not return them to you unless you agree to the following conditions: You must pay us the sum of $5000 as ransom, you must agree to refuse to give evidence in the Asbury Park bank robbery case, and you must further agree to give up your pursuit of our leader, Baldy Turk. These are our conditions. It will do you no good to attempt to find your sons, for we will not hesitate to put them out of the way if you attempt to discover our hiding place. Furthermore, unless you agree to what we ask, it will go hard with them. You may signify your agreement to the terms of this letter by dropping a package containing the money and a signed statement to the effect that you will drop your pursuit of Baldy Turk and that you will not give evidence against our associates in the robbery case from the 5:15 express from Bayport next Thursday afternoon as it passes the grade crossing at the North Road."
"Fenton Hardy—Bayport," the letter read. "Dear Sir: We want to let you know that we are holding your two sons in a secure location and that we will not return them unless you agree to the following conditions: You must pay us $5000 as ransom, you must agree not to testify in the Asbury Park bank robbery case, and you must also agree to stop pursuing our leader, Baldy Turk. These are our terms. It will be pointless for you to try to find your sons, as we won’t hesitate to harm them if you try to discover where we are hiding. Additionally, unless you agree to what we’re asking, things will not go well for them. You can indicate your acceptance of the terms in this letter by leaving a package containing the money and a signed statement saying that you will cease your pursuit of Baldy Turk and that you will not testify against our associates in the robbery case from the 5:15 express from Bayport next Thursday afternoon as it passes the grade crossing at the North Road."
The letter was unsigned.
The letter had no signature.
"What on earth does it mean?" asked Mrs. Hardy.
"What on earth does that mean?" asked Mrs. Hardy.
Frank and Joe looked at one another in astonishment. Frank reached over for the letter and examined it. The strange document was typewritten on an ordinary quality of white paper. The envelope bore the Bayport post-mark, indicating that it had been mailed from the city post-office early that morning.
Frank and Joe stared at each other in shock. Frank reached for the letter and took a closer look. The odd document was typed on regular white paper. The envelope had the Bayport postmark, showing that it was mailed from the city post office earlier that morning.
"It must be a practical joke of some kind," said Mrs. Hardy, in perplexity.
"It must be some kind of prank," said Mrs. Hardy, confused.
"Practical joke, nothing!" scoffed Aunt Gertrude shrewdly. "Did Fenton Hardy go to Chicago after some criminal?"
"Practical joke, please!" Aunt Gertrude said sarcastically. "Did Fenton Hardy really go to Chicago after some criminal?"
"He went to arrest Baldy Turk," replied Frank.
"He went to arrest Baldy Turk," Frank replied.
"There!" Aunt Gertrude pounded the table. "That explains the whole thing. The companions of this Baldy person sent that letter in the hope that it would bring Fenton Hardy back from Chicago by the next train."
"There!" Aunt Gertrude slammed the table. "That explains everything. The friends of this Baldy person sent that letter hoping it would get Fenton Hardy back from Chicago on the next train."
"But the letter is addressed to Bayport."
"But the letter is sent to Bayport."
"Certainly! Why not? They wouldn't know where to reach him in Chicago, so they sent the letter here and trusted that it would be forwarded to him. And if I hadn't been here," said Aunt Gertrude, "it very probably would have been forwarded to him. Am I right?"
"Sure! Why not? They wouldn't know how to get in touch with him in Chicago, so they sent the letter here, hoping it would be passed along to him. And if I hadn't been here," said Aunt Gertrude, "it probably would have been sent to him. Am I right?"
"I usually forward his personal mail," admitted Mrs. Hardy.
"I usually pass along his personal mail," admitted Mrs. Hardy.
"There! Didn't I know it? And look what would have happened. Fenton Hardy would have fallen right into the trap. He would have come back home, thinking his precious sons were kidnapped, and that would have given this Turk person time to get away. It's a blessing I was here, I tell you. I hope this will be a lesson to you, Laura Hardy. Always open your husband's mail! Always!"
"There! Didn't I know it? And look what would have happened. Fenton Hardy would have walked straight into the trap. He would have come back home, believing his precious sons were kidnapped, and that would have given this Turk guy time to escape. It's a blessing I was here, I tell you. I hope this will be a lesson to you, Laura Hardy. Always open your husband's mail! Always!"
CHAPTER IX
Blacksnake Island
Blacksnake Island
In spite of Aunt Gertrude's ingenious explanation of the letter, the Hardy boys were not quite satisfied. When they left the house they walked downtown, discussing the matter.
In spite of Aunt Gertrude's clever explanation of the letter, the Hardy boys weren't fully satisfied. As they left the house, they walked downtown, talking about the situation.
"Aunt Gertrude may be right, but somehow I think those fellows sent the letter to the house, believing dad was still there," declared Joe.
"Aunt Gertrude might be right, but I have a feeling those guys sent the letter to the house, thinking dad was still there," Joe said.
"But if they knew he was at the house, or thought he was at the house, he would know we weren't kidnapped."
"But if they knew he was at the house, or thought he was at the house, he would know we weren't taken."
"Yes, that's right," Joe admitted, puzzled. "I'm hanged if I can figure it out, but I still think there is more to that letter than Aunt Gertrude imagines."
"Yeah, that's true," Joe said, confused. "I can't make heads or tails of it, but I still believe there's more to that letter than Aunt Gertrude thinks."
"I have that idea myself. You noticed that they were very particular to tell how the ransom money was to be delivered. That was quite an elaborate stunt, to have the money thrown off the train at a grade crossing. That would mean that the crooks could come along in a car, snatch up the package and be away without much risk of capture. They'd hardly go to the trouble of outlining all that if they didn't mean something by it."
"I have that idea myself. You noticed they were really specific about how the ransom money was supposed to be delivered. It was quite a detailed setup to have the money thrown off the train at a level crossing. That would mean the criminals could drive up in a car, grab the package, and be gone with little chance of getting caught. They wouldn’t go through all that trouble if they didn’t have a reason for it."
"Yes, if the letter was only sent as a blind to bring dad back to Bayport you'd hardly think they'd go into all that detail."
"Yeah, if the letter was just a ruse to bring Dad back to Bayport, you wouldn't expect them to go into all that detail."
"Still," Frank pointed out, "here we are, safe and sound. Haven't been kidnapped yet, and nobody has tried to kidnap us. If that letter had been sent to Chet's people, for instance, or to the Hoopers, they would have something to worry about." Suddenly he stopped and looked at Joe. "Say!" he exclaimed. "There's an idea!"
"Still," Frank pointed out, "here we are, safe and sound. We haven't been kidnapped yet, and no one has tried to kidnap us. If that letter had gone to Chet's people, for example, or the Hoopers, they would have something to worry about." Suddenly he stopped and looked at Joe. "Hey!" he exclaimed. "That's an idea!"
"What?"
"What?"
"Chet and Biff!" declared Frank excitedly. "Don't you see? This may have something to do with them. Chet and Biff are missing. Perhaps they have been kidnapped."
"Chet and Biff!" Frank exclaimed excitedly. "Don't you get it? This might be connected to them. Chet and Biff are gone. Maybe they have been abducted."
"But why should any one kidnap them?" Joe looked wonderingly at his brother.
"But why would anyone want to kidnap them?" Joe stared at his brother in disbelief.
"In mistake for us. Don't you see it? Perhaps this gang mistook Chet and Biff for you and me and kidnapped them! Then they wrote the letter to dad."
"In error for us. Don't you get it? Maybe this gang mistook Chet and Biff for us and kidnapped them! Then they sent the letter to Dad."
"Gee, I never thought of that!" Joe exclaimed. "I'll bet dollars to doughnuts that you're right."
"Wow, I never thought of that!" Joe said. "I’m sure you’re right."
"Don't you remember the day we were all out in the boat and the three men came so close to us? Remember how closely they looked at Chet and Biff? Perhaps those fellows had been tipped off that you and I were in the boat and wanted to get a look at us so they could identify us when they got a chance to kidnap us. And instead of looking at us, they picked on Chet and Biff. They knew we owned a boat, but they wouldn't know that Biff had one. Therefore they'd think that the chap at the wheel would be either you or me."
"Don't you remember the day we were all out on the boat and those three guys came really close to us? Remember how they stared at Chet and Biff? Maybe those guys had been tipped off that you and I were in the boat and wanted to see us so they could recognize us later if they planned to kidnap us. Instead of focusing on us, they went after Chet and Biff. They knew we owned a boat, but they wouldn't know that Biff had one. So they probably thought the person at the wheel was either you or me."
"It hangs together, all right. And then, remember when we saw those same three men hanging around the Morton farm? They must have trailed Chet home to see where he lived. And all the time they thought he was either you or me!"
"It all makes sense now. And remember when we saw those same three guys loitering near the Morton farm? They must have followed Chet home to find out where he lived. And all that time, they thought he was either you or me!"
"I think we're getting at the truth of it, Joe. When Chet and Biff started on their trip, those fellows followed them or lay in wait for them some place and captured them."
"I think we're getting to the bottom of this, Joe. When Chet and Biff started their trip, those guys either followed them or waited for them somewhere and caught them."
Just then the Hardy boys met Phil Cohen and Tony Prito in front of the fruit stand of their friend, Nick the Greek, each with a bottle of pop.
Just then, the Hardy boys ran into Phil Cohen and Tony Prito in front of their friend Nick the Greek's fruit stand, each holding a bottle of soda.
"Hello," was Tony's greeting. "Have one?" he invited, indicating the pop.
"Hi," Tony said, greeting him. "Want one?" he asked, pointing to the soda.
"Don't mind if we do, even if it is just after breakfast."
"Sure, why not, even if it is right after breakfast."
Nick the Greek dexterously opened two bottles of pop and slapped them down on the counter. "Hot day, eh?" he said, as the boys reached for straws.
Nick the Greek skillfully popped open two soda bottles and slammed them down on the counter. "Hot day, right?" he said, as the guys grabbed for straws.
"You bet it's hot." After a satisfying gurgle of the ice-cold pop, the Hardy boys turned to their chums. "We have a clue," declared Frank.
"You bet it's hot." After a refreshing gulp of the cold soda, the Hardy boys faced their friends. "We have a clue," Frank announced.
"About what?"
"About what?"
"About Chet and Biff."
"About Chet and Biff."
"Yes?" Tony and Phil were immediately interested. "What's up?"
"Yes?" Tony and Phil were instantly intrigued. "What's going on?"
Frank then told them of the incident of the letter and, often prompted by his brother, explained how they had connected it with the disappearance of their chums.
Frank then told them about the incident with the letter and, often prompted by his brother, explained how they had linked it to the disappearance of their friends.
"And so," he concluded, "we've figured that Chet and Biff may have been kidnapped in mistake for us."
"And so," he concluded, "we've realized that Chet and Biff might have been kidnapped by mistake for us."
"There's something in that, too," agreed Phil. "And here's something else that may help. I forgot about it when we were searching for the fellows the other day. Just a little while before they went on their trip I was talking to Chet and Biff and I remember that Biff said he had always wanted to visit Blacksnake Island."
"There's something to that, too," Phil agreed. "And here’s something else that might help. I forgot about it when we were looking for the guys the other day. Just before they went on their trip, I was talking to Chet and Biff, and I remember Biff saying he had always wanted to visit Blacksnake Island."
"Blacksnake Island!" exclaimed Frank. "That's the place that is overrun with big blacksnakes, isn't it? Nobody ever goes there."
"Blacksnake Island!" Frank exclaimed. "That's the spot that's full of huge black snakes, right? No one ever goes there."
"That's the place, and that's why it's called Blacksnake Island. And you can't blame people for staying away from it—with a name like that. But Biff had read about it and said he wanted to see what the place was like."
"That's the spot, and that's why it's named Blacksnake Island. You can’t really blame people for avoiding it—with a name like that. But Biff had read about it and said he wanted to check out what the place was like."
"That's Biff all over," agreed Tony. "But did they decide to go?"
"That's just like Biff," Tony agreed. "But did they decide to go?"
"Chet didn't want to go. Blacksnake Island is down the coast, and Chet wanted to go up the coast."
"Chet didn't want to go. Blacksnake Island is down the coast, and Chet wanted to go up the coast."
"Sure! That's why we searched up the coast—because Chet said that was where they were going!" Frank declared.
"Of course! That's why we looked up the coast—because Chet said that’s where they were headed!" Frank said.
"Well, Biff kept on saying that he wanted to see Blacksnake Island anyway, and while Chet wasn't very much struck with the idea he might have gone there."
"Well, Biff kept saying that he wanted to see Blacksnake Island anyway, and while Chet wasn't really into the idea he might have gone there."
"Perhaps they went that way after all. I wish we'd known that when we made our first search. They might have started for Blacksnake Island and got captured on the way." Frank drained the last of his bottle of pop. "Say, I'd like to start another search for them, and go down the coast in that direction. What do you say?"
"Maybe they went that way after all. I wish we’d known that when we did our initial search. They might have headed towards Blacksnake Island and gotten captured on the way." Frank finished the last of his soda. "Hey, I’d like to start another search for them and head down the coast in that direction. What do you think?"
"I guess I can get away all right," said Tony. "How about you, Phil?"
"I think I can manage to get away fine," Tony said. "What about you, Phil?"
"It's O.K. with me."
"I'm good with it."
"We'll probably find it hard to get away," said Frank doubtfully. "We'll go home and ask mother, anyway. You see, we're supposed to stay around the house now that dad's away. But Aunt Gertrude is there and if we can make a get-away without her seeing us I guess it'll be all right."
"We'll probably have a tough time sneaking out," said Frank uncertainly. "We'll go home and ask Mom, anyway. You see, we're supposed to stick around the house now that Dad's gone. But Aunt Gertrude is there, and if we can slip away without her noticing, I think it will be fine."
"Look us up if you can make it."
"Check us out if you can make it."
"You bet we will! Let's go home now, Joe, and see if we can go."
"You bet we will! Let's head home now, Joe, and see if we can go."
The boys separated and Frank and Joe returned home. They found their mother and Aunt Gertrude still discussing the letter.
The boys split up, and Frank and Joe went back home. They found their mom and Aunt Gertrude still talking about the letter.
"It's absolute foolishness, Laura Hardy, that's all it is!" Aunt Gertrude declared. "You'll just scare the man out of his wits and he'll be back here on the first train."
"It's complete nonsense, Laura Hardy, that's all it is!" Aunt Gertrude declared. "You'll just freak the guy out and he'll be back here on the first train."
"Well, I've sent the message, and at least I'll know where he is. I haven't had any word from Fenton since he left and it's been making me nervous."
"Well, I sent the message, so at least I’ll know where he is. I haven’t heard from Fenton since he left and it’s been making me anxious."
"Fiddlesticks! The man is too busy to write."
"Come on! The guy is too busy to write."
"It isn't like him not to drop a line every two or three days. He is usually very particular about it. He always sends me a note at least twice a week while he's away."
"It’s not like him to not check in every two or three days. He’s usually pretty particular about that. He always sends me a message at least twice a week when he’s away."
"Well," sighed Aunt Gertrude, as though giving it up as a bad job, "I suppose you know your own affairs best; but I'm telling you I would not have sent that telegram. There!" and she picked up her knitting, the needles flashing furiously.
"Well," sighed Aunt Gertrude, as if accepting defeat, "I guess you know your own business best; but I'm telling you I would not have sent that telegram. There!" and she picked up her knitting, the needles clicking rapidly.
"What's the matter?" asked Frank.
"What's wrong?" asked Frank.
"Little boys should be seen and not heard," grunted Aunt Gertrude, glaring at him over the tops of her spectacles.
"Little boys should be seen and not heard," Aunt Gertrude huffed, glaring at him over the top of her glasses.
"I sent a telegram to your father, telling him about the letter," their mother explained. "I think he should know about it. And, besides, I've been worrying because he hasn't written."
"I sent a telegram to your dad, letting him know about the letter," their mom explained. "I think he should be informed. Plus, I've been worried since he hasn't written."
"Where did you address the telegram?"
"Where did you send the telegram?"
"He gave me two addresses where I would be sure to find him in Chicago," said Mrs. Hardy. "He gave me the name of the hotel he would be staying at and he also said that Police Headquarters would reach him. I sent the same telegram to each place so I'd be sure to get him."
"He gave me two addresses where I could definitely find him in Chicago," Mrs. Hardy said. "He told me the name of the hotel he would be at and also mentioned that Police Headquarters could contact him. I sent the same telegram to both places to make sure I’d reach him."
"Waste of money," sniffed Aunt Gertrude.
"Waste of money," Aunt Gertrude scoffed.
At that moment the telephone rang. Mrs. Hardy answered it. The 'phone was in the hallway and the boys could not hear their mother's words, but when she returned to the room a few minutes later they saw that she was pale with apprehension.
At that moment, the phone rang. Mrs. Hardy picked it up. The phone was in the hallway, so the boys couldn’t hear their mom’s words, but when she came back into the room a few minutes later, they noticed she looked pale and worried.
"The telegraph company tells me that there is no Fenton Hardy registered at the hotel and that Police Headquarters say he hasn't shown up there either," she announced gravely.
"The telegraph company informed me that there’s no Fenton Hardy registered at the hotel, and Police Headquarters said he hasn’t arrived there either," she said seriously.
The boys looked at each other in surprise.
The guys exchanged surprised glances.
"That's strange," said Frank. "And he hasn't written. There's something mighty queer about this!"
"That's weird," said Frank. "And he hasn't written. There's something really off about this!"
Aunt Gertrude, for once, was at a loss for words. The knitting needles remained suspended in mid-air. Behind the spectacles, her eyes were wide and her mouth remained open in astonishment.
Aunt Gertrude was, for once, speechless. The knitting needles hung in the air. Behind her glasses, her eyes were wide, and her mouth was agape in shock.
"This affair gets more puzzling every minute," remarked Frank, at last. "Of course dad might have been delayed, or he might have picked up a clue that took him away from Chicago after all. But I think he would have written."
"This situation gets more confusing every minute," Frank finally said. "Of course, Dad might have gotten held up, or he could have found a clue that led him away from Chicago after all. But I think he would have written."
"Perhaps he didn't report at Police Headquarters in Chicago because he was afraid Baldy Turk's gang might find out he was in the city," Joe suggested.
"Maybe he didn't check in at Police Headquarters in Chicago because he was worried Baldy Turk's gang might discover he was in town," Joe suggested.
"There's something in that."
"There's something to that."
"But why wouldn't he be at the hotel?" asked Mrs. Hardy.
"But why wouldn't he be at the hotel?" asked Mrs. Hardy.
"He might be there under an assumed name. If Baldy Turk's gang are on the lookout for him he wouldn't register under his real name. They would be checking up on all the hotels to find him if they thought he was in Chicago," said Frank eagerly. "Perhaps that's why your message didn't reach him."
"He could be there using a fake name. If Baldy Turk's gang is looking for him, he wouldn't check in under his real name. They would be checking all the hotels to find him if they thought he was in Chicago," Frank said eagerly. "Maybe that's why your message didn't get to him."
"Of course, that's why!" sniffed Aunt Gertrude, returning to her knitting, much relieved. "Any one might have known that. It was a waste of time to try to reach him with a telegram, and I said that from the start." The needles clashed.
"Of course, that's why!" sniffed Aunt Gertrude, going back to her knitting, feeling much better. "Anyone could have figured that out. It was pointless to try to contact him with a telegram, and I said that from the beginning." The needles clicked together.
"Oh, I guess we needn't worry about dad very much. He can look after himself," said Frank, with a warning glance at his brother. Nevertheless, he was deeply worried over the fact that the telegraph company had failed to locate his father. However, he was trying to make light of the matter so as to relieve his mother of worry.
"Oh, I don't think we need to worry about Dad too much. He can take care of himself," said Frank, giving his brother a warning look. Still, he was really concerned that the telegraph company hadn't been able to find their father. But he was trying to downplay it to ease his mother's worries.
Joe saw his motive.
Joe recognized his motive.
"Sure, dad can look after himself. There's nothing to be alarmed about. He's probably keeping out of sight in Chicago for fear Baldy Turk's gang will find out he is there. If they ever knew he was on their trail they wouldn't stop at trying to kill him. He said so himself. If he tried to communicate with us it might give them just the clue they are waiting for."
"Sure, Dad can take care of himself. There's nothing to worry about. He's probably just laying low in Chicago because he's afraid Baldy Turk's gang will find out he's there. If they ever figured out he was after them, they wouldn't hesitate to try to kill him. He said that himself. If he tried to reach out to us, it might give them the exact hint they’re looking for."
"I suppose you're right," Mrs. Hardy agreed, brightening up. "Well, we won't worry about it."
"I guess you're right," Mrs. Hardy said, feeling more cheerful. "Okay, we won't stress about it."
"Of course we won't worry about it!" declared Aunt Gertrude. "Worry is unhealthy. Worry has sent more people to their graves than anything else. Look at me. I never worry. That's why I'm so healthy. I'll live to be a hundred."
"Of course we won't worry about it!" Aunt Gertrude declared. "Worry is unhealthy. Worry has sent more people to their graves than anything else. Look at me. I never worry. That's why I'm so healthy. I'm going to live to be a hundred."
"Yes, it would take quite a lot to kill you, Aunt Gertrude," agreed Frank innocently.
"Yeah, it would take a lot to actually kill you, Aunt Gertrude," Frank admitted naively.
Aunt Gertrude looked up at him suspiciously.
Aunt Gertrude glanced at him with suspicion.
"I don't know just what you mean by that, young man, but I'll warrant there's something behind it! What are you two rascals waiting around here for, anyway? What do you want?"
"I don’t quite understand what you mean by that, young man, but I’ll bet there’s something more to it! What are you two troublemakers hanging around here for, anyway? What do you want?"
"We were just wanting to talk to mother."
"We just wanted to talk to Mom."
"Well, go ahead. Who's stopping you? I won't listen, I'm sure. If it's none of my business you needn't be afraid that I'll listen. Not at all. Not at all. Go right ahead. Talk to your mother if you wish. Of course, if you want to leave your poor old aunt out of everything I'm sure I don't mind. I'm not interested, anyway."
"Go ahead. Who's stopping you? I definitely won't listen. If it's none of my business, you don't need to worry that I'll be listening. Not at all. Go for it. Talk to your mom if you want. Of course, if you want to leave your poor old aunt out of everything, I really don't mind. I'm not interested anyway."
Whereupon Aunt Gertrude indignantly hitched her chair around toward the window and knitted vigorously.
Whereupon Aunt Gertrude angrily turned her chair toward the window and started knitting passionately.
"Go ahead! I'm not listening. Talk away. I won't listen to a word of it," she shrilled.
"Go ahead! I'm not listening. Talk all you want. I won't hear a single word," she shouted.
Mrs. Hardy smiled.
Mrs. Hardy smiled.
"What is it, boys?"
"What's up, guys?"
"I'm not listening," declared Aunt Gertrude.
"I'm not listening," Aunt Gertrude declared.
"We think we've found a new clue about Chet and Biff," said Frank. "We wanted to go on another search for them!"
"We think we've found a new clue about Chet and Biff," Frank said. "We want to go look for them again!"
"What!" shrieked Aunt Gertrude, quite forgetting that she had not been listening. She wheeled about in her chair. "Go on another search for those two boys! Of all the idiotic ideas! Laura Hardy, if you let these two children go gallivanting out into the ocean again it will be against my advice."
"What!" yelled Aunt Gertrude, completely forgetting that she hadn’t been paying attention. She turned around in her chair. "You want to search for those two boys again? What a ridiculous idea! Laura Hardy, if you let those two kids run off into the ocean again, it'll be against my advice."
"Where are you planning to look for them?" asked Mrs. Hardy.
"Where do you plan to look for them?" asked Mrs. Hardy.
"Blacksnake Island!"
"Blacksnake Island!"
Aunt Gertrude gasped. In her astonishment she dropped her knitting needles. "Blacksnake Island! Frank Hardy, have you gone completely off your head?"
Aunt Gertrude gasped. In her shock, she dropped her knitting needles. "Blacksnake Island! Frank Hardy, have you lost your mind?"
CHAPTER X
The Boy on the Deck
The Boy on the Deck
Perhaps it was because Mrs. Hardy was determined to show that she was mistress in her own home. At any rate, she gave her consent to the proposed expedition. This was in spite of all Aunt Gertrude's protests and predictions of disaster. The terrible woman raved for an hour when it was definitely decided that the Hardy boys should go on the trip, but Mrs. Hardy was firm. If there was any chance that they might be able to rescue Chet and Biff she meant that they should avail themselves of it.
Perhaps it was because Mrs. Hardy was determined to show she was in charge of her own home. Whatever the reason, she agreed to the planned expedition. This was despite Aunt Gertrude's constant protests and warning of disaster. The awful woman complained for an hour when it was finally decided that the Hardy boys would go on the trip, but Mrs. Hardy stood her ground. If there was any chance they could rescue Chet and Biff, she wanted them to take it.
They explained their theory regarding the letter, and although Aunt Gertrude derided it as nonsense, Mrs. Hardy was disposed to believe that their deductions might be correct.
They explained their theory about the letter, and even though Aunt Gertrude dismissed it as nonsense, Mrs. Hardy was inclined to think that their conclusions could be right.
"You may go," she said. "But take care of yourselves and don't take any foolish chances. I'm worrying enough about your father, as it is."
"You can go," she said. "But be careful and don’t take any unnecessary risks. I’m already worried enough about your dad."
So the boys left the house before Aunt Gertrude would have an opportunity to change their mother's mind and joyfully acquainted Phil and Tony with the news.
So the boys left the house before Aunt Gertrude could change their mom's mind and happily told Phil and Tony the news.
"We're going to start right away," they told their chums. "Better get ready."
"We're going to start right now," they told their friends. "You should get ready."
"I was speaking to Slim Robinson and Jerry Gilroy," Tony told them. "They want to come along too."
"I was talking to Slim Robinson and Jerry Gilroy," Tony said to them. "They want to join us, too."
"There isn't room for all of us in the one boat."
"There isn't enough space for all of us in the same boat."
"I was thinking of that. What's the matter with the rest of us making the trip in the Napoli? I'll get up another expedition and we'll follow you."
"I was thinking about that. What's stopping the rest of us from making the trip on the Napoli? I'll organize another expedition and we'll follow you."
"Good idea. One of the boys can come with us and the rest of you can go in the Napoli. Joe and I are starting right away."
"Sounds good. One of the guys can come with us, and the rest of you can take the Napoli. Joe and I are getting started right now."
But when it came time to check up on the various members of the searching party they discovered that Tony was the only one who could leave that day. Slim Robinson had to work that afternoon, as also had Jerry Gilroy, while Phil Cohen had an engagement for the evening that he was unable to break.
But when it was time to check on the different members of the search party, they found that Tony was the only one who could leave that day. Slim Robinson had to work that afternoon, and so did Jerry Gilroy, while Phil Cohen had an evening commitment he couldn't break.
"We'll all leave in the Napoli first thing to-morrow morning, then," decided Tony. "You and Joe go ahead in your boat now and head toward Blacksnake Island. We'll be along in the morning."
"We'll all leave on the Napoli first thing tomorrow morning then," Tony decided. "You and Joe go ahead in your boat now and head toward Blacksnake Island. We'll catch up with you in the morning."
This was the plan agreed upon, and the Hardy boys lost no time in making ready for the trip. They had the forethought to stock up with provisions for several days, although the run to Blacksnake Island would not take them many hours, because they realized that the search might keep them away from home longer than they expected.
This was the plan they agreed on, and the Hardy boys quickly got ready for the trip. They smartly packed enough food for several days, even though the journey to Blacksnake Island wouldn’t take them long, because they understood that the search might keep them away from home longer than they anticipated.
It was afternoon before they were able to get away, and all through the lunch hour they were in a constant state of apprehension lest Aunt Gertrude prevail upon their mother to withdraw her permission for the journey.
It was the afternoon by the time they managed to leave, and throughout lunch, they were constantly worried that Aunt Gertrude would convince their mom to take back her approval for the trip.
"They'll never come back alive, mark my words!" declared their aunt. "They'll be bitten by those snakes on Blacksnake Island, as sure as fate. Why, even grown-up men won't go on that island. It's a terrible place. I've read all about it."
"They'll never come back alive, trust me!" their aunt said. "Those snakes on Blacksnake Island will bite them, no doubt about it. Even grown men won’t go on that island. It's a horrible place. I’ve read all about it."
"We're not planning to explore the island, Aunt Gertrude," Frank explained. "We're going to cruise around it and see if we can find any sign of the fellows."
"We're not planning to check out the island, Aunt Gertrude," Frank said. "We're going to cruise around it and see if we can find any signs of the guys."
"Cruise around it!" their aunt sniffed. "As if I don't know boys! You'll not be satisfied until you've tramped from one end of the island to the other. But go ahead. Go ahead. I wash my hands of the affair. If you want to commit suicide, it's your own lookout," and she swept from the room in great indignation.
"Cruise around it!" their aunt huffed. "Like I don’t know boys! You’ll never be happy until you’ve walked all over this island. But go for it. Go for it. I’m done with this whole thing. If you want to do something reckless, that’s on you," and she stormed out of the room, clearly upset.
Mrs. Hardy did not share her fears. She knew her sons well enough to realize that they would not run into needless dangers, and when she kissed them good-bye her only request was that they would not stay away any longer than was necessary.
Mrs. Hardy didn’t voice her worries. She knew her sons well enough to understand that they wouldn’t seek out unnecessary risks, and when she kissed them goodbye, her only request was that they wouldn’t be gone any longer than needed.
The bay was calm when they started out, and the Sleuth was running, as Joe expressed it, "like a watch."
The bay was peaceful when they set off, and the Sleuth was running, as Joe put it, "like a watch."
It was a beautiful summer afternoon and the cool breeze out on the water was in welcome relief to the sweltering heat of the city streets. Spray flicked into their faces as the motorboat raced along toward the eastern gap. When they passed out of Barmet Bay and reached the open sea Frank headed the boat down the coast in the direction of Blacksnake Island.
It was a beautiful summer afternoon, and the cool breeze on the water offered a refreshing break from the sweltering heat of the city streets. Spray splashed into their faces as the motorboat sped toward the eastern gap. When they left Barmet Bay and hit the open sea, Frank steered the boat down the coast toward Blacksnake Island.
"It isn't far from the coast. There's a channel of a little over a mile," he said to his brother. "We won't be able to make it to-night, but we'll stop over at Rock Harbor and go on again in the morning. By that time, Tony and the others shouldn't be far behind."
"It’s not far from the coast. There’s a channel a little over a mile," he said to his brother. "We won’t be able to make it tonight, but we’ll stop at Rock Harbor and continue in the morning. By then, Tony and the others should be close behind."
Toward the end of the afternoon they were in sight of Rock Harbor, a small port, where they spied a schooner at anchor in the distance. Rock Harbor was not a shipping point of great importance, but there were always a number of miscellaneous craft in evidence.
Toward the end of the afternoon, they could see Rock Harbor, a small port, where they spotted a schooner anchored in the distance. Rock Harbor wasn’t a major shipping hub, but there were always several different kinds of boats around.
To enter the harbor they were obliged to pass within a short distance of the schooner, swinging about beneath the bows of the vessel. As the Sleuth plunged through the water, in the very shadow of the ship, Joe suddenly gave an exclamation of surprise.
To get into the harbor, they had to travel pretty close to the schooner, which was swaying under the front of the ship. As the Sleuth cut through the water right in the shadow of the vessel, Joe suddenly let out a surprised exclamation.
"Frank! Look up on deck—quick!"
"Frank! Look up on deck—hurry!"
Frank glanced hurriedly upward. He was just in time to see the figure of a boy moving away from the rail, but there was something familiar about the young fellow that made him look incredulously at his brother.
Frank looked up quickly. He was just in time to see a boy moving away from the rail, but there was something familiar about the kid that made him look skeptically at his brother.
"Chet!"
"Chet!"
"I'm sure it's him," returned Joe hurriedly. "I didn't get a very good look at his face, because he only looked over the rail and then he drew back—but I'm almost positive it was Chet!"
"I'm sure it's him," Joe said quickly. "I didn't get a good look at his face because he just peeked over the rail and then pulled back—but I'm almost certain it was Chet!"
"But what on earth can he be doing on that schooner?"
"But what in the world can he be doing on that schooner?"
"Probably he's a prisoner. Let's give him a hail."
"He's probably a prisoner. Let's call out to him."
They shouted the name of their chum half a dozen times, but their only response was from a villainous looking sailor who glared over the side at them and bade them get away from the ship.
They called out their friend's name six times, but all they got in response was a scowling sailor who glared down at them and told them to get away from the ship.
"No use causing trouble," said Frank, in a low voice. "We'll go now, but we'll come back later."
"No point in causing trouble," Frank said quietly. "We'll leave now, but we'll be back later."
He steered the motorboat away from the vicinity of the schooner, but instead of going on into the harbor he put out to sea again.
He navigated the motorboat away from the area around the schooner, but instead of heading into the harbor, he set off out to sea again.
"It won't be long until it gets darker. Then we'll go back. If Chet is on that ship we'll get word to him somehow."
"It won't be long until it gets dark. Then we'll head back. If Chet is on that ship, we'll find a way to get a message to him."
"Well, if it isn't Chet Morton it's his double," declared Joe. "Even if I didn't get a very good look at him, I know he was just about the same height and build and the same general appearance. What puzzles me is why he didn't call out to us. And why did he draw back from the rail in such a hurry?"
"Well, if it isn't Chet Morton, it's his twin," Joe said. "Even though I didn't get a great look at him, I could tell he was about the same height and build, and had a similar look. What confuses me is why he didn't say anything to us. And why did he back away from the rail so suddenly?"
"He mightn't have had time to call to us. Perhaps he managed to escape just for a minute or so and they dragged him back before he could give a shout."
"He might not have had time to call out to us. Maybe he only managed to escape for a minute or so, and they pulled him back before he could yell."
"There's something in that. And of course he mightn't have recognized us."
"There's something to that. And of course he might not have recognized us."
"He would have recognized the boat, I'm sure."
"He would have recognized the boat, I'm sure."
"There's something queer about it. If we come back later on we may be able to see him again. Did you notice the name of the schooner?"
"There's something strange about it. If we come back later, we might be able to see him again. Did you catch the name of the schooner?"
"Yes," answered Frank. "I watched for it. The Persis. I think what we'd better do is this: We'll go back down the coast and loaf around until it gets darker. Then we'll come back to the harbor and try to come up to the schooner quietly. If there's a rope ladder handy I'll go up over the side and see what I can find out."
"Yeah," Frank replied. "I was keeping an eye out for it. The Persis. I think our best move is this: let's head back down the coast and hang out until it gets dark. Then we can return to the harbor and try to approach the schooner quietly. If there's a rope ladder available, I'll climb up the side and see what I can discover."
"It looks like our only chance. You'll have to go easy. If Chet and Biff are held prisoners on that ship they'll be well guarded. You might be captured yourself."
"It seems like this is our only shot. You need to be careful. If Chet and Biff are prisoners on that ship, they'll have a lot of security. You could get caught too."
"That's where you will come in. If you hear sounds of a struggle or if I don't come back, go right into the harbor and notify the police so they can have the schooner searched."
"That's where you come in. If you hear any sounds of a struggle or if I don’t come back, head straight to the harbor and let the police know so they can search the schooner."
Joe nodded. "All right. I'll keep watch."
Joe nodded. "Okay. I'll keep an eye out."
Frank steered the motorboat back along the coast again and for the next hour or more they cruised about, waiting for twilight. At length sunset came and gradually the shadows fell. Lights began to twinkle in the town. Lights glowed from the mysterious schooner, now but a rakish shadow at the entrance to the harbor. When the lads judged that it was sufficiently dark to cover their approach, they returned, then crept quietly up on the ship.
Frank navigated the motorboat back along the coast again, and for the next hour or more, they cruised around, waiting for twilight. Eventually, sunset arrived and the shadows began to deepen. Lights started to flicker in the town. Lights shone from the mysterious schooner, which now appeared as a sleek shadow at the entrance to the harbor. When the guys thought it was dark enough to hide their approach, they headed back and quietly sneaked up on the ship.
They drew up close to the schooner's stern without being noticed and to Frank's relief he saw that a rope was dangling over the side. From the boat he reached out and seized it. The rope held fast; it supported his weight.
They pulled up near the back of the schooner without being spotted, and to Frank's relief, he saw a rope hanging over the side. From the boat, he reached out and grabbed it. The rope was sturdy; it held his weight.
There were vague sounds from the deck above. The shuffling of feet. A burst of laughter from forward. Most of the men, he judged, would be in port, but it behooved him to move with caution.
There were unclear noises from the deck above. The sound of shuffling feet. A burst of laughter from the front. He figured most of the men would be on shore, but it was wise for him to proceed carefully.
"All set," he whispered to Joe.
"All set," he whispered to Joe.
"Right."
"Okay."
Frank swung himself away from the motorboat and began to climb slowly to the deck. Water lapped against the schooner's hull. The night was very quiet. Complete darkness had fallen by now. In a few moments Joe could only distinguish his brother as an obscure shadow as he clambered slowly upward.
Frank pulled himself away from the motorboat and started to climb slowly up to the deck. Water splashed against the schooner's hull. The night was very quiet. It was completely dark now. In a few moments, Joe could only make out his brother as a dark shape as he climbed slowly upward.
Anxiously, Joe Hardy watched. He saw his brother climb higher and higher until at last his head and shoulders were silhouetted above the side of the ship.
Anxiously, Joe Hardy watched. He saw his brother climb higher and higher until finally his head and shoulders were outlined above the edge of the ship.
Then Frank scrambled quietly over onto the deck. He had removed his shoes so as to proceed with a minimum of sound, so that once he had disappeared over the side Joe could hear nothing. He crouched in the boat, waiting.
Then Frank quietly climbed onto the deck. He had taken off his shoes to make as little noise as possible, so once he went over the side, Joe wouldn't hear anything. He crouched in the boat, waiting.
Finally he heard a low whistle from the deck above. He looked up. He could see Frank leaning over the side. His brother's face was only a grey blur. He motioned with his arm, indicating that Joe was to follow him.
Finally, he heard a soft whistle from the deck above. He looked up. He could see Frank leaning over the side. His brother's face was just a grey blur. He waved his arm, signaling for Joe to follow him.
The motorboat had been tied fast so, although Joe was somewhat puzzled, he was nothing loath to share the adventure. Seizing the rope, he swung himself free of the motorboat, then began to climb nimbly toward the deck.
The motorboat was securely tied up, so even though Joe was a bit confused, he didn't hesitate to join the adventure. Grabbing the rope, he swung himself off the motorboat and started to climb swiftly up to the deck.
The rope cut into his hands and the climb taxed his strength, but in a few minutes he was near the top. Frank had moved back from the side into the darkness again.
The rope dug into his hands and the ascent challenged his strength, but in just a few minutes, he was close to the top. Frank had stepped back from the edge and into the darkness once more.
He scrambled over the side and dropped lightly onto the deck. Frank was crouched in the shadows waiting for him.
He climbed over the side and landed softly on the deck. Frank was crouched in the shadows, waiting for him.
And at that moment a heavy hand fell on his shoulder and a gruff voice said in his ear:
And at that moment, a heavy hand landed on his shoulder, and a rough voice said in his ear:
"All right, young fellow. Now we've got you both!"
"Alright, kid. Now we've got you both!"
CHAPTER XI
The Island
The Island
Joe Hardy started violently. Then, realizing that he had been trapped, he dropped flat on the deck, wriggling to one side, wresting himself free of the clutching hand. He heard the man who had seized him give an angry grunt, then he saw the man lunging at him from the shadows. He dodged the outstretched arm and rolled over and over on the deck.
Joe Hardy jumped up suddenly. Then, realizing he was trapped, he dropped flat on the floor, squirming to one side to free himself from the gripping hand. He heard the guy who had grabbed him let out an angry grunt, and then he saw the man lunging at him from the shadows. He dodged the outstretched arm and tumbled across the floor.
"Grab him, Mike!" roared another voice from near by, and then Joe was dimly aware that another struggle had started near the rail. He leaped to his feet and raced along the deck, the sailor in pursuit.
"Grab him, Mike!" yelled another voice from nearby, and then Joe vaguely noticed that another scuffle had begun near the rail. He jumped to his feet and dashed along the deck, the sailor chasing after him.
"Over the side, Joe!" shouted a voice that he recognized as being that of his brother.
"Over the side, Joe!" shouted a voice he recognized as his brother's.
He fled, hearing the pounding of feet on the deck close behind him. A dark figure stepped out of the shadows immediately ahead.
He ran, hearing the heavy footsteps on the deck right behind him. A dark figure emerged from the shadows directly in front of him.
"Collar him!" roared the man at his back. The dark figure advanced with outstretched arms. Joe stepped neatly aside, dodged as the man swooped at him and blundered to the left. The two men collided violently, and by the time they had disengaged themselves Joe was a good five yards away.
"Grab him!" shouted the guy behind him. The dark figure moved forward with arms wide open. Joe quickly stepped aside, dodging as the man lunged at him and stumbled to the left. The two men crashed into each other hard, and by the time they separated, Joe was a good five yards away.
The schooner was in an uproar.
The schooner was a mess.
A revolver roared from the shadows and the darkness was cleft by a crimson splash.
A revolver fired from the shadows, and the darkness was cut through by a splash of red.
"Harbor thieves!" yelled a voice from behind. "Catch 'em!"
"Thieves at the harbor!" shouted a voice from behind. "Get them!"
Footsteps pounded on the deck. Shouts and muttered imprecations rang out. A light flared from somewhere ahead. Out of the shadows rose a man who lunged fiercely at Joe, grappled with him, and they fell to the deck together. Joe managed to wrench himself free and rolled to one side, scrambling to his feet.
Footsteps slammed on the deck. Shouts and muttered curses echoed around. A light flashed from somewhere ahead. From the shadows emerged a man who charged fiercely at Joe, struggled with him, and they went down to the deck together. Joe managed to break free and rolled to one side, quickly getting back on his feet.
He heard a splash near by and a shout. "Over the side!" he could hear Frank calling again. His brother's voice was far below and he knew that Frank must have dived from the rail.
He heard a splash nearby and a shout. "Over the side!" he could hear Frank calling again. His brother's voice was far below, and he knew that Frank must have jumped from the railing.
He was not far from the side of the schooner, and he raced for the rail just as half a dozen figures came plunging out of the gloom, their heavy boots thudding tremendously on the deck. Again the revolver crashed out and again the tongue of crimson flame licked its way through the blackness. The bullet passed within a few inches of Joe's head, and he ducked instinctively.
He was close to the side of the schooner, and he sprinted for the railing just as half a dozen people burst out of the darkness, their heavy boots pounding loudly on the deck. Again, the revolver fired, and again, the bright flash of red flame shot through the blackness. The bullet whizzed just a few inches from Joe's head, and he ducked instinctively.
He reached the rail. Desperately, he scrambled up. But just as he poised for the dive a great hand closed about his ankle and some one seized the back of his coat. He felt himself dragged back, but with his free foot he kicked out. The grasp of his pursuer relaxed and Joe heard him grunt from the impact. The man staggered back.
He got to the railing. In a panic, he climbed up. But just when he was about to jump, a strong hand grabbed his ankle and someone caught the back of his coat. He felt himself being pulled back, but he kicked out with his other foot. The grip of his pursuer loosened, and Joe heard him grunt from the hit. The man stumbled back.
The moment he was free, Joe went over the side.
The moment he was free, Joe jumped over the side.
He struck the cold water of the bay with a splash and went far down into the depths. Then he found himself rising again and at last he bobbed up over the surface.
He hit the cold water of the bay with a splash and dove deep down into the depths. Then he felt himself come back up and finally popped up above the surface.
He did not know where the motorboat was, but he swam ahead, at the same time keeping a wary eye above. He could see dark figures silhouetted above the side of the vessel and he could hear voices.
He didn’t know where the motorboat was, but he swam forward, keeping a cautious eye above. He could see dark shapes outlined against the side of the boat and he could hear voices.
"He's down there!" declared a gruff voice.
"He's down there!" a rough voice shouted.
"I almost had him!" shouted another. "I grabbed him just as he was going over, but he kicked me in the jaw."
"I almost had him!" another person shouted. "I grabbed him just as he was going over, but he kicked me in the jaw."
"How many were there?" asked another sailor.
"How many were there?" asked another sailor.
"Two," declared the gruff voice. "Harbor thieves—both of 'em. Come sneakin' aboard, one at a time. I caught one of 'em peepin' down into the galley where the cabin boy was peelin' potatoes and I followed him till he went back to the side, so I figured he had the rest of his pals down below. I grabbed him and clapped my hand over his mouth and made him wave for 'em to come up. But there was only one come up and Bill here grabbed him, but he got away."
"Two," said the gruff voice. "Harbor thieves—both of them. They snuck on board, one at a time. I caught one of them looking down into the galley where the cabin boy was peeling potatoes, and I followed him until he went back to the side, so I figured he had the rest of his friends down below. I grabbed him and covered his mouth, making him signal for them to come up. But only one came up, and Bill here got him, but he escaped."
"Both of 'em get away?"
"Did both of them escape?"
"Yeah! I hope they drown."
"Yeah! I hope they fail."
Then a thrill of fear ran through Joe as he heard one of the men say:
Then a wave of fear washed over Joe as he heard one of the men say:
"Keep quiet! Listen! Don't you hear some one swimming down there?"
"Stay quiet! Listen! Don't you hear someone swimming down there?"
The voices died down. Joe could see the figures leaning over the side as the sailors intently peered down into the darkness. He ceased swimming to tread water quietly.
The voices faded away. Joe could see the silhouettes leaning over the edge as the sailors focused intently down into the darkness. He stopped swimming to quietly tread water.
"Take a shot at him!" advised some one.
"Take a shot at him!" suggested someone.
Joe let himself sink beneath the surface and hardly had he gone beneath the waves than he heard the muffled report of a revolver and a splash near by. He swam beneath the water until his lungs were almost bursting. Then, when he could stand it no longer, he came to the surface again. He was deep in the shadow of the ship and he had left the sailors behind, still watching the place where he had gone down.
Joe let himself sink below the surface, and barely had he submerged than he heard the muffled sound of a gunshot and a splash nearby. He swam underwater until his lungs were nearly bursting. Then, when he couldn’t hold it any longer, he resurfaced. He was deep in the shadow of the ship, and he had left the sailors behind, still watching the spot where he had gone down.
"I don't believe there was any one there," muttered one of the men in a disappointed tone.
"I don't think anyone was there," muttered one of the men in a disappointed tone.
"No, I guess they both got away," agreed another. "We scared 'em off, anyway."
"No, I guess they both got away," another person agreed. "We scared them off, anyway."
"Did they steal anything?"
"Did they take anything?"
"No. They didn't have time. I nailed the first one before he'd been on the ship long. I guess he just went on ahead to see if everything was clear."
"No. They didn't have time. I took care of the first one before he’d been on the ship for long. I guess he just went ahead to check if everything was clear."
"Aw, I'm goin' to bed. As long as we scared 'm off—"
"Aw, I’m going to bed. As long as we scared them off—"
The voices died away.
The voices faded away.
Relieved, Joe swam on. In a few minutes he caught sight of a dark shape ahead. It was the motorboat.
Relieved, Joe continued swimming. In a few minutes, he saw a dark shape up ahead. It was the motorboat.
Silently, he swam toward it until he had reached the side. A voice whispered:
Silently, he swam toward it until he reached the side. A voice whispered:
"Is that you, Joe?"
"Is that you, Joe?"
"Yes."
Yes.
Frank had already gained the boat. He now leaned over the side and grasped Joe's hand, helping his brother on board. Dripping wet, they both crouched in the boat.
Frank had already gotten into the boat. He leaned over the side and grabbed Joe's hand, pulling his brother on board. Soaked, they both crouched in the boat.
"Lucky they didn't see the Sleuth tied down here," whispered Frank. "I've been waiting here for you. I thought sure they had you."
"Lucky they didn't spot the Sleuth tied up here," Frank whispered. "I've been waiting for you. I really thought they had you."
"It was a close call. They mistook us for harbor thieves, eh?"
"It was a close call. They thought we were harbor thieves, right?"
"Yes."
"Yep."
"Did you see Chet?"
"Did you see Chet?"
"It wasn't Chet after all."
"It wasn't Chet, after all."
"No?"
"Nope?"
"It was the cabin boy. I peeped into the galley and there he was, peeling potatoes. But it was another fellow altogether. He looked like Chet. So I started back and I had just reached the side when a sailor grabbed me. He kept his hand over my mouth so I couldn't call out. Then he grabbed my arm and made me wave over the side."
"It was the cabin boy. I looked into the kitchen, and there he was, peeling potatoes. But it was another guy altogether. He looked like Chet. So I turned back, and I had just made it to the edge when a sailor grabbed me. He covered my mouth so I couldn’t shout. Then he took my arm and made me wave over the side."
"I thought you were motioning for me to come on up."
"I thought you were waving for me to come up."
"It was a bad mess. Oh, well, we're out of it, if we can only get away from here quick enough. I think we'd better wait for a while until the excitement dies down."
"It was a total disaster. Oh well, we're past it now, if we can just get out of here quickly enough. I think we should wait a bit until the excitement calms down."
The boys waited in the darkness. Gradually the schooner became silent once more. The sailors had evidently returned to the fore-castle. At length Frank judged that they could escape without trouble.
The boys waited in the dark. Slowly, the schooner fell silent again. The sailors had clearly gone back to the fore-castle. Finally, Frank decided that they could get away without any trouble.
Fortunately, the engine of the motorboat responded immediately, and although the noise of their departure was sufficient to arouse the ship, the Sleuth shot away into the gloom so swiftly that their escape was assured. When they were several hundred yards away they looked back and they could see the lights of lanterns moving about near the stern, but they knew that the sailors would not put out after them. Even if they had, the motorboat would not be overtaken.
Fortunately, the motorboat's engine fired up right away, and even though the sound of their departure was loud enough to stir the ship, the Sleuth sped off into the darkness so quickly that they were sure to escape. After they had traveled several hundred yards, they glanced back and saw the lights of lanterns flickering near the stern, but they knew the sailors wouldn't chase after them. Even if they did, the motorboat would be impossible to catch.
They circled about in the bay for some time and eventually put back into the harbor for the night. At first they were afraid that the men on the schooner might have given word to the harbor police to be on the lookout for them but, as Frank said, their consciences were clear and they had no doubt of their ability to explain the situation satisfactorily.
They circled the bay for a while and eventually returned to the harbor for the night. At first, they worried that the guys on the schooner might have tipped off the harbor police to watch for them, but as Frank said, their consciences were clear and they were confident they could explain the situation well.
However, they were not intercepted and, in Rock Harbor, they tied the motorboat up for the night, going to a near-by hotel, where a sleepy night clerk assigned them to a room.
However, they weren’t stopped and, in Rock Harbor, they docked the motorboat for the night, heading to a nearby hotel, where a tired night clerk assigned them to a room.
Early next morning they were away again.
Early the next morning, they were off again.
"Blacksnake Island isn't far away now," said Frank. "We should be there in a few hours at the most."
"Blacksnake Island isn't too far away now," Frank said. "We should get there in a few hours at most."
There was no sign of the other boys, but Frank and Joe decided that they would not wait, as the others would overtake them at the island or would meet them on their return. They had replenished their boat with oil and gasoline, they had again inspected their supply of provisions and were in every way in readiness for the last lap of their search.
There was no sign of the other boys, but Frank and Joe decided they wouldn’t wait, as the others would catch up with them at the island or meet them on their way back. They had refueled their boat with oil and gasoline, checked their supply of provisions again, and were fully prepared for the final part of their search.
It was mid-morning before they came within sight of Blacksnake Island. It lay not far from the coast, a low, lean, sinister stretch of swampy land, terminating in rocky bluffs on the seaward side. There was a dank, heavy growth of vegetation and the island seemed to steam in the summer heat.
It was mid-morning when they finally spotted Blacksnake Island. It was close to the coast, a low, narrow, ominous stretch of marshy land that ended in rocky cliffs on the seaward side. There was a thick, heavy cover of plants, and the island appeared to be steaming in the summer heat.
"Ugly looking place, isn't it?" remarked Frank, as the motorboat sped on its way.
"Looks pretty ugly, huh?" Frank said as the motorboat sped along.
The craft drew closer to the island. There was no sign of life. As they came nearer the boys could distinguish the fetid swamp land facing the coast, the still, silent trees that seemed to droop beneath the scorching sun and they felt a qualm of repulsion. Blacksnake Island was not an inviting place. It lived up to its name. It was a fit abode for serpents—not for human beings.
The boat approached the island. There was no sign of life. As they got closer, the boys could make out the disgusting swampy land along the coast, the still, silent trees that appeared to sag under the blazing sun, and they felt a wave of disgust. Blacksnake Island was not a welcoming place. It was true to its name. It was a suitable home for snakes—not for people.
When they were within half a mile of the island, they heard a vague but familiar sound.
When they were half a mile from the island, they heard a faint but familiar sound.
"Motorboat!" exclaimed Frank.
"Motorboat!" Frank exclaimed.
They listened. They could hear the sound of a motorboat, apparently approaching from the far side of the island. Frank spun the wheel.
They listened. They could hear the sound of a motorboat coming from the other side of the island. Frank turned the wheel.
"We'll head down the channel. No use letting them think we're bound for the island," he said. "It's not likely to have anything to do with our search, but it's best to play safe."
"We'll go down the channel. There's no point in letting them think we're headed for the island," he said. "It probably won't have anything to do with our search, but it's smart to take precautions."
The Sleuth changed its course, so that Blacksnake Island was now to one side, and the motorboat appeared to be heading on down the coast. The Hardy boys scanned the dark bank of land intently.
The Sleuth changed direction, making Blacksnake Island visible off to one side, and the motorboat seemed to be cruising down the coast. The Hardy boys carefully examined the dark stretch of land.
The other boat appeared in view at last. It emerged slowly around the lower point, poking its nose inquisitively out into the channel as though to assure itself that the way was clear. Then it picked up speed and came surging out toward the mainland. At that distance, Frank and Joe could not readily distinguish the features of the men in the craft, but they saw that there were two of them. Frank's eyes narrowed as he surveyed the boat.
The other boat finally came into sight. It slowly rounded the lower point, cautiously poking its nose into the channel as if to make sure the path was clear. Then it sped up and raced toward the mainland. From that distance, Frank and Joe couldn’t easily make out the details of the men in the boat, but they could see there were two of them. Frank narrowed his eyes as he looked over the boat.
"Seems to me I've seen it before," he remarked, picking up the binoculars. He raised them to his eyes and gazed long and earnestly at the speeding craft. Finally he handed the glasses to Joe. "What do you think?" he asked.
"Looks familiar to me," he said, grabbing the binoculars. He held them up to his eyes and stared intently at the fast-moving boat. After a moment, he passed the glasses to Joe. "What do you think?" he asked.
"Why, of course we've seen it before!" Joe exclaimed, after a brief inspection. "We saw that boat in Barmet Bay!"
"Of course we’ve seen it before!" Joe exclaimed after a quick look. "We saw that boat in Barmet Bay!"
Frank nodded.
Frank agreed.
"It's the same motorboat that chased us the afternoon of the storm!"
"It's the same motorboat that followed us the afternoon of the storm!"
CHAPTER XII
Into the Cave
Entering the Cave
Frank Hardy bent over the wheel.
Frank Hardy leaned over the wheel.
"I'm going closer," he said. "We'll make absolutely sure of this."
"I'm getting closer," he said. "We'll make sure of this for sure."
He altered the course of the boat so that it would intercept the other craft, at the speed they were going. Then he turned up his coat collar and drew his cap lower over his eyes.
He changed the direction of the boat to intercept the other craft, matching their speed. Then he turned up his coat collar and pulled his cap down lower over his eyes.
"If it's the same boat and if the same men are in it, we should be safe enough as long as they don't recognize us. They saw us that day, but they've never seen the Sleuth. We'll get as close to them as we can."
"If it's the same boat and the same guys are on it, we should be safe as long as they don't recognize us. They saw us that day, but they've never seen the Sleuth. We'll get as close to them as we can."
But the other craft had increased its speed. It was a powerful boat and a high curl of foam now rose from its bows as it plunged through the waves in a rapid flight toward the mainland in the distance. The roar of the engine was borne to the boys' ears on the breeze.
But the other boat had picked up speed. It was a strong vessel and a big spray of foam now shot up from its front as it raced through the waves toward the mainland in the distance. The sound of the engine reached the boys’ ears on the wind.
"We're going to lose them," muttered Frank. "They're too far ahead of us, unless we want to cut in and meet them right near the land."
"We're going to lose them," Frank said quietly. "They're too far ahead of us, unless we want to cut across and meet them close to the shore."
"That will only make them suspicious."
"That will just make them suspicious."
"Yes, I guess we'd better let them go."
"Yeah, I think we should just let them go."
Still, he did not give up the attempt just then, opening the throttle so that the Sleuth was racing along at top speed. But the other boat had the advantage, and cut across their course with a quarter of a mile to spare. Joe gazed through the binoculars, striving to identify the two men.
Still, he didn’t give up the chase just then, opening the throttle so that the Sleuth was speeding along at full throttle. But the other boat had the upper hand and cut across their path with a quarter of a mile to spare. Joe looked through the binoculars, trying to identify the two men.
"No use," he remarked, at last. "The fellow at the wheel is turned away from us, and the other man is bending down in the boat so I can't see his face."
"No use," he said finally. "The guy at the wheel is turned away from us, and the other man is leaning down in the boat, so I can't see his face."
"Is it the same boat?"
"Is it the same boat?"
"I can't be positive. But I think so. It certainly looks very much like it."
"I can't say for sure. But I think so. It definitely looks like it."
"I'm almost sure. Of course, there might be lots of other motorboats just like it—but I've got a hunch that it's the same craft."
"I'm pretty sure. Sure, there could be a lot of other motorboats that look just like it—but I've got a feeling it's the same one."
"What would it be doing at Blacksnake Island? There's no doubt that it came from there."
"What could it be doing at Blacksnake Island? There's no doubt it came from there."
"That's for us to find out. We'll let them go on to the mainland. Then we'll circle back and go up the other side of the island."
"That's for us to discover. We'll let them head over to the mainland. Then we'll loop back and go up the other side of the island."
In a short time the other craft disappeared from view, entering a small cove some distance down the coast, and Frank turned their boat about and headed toward Blacksnake Island again. They approached it from the seaward side and drew in as close to the island as they dared. The rocky bluffs were lonely and forbidding, seeming to offer no available landing place.
In no time, the other boat vanished from sight, heading into a small cove further down the coast, and Frank turned their boat around and steered toward Blacksnake Island again. They approached it from the ocean side and got as close to the island as they felt safe. The rocky cliffs looked desolate and unwelcoming, appearing to have no suitable landing spot.
"We'll go right around it. If Chet and Biff are there we should be able to see their boat or a fire or some sign of them," said Frank, half questioningly, to his brother.
"We'll go straight around it. If Chet and Biff are there, we should be able to see their boat or a fire or some sign of them," said Frank, half asking, to his brother.
"After seeing that other motorboat, I'm pretty sure we won't see any sign of them at all. I'm pretty well satisfied that those men kidnapped them and brought them here. And if they did, you may be sure they'll be well hidden."
"After seeing that other motorboat, I'm pretty sure we won't see any signs of them at all. I'm pretty convinced that those guys kidnapped them and brought them here. And if they did, you can bet they'll be well hidden."
"We'll circle the island anyway, and if we don't see anything we'll land and make a search of the place."
"We'll still circle the island, and if we don't find anything, we'll land and search the area."
But making a circuit of the island took longer than the boys expected. Blacksnake Island was bigger than it had first appeared. It was almost a mile in length, and correspondingly wide—a great, swampy tract of forbidding marsh at one end, rising to higher ground and desolate rocks at the other. On the swampy side there were sinister little creeks, dead bushes half inundated, logs floating about in the black water. Frank and Joe caught glimpses of triangular black heads forging slowly through the water here and there.
But exploring the island took longer than the boys thought it would. Blacksnake Island was bigger than it first looked. It was almost a mile long and correspondingly wide—a vast, swampy area of intimidating marsh on one end, rising to higher ground and desolate rocks on the other. On the swampy side, there were eerie little creeks, half-submerged dead bushes, and logs drifting around in the dark water. Frank and Joe spotted triangular black heads moving slowly through the water here and there.
"The blacksnakes!" Frank exclaimed.
"The blacksnakes!" Frank shouted.
Once the motorboat passed within a few yards of one of these black reptiles. Fascinated, the boys watched the ugly black head that projected above the surface, and they could see the long, sinuous body writhing beneath the water as the snake swam toward the fetid marsh.
Once the motorboat got a few yards away from one of these black reptiles, the boys were captivated. They observed the ugly black head sticking out above the surface, and they could see the long, twisting body moving beneath the water as the snake swam toward the stinky marsh.
"There must be hundreds of them on that island."
"There must be hundreds of them on that island."
"They're dangerous, too. I've read about them. A bite from one of them means your finish."
"They're dangerous, too. I've read about them. A bite from one of them means you're done for."
There were fewer snakes on the rocky side of the island and, after they had made the circuit without seeing any sign of human life, the boys decided to make a landing.
There were fewer snakes on the rocky side of the island, and after they had gone around without seeing any sign of human life, the boys decided to land.
"Seeing that motorboat leaving here makes me believe some one is around," declared Frank. "I won't be satisfied until I find out for sure."
"Seeing that motorboat leave makes me think someone is nearby," Frank said. "I won't feel right until I find out for sure."
"We won't stay here all night?"
"We're not going to stay here all night, right?"
"It all depends. If we're satisfied that the island is deserted, we'll leave; but if we think we haven't searched thoroughly enough, we'll stay and hunt around again to-morrow. It'll take a few hours to give the place a thorough going-over."
"It all depends. If we're sure that the island is empty, we'll leave; but if we feel we haven't searched carefully enough, we'll stay and look around again tomorrow. It will take a few hours to really check the place out."
"How about the snakes? Won't it be dangerous staying here all night?"
"What about the snakes? Isn't it risky to stay here all night?"
"Oh, we'll find some place where they can't get at us. If the worst comes to the worst we can anchor the boat and stay in it."
"Oh, we'll find a spot where they can't reach us. If it really gets bad, we can just anchor the boat and stay on it."
This decided, after some search they discovered a small cove, well protected from the sea, that appeared to offer a good landing place. The cove had a narrow entrance between the rocks, but widened out into a small lagoon, with water deep enough to enable the boys to bring their boat up close to a wide shelf of rock. They anchored the Sleuth then clambered up onto the rock.
This settled, after some searching they found a small cove, well protected from the sea, that seemed to provide a good spot to land. The cove had a narrow entrance between the rocks but opened up into a small lagoon, with water deep enough for the boys to bring their boat right up to a broad shelf of rock. They anchored the Sleuth and then climbed up onto the rock.
"Feels good to stand on solid footing again," Joe commented.
"Feels good to be on solid ground again," Joe said.
"I'll say it does. Well, let's be starting. Which way shall we go? Is it to be north or south?"
"I would say it does. So, let’s get going. Which way should we head? Is it going to be north or south?"
"It doesn't matter much. To start with, we'll nose around among these rocks for a while."
"It doesn't matter much. To begin with, we'll explore these rocks for a bit."
The sun blazed on the bare crags as the boys picked their way over the rocks and boulders. Away in the interior they could see the waving tops of trees in the steaming marsh, but for the time being they contented themselves with exploring the rocky end of the island. It was quite barren and it appeared that no human being had ever set foot upon the place.
The sun blazed on the bare cliffs as the boys carefully made their way over the rocks and boulders. In the distance, they could see the swaying tops of trees in the steamy marsh, but for now, they were satisfied with exploring the rocky end of the island. It was completely barren, and it seemed like no one had ever stepped foot in this place.
"You can't blame them, either," said Frank, when Joe had remarked on this fact. "It's certainly not a place where I'd care to build my happy home."
"You can't blame them, either," Frank said when Joe pointed this out. "It's definitely not a place where I'd want to build my happy home."
After about an hour of desultory search they came upon something that proved conclusively that human beings had indeed been there before them—and not long previously, at that. Charred embers and a crude fireplace built of rocks in a little hollow told the boys that someone had preceded them.
After about an hour of aimless searching, they stumbled upon something that clearly showed humans had been there before them—and not too long ago, either. Charred embers and a rough fireplace made of rocks in a small hollow indicated to the boys that someone had been there ahead of them.
"We're on the track of something," declared Frank, as he examined the remains of the fire. "This blaze was built here not long ago. Some one has camped here." He circled the rock, which dipped toward a patch of undergrowth and luxuriant grass. "And here's a trail!" he exclaimed.
"We're onto something," Frank said as he looked at the remnants of the fire. "This fire was built here recently. Someone has camped here." He walked around the rock, which sloped down to a patch of bushes and lush grass. "And here's a trail!" he shouted.
It was merely a faint depression in the deep grass, but it proved that more than one person had passed that way before. The trail wound along through the verdure, away from the shore, leading toward the interior of the island.
It was just a slight dip in the thick grass, but it showed that more than one person had walked this way before. The path meandered through the greenery, moving away from the shore and heading into the island’s interior.
"Well, if some one else has gone this way, we can follow the path, too," Joe remarked. "Got your gun?"
"Well, if someone else has taken this route, we can follow it as well," Joe said. "Got your gun?"
"Yes." Frank patted his hip. Both boys had provided themselves with revolvers before leaving home. They were not adept with fire-arms, but the nature of their mission had prompted them to come prepared for any emergency. Fenton Hardy had a collection of weapons in his study, all trophies of his various cases, and the Hardy boys had each taken a small and efficient-looking automatic pistol for protection.
"Yes." Frank patted his side. Both boys had gotten revolvers before they left home. They weren’t skilled with guns, but the nature of their mission had pushed them to be ready for anything. Fenton Hardy had a bunch of weapons in his study, all trophies from his different cases, and the Hardy boys had each grabbed a small and sleek-looking automatic pistol for protection.
They struck out along the faint trail, the grass rustling about their feet. The green thicket loomed ominously before them and the heat became more intense.
They set off along the faint trail, the grass rustling around their feet. The green thicket loomed threateningly ahead of them and the heat grew more intense.
Frank was striding along in advance, gazing at the thicket ahead, when he suddenly came aware of a disturbance in the grass almost at his feet. Some sixth sense warned him of danger. That strange tickling of the spine, man's instinctive reaction to the presence of a hidden peril, made him look down.
Frank was walking ahead, looking at the bushes in front of him, when he suddenly noticed something moving in the grass right by his feet. Some gut feeling warned him of danger. That familiar shiver down his spine, a natural response to the threat of something unknown, made him glance down.
Immediately in front of him lay a huge blacksnake!
Immediately in front of him was a huge black snake!
The reptile was easily five feet in length, and as the boy leaped back he could hear a prolonged hissing. The snake writhed and twisted, and its head came into view from amid the grass, the red tongue flickering wickedly.
The reptile was easily five feet long, and as the boy jumped back, he could hear a long hiss. The snake coiled and contorted, and its head emerged from the grass, the red tongue flicking menacingly.
Frank saw that the snake was coming directly at him. He leaped to one side, at the same time snatching his automatic from his hip pocket. He had not time to aim, but he pressed the trigger and pumped two shots in the direction of the reptile.
Frank saw the snake heading straight for him. He jumped to the side, grabbing his gun from his hip pocket at the same time. He didn't have time to aim, but he pulled the trigger and fired two shots in the snake's direction.
The snake stopped dead, then swiftly began to coil itself up in readiness to strike.
The snake froze, then quickly started to coil up, ready to attack.
Not a word had been spoken. Frank had blundered back against Joe, who was unaware of the cause of his brother's sudden alarm. He quickly grasped the situation, however, and looked about him.
Not a word had been said. Frank had stumbled back against Joe, who didn't know why his brother was suddenly alarmed. He quickly figured out what was happening and looked around.
Close at hand, almost hidden by the grass, was a heavy stick. He bent and quickly snatched it up.
Close by, nearly obscured by the grass, was a heavy stick. He bent down and quickly picked it up.
"Quick!" said Frank, taking it from him.
"Quick!" Frank said, grabbing it from him.
He brandished the stick and brought it down with terrific force upon the snake. The first blow did not kill the reptile, although it rendered it helpless. The hissing continued, the scarlet tongue flickered like flame. Then the boy brought the stick down again. It crushed in the evil black head. A few spasmodic wriggles, and the snake lay still.
He swung the stick and brought it down hard on the snake. The first hit didn’t kill it, but it left the reptile powerless. The hissing went on, and its red tongue flicked out like a flame. Then the boy struck again. He crushed the wicked black head. There were a few convulsive movements, and then the snake was still.
"Whew!" breathed Frank, stepping back. "What a big brute he is!"
"Whew!" Frank said, stepping back. "What a huge guy he is!"
The boys inspected the reptile more closely, repressing a shiver of repulsion as they saw the sinuous, scaly body lying there in the grass.
The boys examined the reptile more closely, holding back a shiver of disgust as they looked at the smooth, scaly body lying there in the grass.
"We'd better get away from here. Path or no path. Where there's one snake there are more. Its mate is probably close by."
"We should get out of here. Path or no path. Where there's one snake, there are more. Its partner is probably nearby."
The boys retreated until they gained the comparative safety of the rocks.
The boys backed away until they reached the relative safety of the rocks.
"It's lucky for me you saw that stick," declared Frank. "He was coming right for me, and the automatic wasn't much use. He was moving so quickly I couldn't have shot him. He was stirred up and angry, too. I guess I must have disturbed his morning nap."
"It's lucky you noticed that stick," Frank said. "He was heading straight for me, and the gun wasn't much help. He was moving so fast I couldn't have shot him. He was agitated and mad, too. I guess I must have interrupted his morning nap."
"We'll stick to the rocks for a while, I guess. It's time enough to go nosing around the interior when we've finished with the outside of the island."
"We'll stay along the rocks for a bit, I suppose. We'll have plenty of time to explore the inside once we're done with the outside of the island."
The boys descended a rocky slope that led into a small bay protected from the sea by a black reef. There were no snakes in sight as they skirted the shore, and then they came upon a well-beaten path leading up the side of a cliff.
The boys went down a rocky slope that led to a small bay sheltered from the sea by a dark reef. There were no snakes in sight as they stayed close to the shore, and then they found a well-trodden path that went up the side of a cliff.
"By the look of this path, the island isn't as deserted as it looks," Frank commented. "Perhaps we'll have better luck following it."
"Looking at this path, the island seems less deserted than it appears," Frank said. "Maybe we'll have better luck if we follow it."
The path wound about among the rocks, seemingly in an aimless fashion, now diverging toward the shore, now bringing them farther inland. They followed it doggedly, however, convinced that it must have an ending somewhere, and that the termination would give them some clue as to the people who had used the trail before.
The path twisted among the rocks in an aimless way, sometimes leading toward the shore and other times taking them further inland. They kept following it determinedly, believing that it had to lead somewhere and that the end would provide some insight into the people who had traveled this path before.
The trail at length brought them in front of a huge black opening in the rocks. It was a cave, over twelve feet in height, dark, gloomy and forbidding.
The path eventually led them to a massive black opening in the rocks. It was a cave, over twelve feet tall, dark, gloomy, and unwelcoming.
"Now what?" asked Joe.
"What's next?" asked Joe.
Frank glanced at his brother.
Frank looked at his brother.
"Shall we go in?"
"Should we go in?"
"You can't scare me. If you'll go, I'll go."
"You can't scare me. If you go, I'll go."
"The trail leads here. Other people must have gone in here. If they can do it, so can we."
"The trail leads here. Others must have come through here. If they can do it, so can we."
"Lead on!"
"Go ahead!"
Frank picked up a heavy stick lying among the rocks near the entrance to the cave. "You never know when we'll run into snakes around here," he remarked. "It's just as well to be ready for them."
Frank picked up a heavy stick that was lying among the rocks near the cave entrance. "You never know when we're going to run into snakes around here," he said. "It's good to be prepared for them."
Joe hunted around until he, too, found a club that would be serviceable in the event of their encountering more of the reptiles. He patted his hip to make sure that the automatic was still in his pocket.
Joe searched around until he found a club that would work in case they ran into more of the reptiles. He checked his hip to make sure the gun was still in his pocket.
"All set?"
"Ready to go?"
"All set."
"Ready to go."
Frank stepped forward and entered the mouth of the cave. Joe followed at his heels.
Frank stepped forward and walked into the cave. Joe followed right behind him.
For several yards the cave was illuminated by the light from outside, but as they went on the gloom became deeper until at length they were faced by impenetrable darkness. Frank had brought with him a pocket flashlight and he switched it on. A wide ring of light shone before them, showing the damp rock walls ahead.
For several yards, the cave was lit by the light from outside, but as they moved further in, the darkness grew deeper until they were eventually surrounded by complete blackness. Frank had brought a pocket flashlight, and he turned it on. A wide beam of light illuminated the damp rock walls ahead of them.
They stepped forward cautiously. The floor of the cave sloped upward, but the great opening in the rock was of such extent that the ceiling was scarcely visible above in the light of the flash.
They moved forward carefully. The cave floor angled upward, but the massive opening in the rock was so large that the ceiling was barely visible above in the light of the flash.
"I don't know where we're going, but we're on our way," said Frank, as they toiled on up over the rough rocks. His voice awakened tumultuous echoes that were flung back and forth from the massive walls.
"I don't know where we're headed, but we're making progress," said Frank as they climbed over the rough rocks. His voice stirred up chaotic echoes that bounced off the massive walls.
The flashlight showed him at length a place where the floor dipped abruptly to a steep slope, although there was still a wide ledge at the top, sufficiently wide for them to proceed. He turned the light down the slope but could see nothing save inky blackness.
The flashlight finally revealed a spot where the floor suddenly dropped to a steep slope, although there was still a broad ledge at the top, wide enough for them to move forward. He aimed the light down the slope but could see nothing except pure darkness.
The boys proceeded slowly along the ledge.
The boys walked slowly along the ledge.
There were numerous pebbles and small rocks underfoot. It was difficult to see these, because Frank was obliged to keep the flashlight centered on the trail ahead, and they were obliged to proceed cautiously in order to keep their footing. This circumstance led to disaster.
There were lots of pebbles and small rocks on the ground. It was hard to see them because Frank had to keep the flashlight focused on the path ahead, and they had to move carefully to maintain their balance. This situation resulted in disaster.
Unwittingly, Frank stepped on a small rock that rolled suddenly beneath his foot. He staggered, stepped on another rock that slipped to one side and then he sprawled forward, the flashlight spinning from his hand.
Unknowingly, Frank stepped on a small rock that suddenly rolled under his foot. He stumbled, stepped on another rock that shifted to the side, and then he fell forward, the flashlight spinning out of his hand.
The light clattered among the rocks ahead and darkness fell about them.
The light rattled among the rocks up ahead, and darkness closed in around them.
"What's the matter?" asked Joe, alarmed.
"What's wrong?" Joe asked, worried.
"It's all right. I just slipped." Frank got to his feet. "I lost the light. It fell down here somewhere. Hang onto the back of my coat and I'll go ahead and get it."
"It's fine. I just tripped." Frank stood up. "I dropped the light. It must be down here somewhere. Hold onto the back of my coat, and I'll go ahead and find it."
Joe caught at the back of his coat and Frank slowly felt his way forward in the deep blackness.
Joe grabbed the back of his coat, and Frank carefully moved forward in the pitch black.
Suddenly he lurched ahead, his feet sinking in a treacherous mass of sand and gravel. Wildly, he strove to retain his footing, but the effort was in vain. He felt himself slipping and, as he uttered an instinctive cry of warning to Joe, he was flung into space.
Suddenly, he lunged forward, his feet sinking into a dangerous mix of sand and gravel. Desperately, he tried to keep his balance, but it was pointless. He felt himself falling, and as he shouted a warning to Joe, he was thrown into the air.
Joe, who had been clinging to Frank's coat, was wrenched to one side. He stepped forward, grasping for his brother, then he, too, went hurtling into the darkness.
Joe, who had been holding onto Frank's coat, was yanked to one side. He stepped forward, reaching for his brother, and then he, too, was thrown into the darkness.
They pitched down amid a clattering of rocks and pebbles. Then, with an icy shock, they plunged into a deep pool of water!
They landed amidst a clattering of rocks and pebbles. Then, with a chilling surprise, they plunged into a deep pool of water!
CHAPTER XIII
The Four Men
The Four Guys
Profound darkness enveloped the Hardy boys.
Profound darkness surrounded the Hardy boys.
The blackness of the icy pool was no blacker than the darkness of the air above.
The darkness of the icy pool was no darker than the blackness of the air above.
Frank rose spluttering to the surface, unharmed by his fall, and as he splashed about, his first thought was for his brother.
Frank surfaced, coughing up water but unharmed by his fall, and as he splashed around, his first thought was of his brother.
"Joe!" he shouted. "Joe!"
"Joe!" he called. "Joe!"
There was no answer except from the echoes, and the rocks shouted mockingly back at him. "Joe.... Joe.... Joe...." growing fainter and fainter until they died away to a mere whisper.
There was no reply except for the echoes, and the rocks shouted back at him mockingly. "Joe.... Joe.... Joe...." growing quieter and quieter until they faded away to a soft whisper.
Then there was a splashing almost at his side, as his brother rose to the surface of the pool and struck out blindly.
Then there was a splash right next to him as his brother surfaced from the pool and started swimming aimlessly.
"Are you all right?" called Frank.
"Are you good?" called Frank.
"I'm all right!" gasped Joe.
"I'm okay!" gasped Joe.
"Keep beside me. We'll try to find the edge of this pool."
"Stay close to me. We'll see if we can find the edge of this pool."
Frank swam forward, groping ahead, until at length his fingers touched the smooth rock at the water's edge. But the rock was almost vertical and it was so smooth and slippery that there was no hope of a handhold. He swam to one side, feeling the rock as he went. Despair seized him as he found that the rock still rose steeply above. If they had fallen into a circular pit they were doomed.
Frank swam ahead, reaching out until his fingers finally brushed against the smooth rock at the water's edge. But the rock was nearly vertical, so smooth and slippery that there was no chance of grabbing on. He swam to one side, feeling along the rock as he went. Despair hit him as he realized that the rock continued to rise steeply above. If they had fallen into a circular pit, they were doomed.
In pitch darkness, then, they battled their way about the border of the pool until at length Frank's searching fingers closed about a rocky projection that seemed to indicate a change in the surface of the cliff.
In complete darkness, they struggled to navigate around the edge of the pool until finally, Frank's probing fingers found a rocky outcrop that felt like a change in the cliff's surface.
He was right. There was a small ledge at this point, and he was able to drag himself up on it. There was room enough for both of them, and he turned and grasped Joe's hand, dragging him up on the rock after him. They crouched there in dripping clothes, breathing heavily after their exertion. Presently Frank began to grope upward, still examining the surface of the cliff.
He was right. There was a small ledge at this point, and he managed to pull himself up onto it. There was enough space for both of them, and he turned to grab Joe's hand, pulling him up onto the rock with him. They crouched there in soaking wet clothes, breathing heavily after their effort. Soon, Frank started to feel around upward, still checking the surface of the cliff.
He found that it sloped gradually, and that the surface was rough, with a number of foot-holds.
He noticed that it sloped gently and that the surface was uneven, with several foot-holds.
"I think we can climb it," he told Joe. "It's mighty dark, but if we can ever get back on the main ledge again we'll be all right." He said this because he judged that the place that they had found was on the side of the pool that lay toward the entrance of the cave. If they had emerged on the other side and had regained the ledge they would have been in another dilemma, because they might not have been able to cross the treacherous breach in the trail that had proved Frank's downfall.
"I think we can climb it," he said to Joe. "It's really dark, but if we can make it back to the main ledge, we'll be fine." He said this because he figured the spot they had found was on the side of the pool that faced the entrance of the cave. If they had ended up on the other side and managed to get back to the ledge, they would have faced another problem, since they might not have been able to cross the dangerous gap in the trail that had caused Frank's downfall.
Frank groped his way up the face of the slope. He dug his foot against the first ledge and raised himself, clutching at a projection in the rock above. Then, scrambling for a further foothold, he managed to draw himself up. Here the slope became even more gradual and by pressing himself close against the rock, he was able to crawl on up, until at length he came to a flat shelf of rock that he recognized as the main ledge that they had followed from the entrance to the cave.
Frank felt his way up the slope. He pushed his foot against the first ledge and pulled himself up, grabbing onto a rock outcropping above. Then, scrambling for another foothold, he managed to lift himself higher. Here, the slope became more gradual, and by pressing himself against the rock, he was able to crawl up until he finally reached a flat shelf of rock that he recognized as the main ledge they had followed from the cave entrance.
"I'm up!" he shouted back to Joe, and then he heard a scraping on the rocks, as his brother also began the ascent.
"I'm up!" he shouted back to Joe, and then he heard a scraping sound on the rocks as his brother started climbing up too.
Joe made the climb without difficulty and in a short time rejoined his brother on the ledge.
Joe climbed up easily and soon rejoined his brother on the ledge.
"I guess we'd better go back," Frank said. "This cave seems to lead to nothing but trouble. We're better off out in the open."
"I think we should head back," Frank said. "This cave doesn't seem to lead anywhere good. We'd be better off outside."
"Is the flashlight lost?"
"Did we lose the flashlight?"
"Yes. I think it smashed when it fell against the rocks. Anyway, I'm not going back to look for it in the dark. That ledge was treacherous enough even when we had the light."
"Yeah. I think it broke when it hit the rocks. Either way, I'm not going back to search for it in the dark. That ledge was dangerous enough even when we had the light."
Step by step, proceeding cautiously, the Hardy boys made their way back toward the entrance to the cave. Their return journey was not so precarious because the entrance to the cave shone before them as a vague gray light and guided them on their way.
Step by step, moving carefully, the Hardy boys made their way back to the entrance of the cave. Their return journey was less risky because the entrance to the cave glimmered in front of them as a faint gray light, guiding them along their path.
They reached the entrance at last and again stepped out into the bright sunlight. At first they were dazzled, after the blackness of the cave.
They finally reached the entrance and stepped back into the bright sunlight. At first, they were blinded after the darkness of the cave.
"First of all, we're going to dry our clothes," declared Frank, as he hunted around among the rocks for sticks that might serve for firewood. "I'm soaking wet."
"First of all, we’re going to dry our clothes," Frank said while searching among the rocks for sticks to use as firewood. "I'm soaked."
"Me too. Thank goodness, it's warm out here."
"Same here. Thank goodness it's warm out here."
"I'm glad I carried the matches in this waterproof case, or we'd have been out of luck."
"I'm glad I brought the matches in this waterproof case, or we would have been out of luck."
They managed to find enough sticks and dry leaves to enable them to start a fire and soon they were standing about in various stages of undress, drying their soaked garments before the blaze. This occupied some time and it was mid-afternoon before they were able to proceed. They had taken some sandwiches with them from the boat and they made a lunch of these while their clothes were drying so that eventually, when they donned their garments again, they were warm, fed and contented.
They found enough sticks and dry leaves to start a fire, and soon they were standing around in different stages of undress, drying their soaked clothes by the flames. This took a while, and by mid-afternoon, they were ready to move on. They had brought some sandwiches from the boat, so they made a lunch out of those while their clothes dried, leaving them warm, fed, and content when they put their clothes back on.
"Where do we go from here?" inquired Joe.
"Where do we go from here?" asked Joe.
"Anywhere but into caves," his brother replied. "I think we might as well follow along the shore again. One thing is certain—there have been people on this island, and not long ago at that. Why—"
"Anywhere but into caves," his brother replied. "I think we might as well stick to the shore again. One thing is for sure—there have been people on this island, and not too long ago either. Why—"
Suddenly he stopped.
He stopped suddenly.
"Listen."
"Listen up."
They remained quiet. Frank had heard what seemed to him like a distant shout, and as they listened he heard it again. It was a faint call that echoed among the rocks far ahead of them.
They stayed silent. Frank had heard what sounded like a distant shout, and as they listened, he heard it again. It was a faint call that echoed among the rocks far in front of them.
The boys looked at one another. Frank pressed his fingers against his lips as a caution to remain silent. Then, from among the rocks above them they heard another shout, clearer this time, evidently in response to the one they had first heard. The first shout was again repeated; then silence fell.
The boys glanced at each other. Frank put his fingers to his lips as a signal to stay quiet. Then, from the rocks above them, they heard another shout, clearer this time, obviously in reply to the first one they heard. The first shout echoed again; then silence settled in.
"That proves it," said Frank quietly. "There are people on this island."
"That proves it," Frank said softly. "There are people on this island."
"They're calling to each other."
"They're calling to one another."
"Sounded like that."
"Sounds like that."
"We'll head down in the direction of the place that first shout came from. It was some one calling to some one else back up here among the rocks."
"We'll go down toward where that shout came from. Someone was calling to someone else up here among the rocks."
They went on in the direction from which the first call had been heard. For over ten minutes they proceeded carefully among the rocks until finally Frank caught sight of a curling column of smoke against the sky.
They moved toward the place where they had first heard the call. For over ten minutes, they navigated cautiously among the rocks until finally, Frank spotted a twisting column of smoke against the sky.
"Campfire," he said.
"Campfire," he said.
To approach this fire it was necessary for them to change their course and go up through the shrubbery toward higher ground. They moved slowly because they did not want to be seen until they had ascertained whether the strangers were friends or foes—and they were strongly suspicious that it might prove to be the latter.
To get closer to the fire, they had to change their direction and move through the bushes toward higher ground. They moved slowly because they didn’t want to be spotted until they figured out whether the people were friends or enemies—and they were quite suspicious that it might be the latter.
A moving object ahead caught Frank's eye and he crouched down in the bushes, motioning to Joe. They peeped through the undergrowth and before them they could see a flat surface of rock in the center of which a fire had been built. Three men were about the fire. Two of these were sprawled in the grass at the verge of the rock while one was standing beside the fire stirring the contents of a pot that hung from a tripod above the blaze. It was this man that had first caught Frank's eye.
A moving object ahead caught Frank's attention, and he crouched down in the bushes, signaling to Joe. They peeked through the underbrush and saw a flat rock surface with a fire in the center. Three men were gathered around the fire. Two of them were lying in the grass at the edge of the rock, while one stood by the fire, stirring the contents of a pot hanging from a tripod over the flames. It was this man who had first caught Frank's eye.
The strangers had not noticed the Hardy boys' approach.
The strangers hadn’t seen the Hardy boys coming.
"We'll crawl up closer," whispered Joe.
"We'll get closer," Joe whispered.
Frank nodded.
Frank agreed.
They began to make their way quietly forward through the bushes. Frank, who was in the lead, kept a wary eye for snakes and also kept watching the three men about the fire. The boys' approach demanded the utmost caution.
They started to move quietly through the bushes. Frank, who was in the lead, kept a close eye out for snakes and also watched the three men around the fire. The boys had to be extremely careful as they approached.
Foot by foot they made their way closer to the trio about the blaze until at last they were so close that they could distinguish what the men were saying. Also, they could distinguish the faces of the speakers.
Foot by foot, they moved closer to the trio by the fire until they were close enough to hear what the men were saying. They could also see the faces of the speakers.
They were the three men who had been in the motorboat the day of the storm in Barmet Bay!
They were the three guys who had been in the motorboat on the day of the storm in Barmet Bay!
Although the boys had expected this, they could scarcely restrain murmurs of astonishment. This proved definitely that the motorboat they had seen that morning was the same motorboat that had followed them in Barmet Bay.
Although the boys had anticipated this, they could hardly hold back their gasps of surprise. This confirmed for sure that the motorboat they had spotted that morning was the same one that had tracked them in Barmet Bay.
The boys listened.
The guys listened.
"No answer to that letter yet, is there?" one man was asking.
"No answer to that letter yet, right?" one man was asking.
The fellow by the fire shook his head.
The guy by the fire shook his head.
"No answer yet. Oh, well, we can wait."
"No answer yet. Oh well, we can wait."
"We can't wait forever," grumbled the other. "I'm not keen on staying on this confounded island much longer."
"We can't wait forever," complained the other. "I'm not thrilled about staying on this annoying island much longer."
"There's lots worse places," remarked the man at his side significantly.
"There's a lot worse places," said the man next to him meaningfully.
"What do you mean?"
"What do you mean?"
"Jail."
"Prison."
"Oh, I suppose so. But I wish this business would get cleared up. I want to get back to the city and have a good time."
"Oh, I guess so. But I really wish this situation would get resolved. I want to go back to the city and enjoy myself."
"We all want to get back. But there's no use rushing things," said the man standing by the fire. "We'll be well paid for our waiting."
"We all want to get back. But there's no point in rushing things," said the man standing by the fire. "We'll be well compensated for our patience."
"Do you think we've made a mistake? I tell you, it's been worrying me. If we've gummed up this job by doing a trick like that I'll never forgive myself."
"Do you think we messed up? I'm really worried about it. If we've messed up this job by pulling a stunt like that, I’ll never forgive myself."
"No—there's no mistake. Don't worry about that," scoffed the man at the fire. "Didn't we look things over mighty careful-like before we started?"
"No—there's no mistake. Don't worry about it," laughed the man by the fire. "Didn't we check everything really thoroughly before we started?"
"Yes," admitted the other slowly. "But they keep harpin' on that tune all the time and I'm beginnin' to think there may be somethin' in it."
"Yeah," the other person admitted slowly. "But they keep going on about that all the time, and I'm starting to think there might be something to it."
"Where's Red?" demanded the third man. "Didn't you call him?"
"Where's Red?" asked the third man. "Did you call him?"
"Yeah, I called him. This is him now. He's comin' down from the grove."
"Yeah, I called him. He's on his way now. He's coming down from the grove."
Suddenly Frank clutched his brother by the arm and flattened himself against the ground. A footstep sounded immediately behind them. Twigs crackled.
Suddenly, Frank grabbed his brother's arm and pressed himself against the ground. A footstep sounded right behind them. Twigs snapped.
Unobserved, a man had approached to within a few feet back of them, striding silently through the deep grass.
Unnoticed, a man had come within a few feet behind them, walking quietly through the tall grass.
The boys remained motionless, wondering if they had been seen. For a breathless second they lay rigid in the bushes, then the footsteps passed by within a few inches of Frank's outstretched hand. They heard his deep voice:
The boys stayed completely still, wondering if anyone had spotted them. For a tense second, they were frozen in the bushes, then the footsteps went by just inches from Frank's outstretched hand. They heard his deep voice:
"When did you all get back?"
"When did you guys get back?"
"Just a few minutes ago," replied the man at the fire. "We left the boat in the bay. Anything new?"
"Just a few minutes ago," replied the man by the fire. "We left the boat in the bay. Is there anything new?"
"Nothing new," growled the deep voice. "The prisoners are still safe and sound." One of the other men chuckled.
"Nothing new," growled the deep voice. "The prisoners are still safe and sound." One of the other men laughed.
"Have they quieted down yet?"
"Have they calmed down yet?"
"No!" growled the newcomer. "They kicked up a big fuss all the time you were away. Still keep sayin' we've made a mistake."
"No!" the newcomer growled. "They made a huge deal about it the whole time you were gone. They're still saying we've messed up."
"Mistake, nothin'!" the man by the fire declared. "There's been no mistake about this job! They can't fool me!"
"Mistake, nothing!" the man by the fire said. "There's been no mistake about this job! They can't trick me!"
CHAPTER XIV
The Storm
The Storm
The four men had dinner about the campfire and when the meal was over the man they called Red got up.
The four men had dinner around the campfire, and when they finished eating, the guy they called Red stood up.
"May as well go back to the cave," he remarked. "It's cooler than out here."
"May as well head back to the cave," he said. "It's cooler in there than it is out here."
"It's hot enough to put a man to sleep out on these rocks," said one of the others. "Yeah, let's go on up to the cave."
"It's so hot that a guy could easily doze off on these rocks," said one of the others. "Yeah, let's head up to the cave."
"I don't like the idea of stayin' too close to the cave," growled the man who had been by the fire. "If anybody comes around here and should find us they'll have to look some to find them as long as we're not near the cave, see?"
"I don't like the idea of staying too close to the cave," growled the man who had been by the fire. "If anyone comes around here and finds us, they'll have to search a bit to find them as long as we're not near the cave, got it?"
"That's all right, Pete," retorted Red. "If any one comes on this island we'll know of it in lots of time to clear away from the cave. We may as well keep cool."
"That's fine, Pete," Red shot back. "If anyone shows up on this island, we'll have plenty of time to get away from the cave. We might as well stay calm."
There was a grumbled assent from Pete, and then the Hardy boys heard sounds of receding footsteps as the quartette strode off through the grass. They waited until the men were out of earshot, then peered through the undergrowth.
There was a murmured agreement from Pete, and then the Hardy boys heard the sound of footsteps fading away as the group walked off through the grass. They waited until the men were out of earshot, then looked through the bushes.
"Shall we follow them?" asked Joe eagerly.
"Should we follow them?" Joe asked eagerly.
"You bet we will! I want to know where this cave is that they're talking about. And I want to know who the prisoners are that they mentioned."
"You bet we will! I want to know where this cave is that they're talking about. And I want to know who the prisoners are that they mentioned."
"Do you think it really could be Chet and Biff?"
"Do you really think it could be Chet and Biff?"
"I'm almost sure it is. Didn't you hear the fellow saying that the prisoners kept insisting that there'd been a mistake? We've figured it out right all along. They captured Chet and Biff in mistake for us."
"I'm pretty sure it is. Didn't you hear the guy say that the prisoners kept insisting there was a mistake? We’ve had this figured out all along. They captured Chet and Biff by mistake, thinking they were us."
The Hardy boys began moving through the undergrowth on the trail of the four men. They crouched down and kept to the shelter of the bushes so that they were able to proceed at a good rate of speed without exposing themselves to view.
The Hardy boys started making their way through the underbrush, following the trail of the four men. They crouched down and stayed hidden in the bushes, allowing them to move quickly without being seen.
"If we can only get into the cave and get Chet and Biff free!" exclaimed Joe.
"If we can just get into the cave and rescue Chet and Biff!" exclaimed Joe.
"It won't be any too easy. They seem to be guarding them pretty closely. First of all, we've got to be certain that it's them."
"It won't be very easy. They seem to be keeping a close watch on them. First of all, we need to make sure it's really them."
"I don't think there's any doubt of that. Everything hangs together too well. If we could get them out we could run for the boat and get them away to the mainland."
"I don't think there's any doubt about that. Everything fits together too perfectly. If we could get them out, we could run to the boat and take them to the mainland."
"That's what we'll have to plan on. But the main thing is to find this cave."
"That's what we'll need to plan for. But the most important thing is to find this cave."
"Yes, of course."
"Definitely."
The four men in the lead had entered the outskirts of a small grove toward the center of the island. Frank could just see the head and shoulders of the last man disappearing into the woods. He marked the spot where the fellow had entered the grove and the Hardy boys made toward it. They found it comparatively easy to follow the trail, for the others had beaten down the grass and twigs in passing, and in a few minutes they had reached the grove.
The four men in the front had reached the edge of a small grove in the center of the island. Frank could just see the head and shoulders of the last man fading into the trees. He noted where the guy had gone in, and the Hardy boys headed that way. They found it pretty easy to follow the path since the others had trampled the grass and twigs as they went through, and in just a few minutes, they arrived at the grove.
"Go slow," cautioned Frank, as they entered the shadow of the trees. "They may have seen us crossing the clearing."
"Go slow," Frank warned as they stepped into the shade of the trees. "They might have seen us cross the clearing."
They listened for a moment. They could hear the crashing of branches and the crackling of twigs, the distant hum of voices, as the quartette continued through the woods, so they went ahead.
They listened for a moment. They could hear branches breaking and twigs snapping, the faint buzz of voices, as the group continued through the woods, so they moved forward.
The wood was steaming hot and the ground was dank underfoot. The grass was long and the leaves of the trees drooped of their own weight. Once Frank saw a blacksnake scurrying away through the grass, but none of the serpents molested them. The path the boys followed was beaten down by the feet of the men ahead and they made easy progress until at length the sight of a clearing ahead warned them to again exercise caution.
The wood was steaming hot and the ground felt damp underfoot. The grass was tall, and the leaves of the trees hung heavily. Frank once spotted a black snake darting away through the grass, but none of the snakes bothered them. The path the boys followed was worn down by the footsteps of the men in front, and they made good progress until the sight of a clearing up ahead reminded them to be careful again.
They crept along through the trees and underbrush until the clearing came fully into view. It was at that part of the interior of the island where the swamp gave way to the rocks, and the grassy clearing led in a gradual slope to a high wall of rock, at the base of which was the mouth of a cave. As the Hardy boys watched, they could see the four men at the opening. One of the fellows, a tall, dark man, was mopping his brow with a handkerchief, while another, a man with a shock of red hair, was just going into the cavern. The other two had flung themselves down on the rocks in the shadow of some overhanging bushes.
They sneaked through the trees and underbrush until the clearing came into full view. It was at that part of the island where the swamp turned into rocks, and the grassy clearing sloped gently down to a tall rock wall, at the base of which was the entrance to a cave. As the Hardy boys observed, they could see four men at the opening. One guy, a tall, dark man, was wiping his forehead with a handkerchief, while another man with a messy shock of red hair was just entering the cave. The other two had thrown themselves onto the rocks in the shade of some overhanging bushes.
"So that's the cave!" exclaimed Frank.
"So that's the cave!" Frank exclaimed.
"I wonder if Chet and Biff are inside."
"I wonder if Chet and Biff are in there."
"Most likely. I wish we could get a little closer."
"Probably. I wish we could get a bit closer."
"Too dangerous. They can see any one coming into the clearing."
"Way too risky. They can spot anyone entering the clearing."
This was true. The cave had evidently been chosen not only for its possibilities as a shelter but for its defensive virtues as well. It was plainly the hangout of the gang.
This was true. The cave had clearly been selected not just for its potential as a shelter but also for its defensive features. It was obviously the hideout of the gang.
"We'll have our work cut out for us to get in there," muttered Frank. "The place is too much in the open. Our only chance is to wait until some of them go away."
"We're going to have a tough time getting in there," Frank murmured. "The place is too exposed. Our only shot is to wait until some of them leave."
"We might be able to sneak up closer when they're asleep."
"We might be able to get closer while they're sleeping."
"We'll try it. The only thing for us to do right now is wait until they're all asleep."
"We'll give it a shot. The only thing we can do right now is wait until they’re all asleep."
The boys settled themselves down in the bushes, prepared for a vigil until nightfall. It was now late in the afternoon, and when Frank glanced up at the sky he saw that clouds had gathered. The sunshine had gone, for a dense black cloud obscured the sun. The sultry and oppressive heat of the afternoon had evidently presaged a storm.
The boys made themselves comfortable in the bushes, ready for a watch until night. It was late afternoon, and when Frank looked up at the sky, he saw that clouds had formed. The sunshine was gone, hidden behind a thick black cloud. The muggy and oppressive heat of the afternoon clearly hinted at an approaching storm.
"Looks like rain."
"Looks like it's going to rain."
"It sure does," agreed Joe, looking up.
"It really does," Joe agreed, looking up.
As though in corroboration, there was an ominous rumble of thunder. The wind had died down. Every leaf, every blade of grass was still. The clouds were massing silently.
As if to confirm this, a menacing rumble of thunder echoed. The wind had stopped. Every leaf, every blade of grass was motionless. The clouds were gathering quietly.
However, the storm held off, and although the sky was overcast and threatening, twilight fell without rain. Frank and Joe, from their hiding place in the bushes, watched the four men moving aimlessly about the cave that afternoon. Two of them had remained inside the cave for a long time while the other pair chatted on the rocks outside.
However, the storm stayed away, and even though the sky was cloudy and menacing, twilight arrived without any rain. Frank and Joe, from their hiding spot in the bushes, observed the four men wandering around the cave that afternoon. Two of them had been inside the cave for quite a while while the other two were chatting on the rocks outside.
Night came at last. From the interior of the cave came the flicker of flames, and the Hardy boys knew that the gang was making a fire for the night.
Night finally arrived. From deep inside the cave, the flicker of flames could be seen, and the Hardy boys realized that the gang was starting a fire for the night.
The heat was still oppressive. Darkness fell without moon or stars.
The heat was still unbearable. Night came without a moon or stars.
"We'll soon be able to creep up on them now," said Frank. "If we can only get close enough to hear what they're saying we'll probably be able to make sure if they have Chet and Biff with them."
"We'll be able to sneak up on them soon," said Frank. "If we can just get close enough to hear what they're saying, we’ll probably be able to tell if they have Chet and Biff with them."
The boys waited until the fire had died down. The four men had all disappeared within the cave.
The boys waited until the fire had burned down. The four men had all vanished into the cave.
"Quiet, now," Frank whispered. He began to make his way out of the undergrowth. Joe followed close behind. They crept up toward the entrance to the cave.
"Shh, now," Frank whispered. He started to move out of the brush. Joe stayed right behind him. They quietly approached the entrance to the cave.
They were about half-way across the open space when the whole scene about them was suddenly revealed with startling clarity in the livid glow of a flash of lightning. This was followed immediately by a crash of thunder that seemed to shake the very rocks on which they stood. As though this were but a prelude, rain began to fall, gently at first, then with increasing force. Other lightning flashes followed. Then the storm broke in all its fury.
They were about halfway across the open area when the entire scene around them was suddenly illuminated with shocking clarity by a bright flash of lightning. This was quickly followed by a loud crash of thunder that seemed to rattle the very rocks they stood on. As if this was just an introduction, rain started to pour down, lightly at first, then with more intensity. More flashes of lightning came after that. Then the storm unleashed its full power.
A gradually rising wind began to rake the tree-tops and the swishing of leaves and creaking of limbs could be plainly heard. The dull booming of the waves on the distant shore, the moaning of the wind, the driving spatter of rain, the constant peals of thunder, continually rose in volume, and the rain poured furiously from the black skies above.
A slowly increasing wind started to sweep through the tree tops, and you could clearly hear the rustling of leaves and the creaking of branches. The muffled crashing of waves on the faraway shore, the howling of the wind, the relentless splatter of rain, and the continuous rumble of thunder all got louder, while the rain fell heavily from the dark skies above.
The storm had broken so suddenly that the Hardy boys were taken aback. Their first impulse was to race for the shelter of the cave, but second thought told them that this would be unwise, for the men in the cave might be aroused by the storm.
The storm had hit so suddenly that the Hardy boys were caught off guard. Their first instinct was to run for the shelter of the cave, but then they realized that this would be a bad idea, as the men in the cave might be disturbed by the storm.
"We'd better go back to the boat," said Frank, turning about. "It's liable to be wrecked."
"We should head back to the boat," Frank said, turning around. "It could get wrecked."
Joe had almost forgotten about their motorboat. It was on the seaward side of the island and the storm was coming in from the sea. Although the boat was partly protected by the little cove into which they had brought it, there was every danger that the storm might cast the craft up on the rocks and wreck it. The consequences, in that case, would be grave. They would be unable to escape from Blacksnake Island at all without giving themselves up to the gang.
Joe had almost forgotten about their motorboat. It was on the ocean side of the island and the storm was coming in from the sea. Even though the boat was somewhat protected by the small cove where they had left it, there was a serious risk that the storm could throw the boat onto the rocks and destroy it. If that happened, they would be stuck on Blacksnake Island, unable to escape without surrendering to the gang.
The boys turned and fled back across the rocks. Rain streamed down upon them. Thunder crashed. Lightning flickered, illuminating for brief seconds the tossing trees and the tumbled rocks before them.
The boys turned and ran back across the rocks. Rain poured down on them. Thunder boomed. Lightning flashed, briefly lighting up the swaying trees and the scattered rocks in front of them.
Joe, during the afternoon, had occupied himself ascertaining the position of the grove and the cave relative to the little bay in which they had left the motorboat and he had come to the conclusion that the grove was not far away from the end of the island and almost in a direct line with the cove. Now, in their mad race toward the shore, he took the lead, heading toward the rocky bluffs.
Joe had spent the afternoon figuring out where the grove and the cave were in relation to the small bay where they had parked the motorboat. He concluded that the grove was close to the end of the island and almost in a straight line with the cove. Now, in their frantic dash toward the shore, he took the lead, aiming for the rocky cliffs.
The Hardy boys stumbled through the grove, keeping somehow to the trail. They were aided by the lightning flashes that gave spasmodic illumination, revealing the soggy leaves, the black branches, the tossing tree-tops bowed in the wind.
The Hardy boys stumbled through the grove, somehow sticking to the trail. They were helped by the lightning flashes that provided sporadic light, showing the damp leaves, the dark branches, and the swaying tree tops bending in the wind.
The storm had become a din of furious sound. The gale shrieked its way across the island from the booming sea and the thunder rolled like a battery of cannon while the rain beat down on the forest in a drumming downpour.
The storm had turned into a chaotic noise. The wind howled as it swept across the island from the crashing waves, and the thunder rumbled like a row of cannons as the rain poured down on the forest in a heavy downpour.
The boys were soaked to the skin. They fled toward the shore, keeping their course more by instinct than judgment, and all the time there was the dread thought in their minds that they were lost if the Sleuth should be cast up on the rocks and wrecked.
The boys were drenched. They ran toward the shore, relying more on instinct than on decision-making, and all the while they were haunted by the fear that they would be lost if the Sleuth got washed up on the rocks and crashed.
CHAPTER XV
A Startling Announcement
A Shocking Announcement
The Hardy boys reached the cove in the nick of time. Although the place was protected from the full fury of the sea, the high wind had lashed the waves to such an extent that the boat was pitching and tossing about, in imminent danger of running aground.
The Hardy boys arrived at the cove just in time. Even though the area was shielded from the full force of the sea, the strong winds had whipped the waves into such a frenzy that the boat was rocking and swaying, at serious risk of running aground.
The beach was sandy, however, and after some maneuvering, the boys were able to run the boat up on the shore, where it was safe enough. The storm by this time was showing some signs of abating, although the rain was still pouring in undiminished vigor. Frank rummaged about in the boat until he located their oilskins, and these they donned, although their clothes were already drenched.
The beach was sandy, and after some effort, the boys managed to pull the boat up onto the shore, where it was safe enough. By this point, the storm was starting to calm down, although the rain was still coming down hard. Frank searched through the boat until he found their oilskins, which they put on, even though their clothes were already soaked.
"I'd hate to be out at sea on a night like this," shouted Frank, as the lightning revealed the tossing inferno of waves under the black skies.
"I wouldn't want to be out at sea on a night like this," shouted Frank, as the lightning lit up the chaotic waves raging beneath the dark sky.
At that moment a light flashed away out to the right.
At that moment, a light suddenly appeared off to the right.
"A boat!" exclaimed Joe.
"Look, a boat!" exclaimed Joe.
"Heading toward the island!"
"Heading to the island!"
They kept their eyes fixed on the place where they had seen the light. In a few moments a vivid splash of lightning cut the darkness and they had a momentary glimpse of a small motorboat tossing about in the black waves.
They kept their eyes on the spot where they had seen the light. A few moments later, a bright flash of lightning illuminated the darkness, giving them a brief view of a small motorboat bobbing in the dark waves.
"He'll never make the shore in this storm," said Frank, shaking his head.
"He'll never reach the shore in this storm," Frank said, shaking his head.
"Can it be Tony?"
"Could it be Tony?"
"I hardly think so. He wouldn't come close in such a storm."
"I seriously doubt it. He wouldn’t get anywhere near in a storm like this."
"That's true, too."
"That's true as well."
"I think it's some outsider."
"I think it's an outsider."
"Do you think we can help him?"
"Do you think we can help him?"
"I don't think so. He'll probably pile up on the rocks."
"I don't think so. He's likely to get stuck on the rocks."
"Perhaps he's one of the gang."
"Maybe he's part of the group."
"That's so," agreed Frank. "I hadn't thought of that. Perhaps he knows where he's going, after all. Still, it won't hurt to go down the shore a bit and see if he makes his landing all right."
"That's true," Frank agreed. "I hadn't thought of that. Maybe he knows where he's headed after all. Still, it wouldn't hurt to head down to the shore a bit and see if he lands okay."
They went on down the shore in the darkness, picking their way among the rocks, feeling in their faces the salt spray blown in from the sea. The dull booming of the surf and the howling of the wind provided an almost deafening cacophony of sound. Every little while, a lightning flash would reveal the little boat, slowly heading in toward the shore.
They walked along the shore in the dark, carefully navigating the rocks and feeling the sea's salty spray on their faces. The low roar of the waves and the howling wind created a nearly overwhelming racket. Every now and then, a flash of lightning would momentarily illuminate the small boat as it made its way toward the shore.
Suddenly Frank stopped short, grasping his brother by the arm.
Suddenly, Frank halted, grabbing his brother by the arm.
"I saw a light ahead."
"I saw a light ahead."
"I thought I did too. Right on the shore."
"I thought I did too. Right on the beach."
They waited. In a moment the light reappeared. It bobbed slowly up and down and appeared to be moving down toward the beach.
They waited. Then the light came back. It bobbed slowly up and down and seemed to be moving down toward the beach.
"Somebody is going down to meet the boat. It must be one of the gang," declared Frank.
"Someone is going to meet the boat. It has to be one of the gang," Frank said.
The boys went forward more cautiously. The next flash of lightning showed that Frank's assumption was correct. They could see four men in oilskins trudging down among the rocks. The man in the lead carried a powerful electric lantern that cast a vivid beam of light upon the rain-washed boulders.
The boys moved ahead more carefully. The next flash of lightning confirmed that Frank was right. They saw four men in raincoats making their way among the rocks. The man in front had a bright electric lantern that lit up the rain-soaked boulders.
They saw that the man in the motorboat was heading toward a small bay that afforded ideal protection from the storm. The entrance was very narrow and great waves dashed over the rocks with showers of white spray, but the man in the boat guided his craft skillfully into the channel. He was in difficulties for a few moments, but by good steering brought the craft around. Then it shot forward, making the channel neatly, and surged down toward the beach.
They noticed that the guy in the motorboat was making his way toward a small bay that offered perfect shelter from the storm. The entrance was really narrow, and huge waves crashed over the rocks, sending up sprays of white water, but the guy in the boat skillfully navigated his way into the channel. He struggled for a moment, but with some good steering, he got the boat turned around. Then it shot forward, fitting neatly into the channel, and raced down toward the beach.
The men in oilskins were there to meet him. The boat was run up on the sand and the lone steersman sprang out and splashed through the water. For a few moments the five men conferred, standing there on the dark beach, with the wind whipping their oilskins about their legs, the lantern gleaming like a white eye, and the rain pouring down upon them. They looked like five sinister birds of prey as they stood there in the storm, and then they turned and began to walk back up over the rocks toward the center of the island.
The men in raincoats were there to meet him. The boat was pulled up onto the sand, and the lone steersman jumped out and splashed through the water. For a few moments, the five men talked, standing on the dark beach, with the wind whipping their raincoats around their legs, the lantern glowing like a white eye, and the rain pouring down on them. They looked like five dark birds of prey as they stood there in the storm, and then they turned and started walking back over the rocks toward the center of the island.
"This must be their landing place," said Frank. "And that means they must have a good trail from here to the cave."
"This has to be their landing spot," Frank said. "And that means they must have a clear path from here to the cave."
"Let's follow them," suggested Joe.
"Let's follow them," said Joe.
"Just what I was going to say. We know our boat is safe, and we can't get any wetter than we are now."
"Exactly what I was about to say. We know our boat is secure, and we can't get any wetter than we already are."
The boys therefore made their way down to the place where the five men had been standing. They could see the reflection of the lantern as it bobbed up and down while the quintette trudged back toward the trees, and they followed. True enough, there was a well-defined trail among the rocks and they made easy progress, considering the darkness and the fact that the trail was unknown to them.
The boys made their way down to where the five men had been standing. They could see the lantern's light bouncing up and down as the group made their way back to the trees, so they followed. Sure enough, there was a clear path among the rocks, and they moved along easily, given the darkness and the fact that the trail was new to them.
The height of the storm had passed and the rain had settled down to a steady downpour. The roar of the thunder had diminished to an occasional distant rumble, and the lightning flashes were less frequent. The wind, too, had died down.
The worst of the storm was over, and the rain had turned into a steady downpour. The thunder's roar had faded to a distant rumble now and then, and the lightning flashes were less common. The wind had calmed down as well.
The light ahead guided them up the trail, across the rocks, then into the grove again, and in a short time they again emerged on the edge of the clearing and could see the dull mass of the granite slope before them. The fire still gleamed, and they could see the five men go into the cave, which was brilliantly illuminated for a moment in the light of the lantern which the first man held so that the others might pass.
The light ahead led them up the trail, over the rocks, and back into the grove again. Soon, they found themselves on the edge of the clearing, looking at the dull mass of the granite slope in front of them. The fire still glowed, and they spotted the five men entering the cave, which was briefly lit up by the lantern that the first man held so the others could get by.
"We may as well go right up," said Frank. "We've come this far. There isn't any use backing down now."
"We might as well go all the way up," said Frank. "We've made it this far. There's no point in backing down now."
"I'm with you."
"I've got your back."
They crossed the rocks and crept up toward the entrance to the cave. They found tumbled boulders about the opening that afforded good protection and they were able to make their way up to within a few feet of the cave mouth without danger of being seen. The wind and the rain still created sufficient noise to drown out any sounds that they might have made in their approach.
They navigated over the rocks and quietly moved toward the cave entrance. They found scattered boulders around the opening that provided solid cover, allowing them to get within a few feet of the cave mouth without being noticed. The wind and rain continued to make enough noise to mask any sounds they might have made while approaching.
Through an opening in the boulders, they peeped into the cave. As they were in darkness they knew there was little chance that they would be seen by the men within; as for the latter, they were in the full glare of the fire, which one of the men had replenished from a pile of wood near by. The boys, therefore, could see without being seen.
Through a gap in the rocks, they looked into the cave. Since it was dark inside, they knew there was little chance of being spotted by the men inside; the men, on the other hand, were in the bright light of the fire, which one of them had restocked from a nearby pile of wood. So, the boys could see without being seen.
The men were divesting themselves of their oilskins, and one of them, the newcomer, had flung himself down on a pile of blankets, as though exhausted.
The men were taking off their oilskins, and one of them, the newcomer, had thrown himself onto a pile of blankets, as if he was exhausted.
"I tell you it was a tough trip," he was saying. "I was sure I was going to be wrecked. I couldn't find the passage. If you hadn't come along with the lantern when you did I'd have been washed up on the rocks and the boat would have been smashed to pieces."
"I’m telling you, it was a rough journey," he said. "I thought I was going to be completely done for. I couldn't find the way through. If you hadn't shown up with the lantern when you did, I would have ended up on the rocks and the boat would have been wrecked."
"Well, you're here, and that's all there is to it," declared the man they called Red. "You shouldn't have started out when you saw a storm was coming up."
"Well, you're here, and that’s all that matters," said the man they called Red. "You shouldn't have set out when you saw a storm about to hit."
"I didn't know it was going to be so bad. Anyway, I thought I'd get here before it broke."
"I had no idea it was going to be this bad. Anyway, I figured I’d get here before it fell apart."
"It must have been good news that brought you out here to-night," declared one of the others, sitting down.
"It must have been good news that brought you out here tonight," said one of the others, sitting down.
"I'll say it was good news," said the newcomer. "Mighty good news."
"I'll say it was good news," said the newcomer. "Really great news."
"What is it?" they asked eagerly.
"What is it?" they asked excitedly.
"I've found out why Fenton Hardy didn't pay any attention to that letter."
"I've figured out why Fenton Hardy ignored that letter."
The boys listened eagerly. At the mention of their father they knew that all their suspicions had been verified. They waited tensely as the conversation went on.
The boys listened intently. When their father was mentioned, they realized that all their doubts had been confirmed. They waited anxiously as the conversation continued.
"Why?" asked Red.
"Why?" Red asked.
"He didn't get it."
"He didn't understand."
"Why didn't he get it?"
"Why didn't he understand?"
The newcomer paused and smiled.
The newcomer paused and smiled.
"The reason he didn't get it," he said, slowly and triumphantly, "is because we've got him."
"The reason he didn't get it," he said, slowly and triumphantly, "is because we have him."
"Got him?"
"Got him?"
"We've got Fenton Hardy!"
"We've got Fenton Hardy!"
"How?"
"How?"
"Where?"
"Where at?"
"How do you know?"
"How do you find out?"
Questions were fired at the newcomer from all parts of the cave. He was enjoying the sensation he had caused. As for the hidden listeners, they experienced only a sickening amazement.
Questions were shot at the newcomer from every corner of the cave. He was relishing the excitement he had created. Meanwhile, the hidden listeners felt nothing but a nauseating shock.
"The gang got him in Chicago last night. I just got word this afternoon. He went out there to catch Baldy; but the boys got wind of it and they laid a trap for him. He stepped right into it."
"The gang got him in Chicago last night. I just heard about it this afternoon. He went out there to get Baldy, but the guys found out and set a trap for him. He walked right into it."
"Good!" exclaimed the red-headed man, rubbing his hands. "What could be sweeter? We've got Hardy and we've got his sons—"
"Great!" the red-headed man said, rubbing his hands together. "What could be better? We've got Hardy and we've got his sons—"
"By the way, how are they acting?" asked the newcomer.
"By the way, how are they behaving?" asked the newcomer.
"Oh, still kicking up a fuss—the young brats," growled the man called Pete. "They say they ain't the Hardy boys at all."
"Oh, still causing a scene—the young punks," grumbled the man named Pete. "They say they're not the Hardy boys at all."
"Don't worry about that. Bring 'em out here."
"Don't stress about it. Bring them out here."
One of the men got up from beside the fire and disappeared into the rear of the cave. His footsteps died away and the Hardy boys judged that there must be some sort of inner chamber to the place. In a short time he returned, pushing ahead of him two boys. Frank and Joe peered forward, striving to catch a glimpse of the lads' features.
One of the guys stood up from next to the fire and went into the back of the cave. His footsteps faded away, and the Hardy boys figured there had to be some kind of inner room in there. After a little while, he came back, bringing two boys with him. Frank and Joe leaned forward, trying to see what the boys looked like.
With a clanking of chains, the boys emerged into the firelight.
With a clanking of chains, the boys stepped into the glow of the fire.
They were Chet Morton and Biff Hooper!
They were Chet Morton and Biff Hooper!
The lads were handcuffed and their ankles were bound by a gleaming length of chain, just long enough to enable them to walk. They appeared thin and tired, their shoulders drooped wearily, and as they stood before the fire they said nothing.
The guys were handcuffed and their ankles were connected by a shiny chain, just long enough for them to walk. They looked thin and exhausted, their shoulders drooping wearily, and as they stood in front of the fire, they said nothing.
"Well, Hardys," said the red-haired man in a harsh voice, "we have some news for you."
"Well, Hardys," said the man with red hair in a rough voice, "we have some news for you."
"We've told you before," said Chet. "You've made a mistake. We're not the Hardy boys."
"We've told you before," Chet said. "You made a mistake. We're not the Hardy Boys."
The man named Pete stepped suddenly forward from the shadows and cuffed Chet savagely on the side of the head.
The guy named Pete suddenly stepped out from the shadows and hit Chet hard on the side of the head.
"Shut up!" he snarled, and cuffed Biff Hooper as well. "No more of that. We're tired of listenin' to it. You're the Hardy boys, all right, and it won't do you no good to deny it."
"Shut up!" he growled, and slapped Biff Hooper too. "That’s enough. We’re sick of hearing it. You're the Hardy boys, no doubt about it, and denying it won’t help you."
"You've made a mistake!" insisted Chet stubbornly.
"You messed up!" Chet insisted stubbornly.
"We'll show you how much of a mistake we've made!" roared one of the men. "We brought you out here to tell you something. Our men have got your father at last."
"We'll show you what a big mistake we've made!" one of the men shouted. "We brought you out here to tell you something. Our guys have finally got your father."
"Mr. Hardy?" exclaimed Chet greatly taken aback.
"Mr. Hardy?" Chet exclaimed, clearly surprised.
"Yes, Mr. Hardy!" exclaimed Red, mimicking him. "That shot sunk home, didn't it? We've got him, and we've got you, and we'll starve you into making your mother come across with the money we want. If you have been holding out, hoping your father would come for you, it's no good now. We've got him and we've got you, so you may as well give up."
"Yeah, Mr. Hardy!" shouted Red, copying him. "That hit home, didn't it? We’ve got him, and we’ve got you, and we’ll make you starve until your mom pays up. If you were holding out, thinking your dad would come for you, that’s not going to happen now. We’ve got him, and we’ve got you, so you might as well give up."
"There's no use asking us," declared Biff. "We're not the Hardy boys."
"There's no point in asking us," said Biff. "We're not the Hardy Boys."
Red cuffed him viciously over the ears again. Biff staggered back from the blow.
Red hit him hard on the ears again. Biff stumbled back from the impact.
"Oh, take them back and chain them up again," Red said, in disgust. "Let 'em starve for a while and they'll come around and tell the truth!"
"Oh, take them back and chain them up again," Red said, disgusted. "Let them starve for a while, and they'll come around and tell the truth!"
"If I could get loose for about two minutes I'd show you—," declared Biff, clenching his fists.
"If I could break free for just two minutes, I'd show you—," Biff said, clenching his fists.
But the red-haired man only laughed contemptuously. The Hardy boys, from their hiding place, saw Pete come forward and drag Chet and Biff back into the darkness at the rear of the cave, their chains clanking as they went.
But the red-haired man just laughed with disdain. The Hardy boys, from their hiding spot, watched as Pete stepped forward and pulled Chet and Biff back into the shadows at the back of the cave, their chains rattling as they moved.
CHAPTER XVI
The Alarm
The Alarm
The Hardy boys were quivering with excitement. They had found the whereabouts of their chums; they had learned the dismaying news that Fenton Hardy had been captured by his enemies; they had discovered the hiding place of the gang. All this had taken place in a few fleeting hours.
The Hardy boys were buzzing with excitement. They had tracked down their friends; they had received the shocking news that Fenton Hardy had been taken by his enemies; they had uncovered the hiding spot of the gang. All of this had happened in just a few short hours.
Their first problem was to release Chet and Biff. But at first glance that seemed impossible. For when Pete came back into the cave he flung a bunch of keys into the sand beside the fire and laughed harshly.
Their first challenge was to free Chet and Biff. But at first glance, that seemed impossible. When Pete returned to the cave, he tossed a bunch of keys into the sand next to the fire and laughed bitterly.
"They'll get tired bein' chained up to a rock after a few more days," he said. "They'll come through yet."
"They'll get tired of being chained to a rock after a few more days," he said. "They'll make it through."
"We can wait as long as they can," declared Red.
"We can wait as long as they can," Red said.
"If they'll only write a letter to their mother now and tell her we want that ransom we'll be sitting pretty. Fenton Hardy can't come after them—that's certain."
"If they just write a letter to their mom now and let her know we want that ransom, we'll be in a great spot. Fenton Hardy won't be able to come after them—that's for sure."
"Well, it's a good day's work. I'm goin' to sleep," said one of the other men. He pulled a blanket about him and curled up beside the fire.
"Well, that's a good day's work. I'm going to sleep," said one of the other guys. He wrapped a blanket around himself and curled up next to the fire.
"Good idea," remarked Red. "We might as well all turn in."
"Good idea," Red said. "We might as well all go to bed."
Shortly afterward, the various members of the gang were sprawled about in their blankets on the sand. Frank noticed that they all slept on the same side of the fire, and also noted that the reason for this was that on one side of the cave the floor was a ledge of rock.
Shortly after, the gang members were lying around in their blankets on the sand. Frank saw that they all slept on the same side of the fire and also realized that the reason for this was that one side of the cave had a ledge of rock as the floor.
"We'll wait till they go to sleep," he whispered to Joe.
"We'll wait until they fall asleep," he whispered to Joe.
His brother nodded. The two boys remained crouched among the rocks. The rain had died away to a mere drizzle.
His brother nodded. The two boys stayed crouched among the rocks. The rain had turned into just a light drizzle.
Gradually the fire, untended, died down, and there was only a faint, rosy glow through the interior of the cave. Two or three of the men had talked together in low murmurs for a while, but gradually their voices died away and soon the boys could hear their snores. It was nearly an hour, however, before they were satisfied that all the men were asleep.
Gradually, the unattended fire died down, leaving just a faint, rosy glow in the cave. Two or three of the men had whispered to each other for a bit, but eventually, their voices faded, and soon the boys could hear them snoring. It took almost an hour, though, before they were sure that all the men were asleep.
"I'm going in after Chet and Biff," whispered Frank, with determination.
"I'm going in after Chet and Biff," Frank whispered, filled with determination.
"I'm with you."
"I got your back."
"The keys are still lying beside the fire."
"The keys are still lying next to the fire."
"Good."
"Great."
Frank rose from his cramped position among the rocks. Joe followed his example. Quietly, they moved toward the entrance of the cave.
Frank got up from his tight spot among the rocks. Joe did the same. Silently, they made their way to the entrance of the cave.
The snores of the slumbering men were unbroken. Frank took the lead and tiptoed slowly forward. Step by step, keeping a wary eye on the recumbent forms wrapped in the blankets, the boys made their way into the cave.
The snores of the sleeping men were steady. Frank took the lead and quietly moved ahead. Step by step, keeping a cautious eye on the figures lying under the blankets, the boys made their way into the cave.
Frank remembered where the keys had been thrown, and now he saw them in the sand. The faint glow of the firelight gleamed on them.
Frank remembered where the keys had been tossed, and now he spotted them in the sand. The faint glow of the firelight shimmered on them.
The keys were on the side of the fire nearest the men. It would be a delicate job to get possession of them. He bent forward and crawled on hands and knees. Joe came silently behind.
The keys were by the fire closest to the guys. It would be tricky to grab them. He leaned forward and crawled on his hands and knees. Joe followed quietly behind.
Frank skirted the fire, then groped carefully forward.
Frank moved around the fire, then carefully made his way ahead.
There was a mutter from the shadows. One of the men stirred in his sleep.
There was a murmur from the shadows. One of the guys shifted in his sleep.
The boys remained rigid.
The guys stayed stiff.
The muttering died away. After a long pause, Frank again reached for the keys.
The muttering faded out. After a long pause, Frank reached for the keys again.
His hands closed over them. He gripped them tightly so that they would not jangle together. Then he moved slowly back onto the rock ledge, the keys safely in his grasp.
His hands closed around them. He held them tightly so they wouldn’t jangle together. Then he slowly backed onto the rock ledge, the keys safely in his grip.
The Hardy boys continued their silent journey toward the darkness in the rear of the cave. The dying fire cast little light.
The Hardy boys kept moving quietly into the shadows at the back of the cave. The fading fire provided barely any light.
Little by little they edged forward into the depths of the cave, past the sleeping men. The slightest noise, they knew, might be sufficient to arouse one of the gang. They proceeded with the utmost caution toward the back of the cavern.
Little by little, they moved deeper into the cave, passing by the sleeping men. They knew that even the smallest noise could wake one of the gang. They advanced with extreme caution toward the back of the cavern.
At length Frank found what he sought. It was a dark patch in the rear wall—the entrance to the inner chamber.
At last, Frank found what he was looking for. It was a dark spot in the back wall—the entrance to the inner chamber.
He reached it safely and groped his way through into the pitchy blackness beyond. He stopped and listened. The sound of deep breathing told him that his two chums were asleep within.
He arrived safely and felt his way into the pitch-black darkness beyond. He paused and listened. The sound of deep breathing indicated that his two friends were asleep inside.
He reached back and laid a restraining hand on Joe's arm, indicating that he was to remain at the mouth of the inner chamber and keep watch. Joe realized his intention and remained where he was. Frank then continued.
He reached back and placed a hand on Joe's arm, signaling him to stay at the entrance of the inner chamber and keep watch. Joe understood what he meant and stayed put. Frank then continued.
Cautiously, he groped about in the darkness, moving slowly forward. At length his hand fell upon an outstretched arm, then a shoulder which stirred slightly.
Cautiously, he felt around in the darkness, moving slowly forward. Eventually, his hand landed on an outstretched arm, then a shoulder that shifted slightly.
He bent forward and shook the sleeper.
He leaned forward and shook the person who was sleeping.
"Chet!" he whispered.
"Chet!" he whispered.
The other boy moved and began to sit up. The chains jangled.
The other boy shifted and started to sit up. The chains clinked.
"Quiet!" whispered Frank, fearing that his chum might be alarmed at this sudden and surprising awakening and make some sound.
"Shh!" Frank whispered, worried that his friend might be startled by this sudden and unexpected wake-up and make a noise.
"Who is it?" whispered the other.
"Who is it?" the other whispered.
"It's me—Frank. I've come to help you get free."
"It's me—Frank. I'm here to help you break free."
From the darkness he heard a gasp of surprise, but it was quickly silenced.
From the darkness, he heard a gasp of surprise, but it was quickly hushed.
"I'll waken Biff," replied Chet. Frank had merely guessed at this being Chet Morton whom he had awakened, and found that his guess had been correct.
"I'll wake up Biff," Chet said. Frank had only guessed that he had woken up Chet Morton, and he was right.
In a few minutes Biff had been aroused.
In a few minutes, Biff was awake.
"The men are asleep," whispered Frank. "Don't ask questions. Keep quiet until we get outside. I have the keys. Where is the lock?"
"The guys are asleep," whispered Frank. "Don't ask questions. Just stay quiet until we get outside. I have the keys. Where's the lock?"
"We're chained to the rock," Chet whispered in return. He grasped Frank's hand, guiding it to the wall of the cave until his fingers closed on a heavy padlock. "There you are!"
"We're stuck here," Chet whispered back. He took Frank's hand and led it to the cave wall until his fingers found a heavy padlock. "There you go!"
Frank tried several keys before he found the one that fitted, but at length the padlock snapped open. He grasped the chain with his other hand so that it did not fall to the floor with a clatter. He lowered it gently.
Frank tried several keys before he found the right one, but finally, the padlock clicked open. He grabbed the chain with his other hand to keep it from clattering to the floor. He lowered it carefully.
"Now for the handcuffs."
"Now for the cuffs."
Chet extended his wrists and Frank finally located the small key that opened the handcuffs. He removed them, then released Chet's feet in a similar manner. Then he crawled over to Biff, releasing him from his chains.
Chet stretched out his wrists, and Frank finally found the small key that unlocked the handcuffs. He took them off, then freed Chet's feet in the same way. Then he crawled over to Biff and set him free from his chains.
All this work had been done with a minimum of noise, and as there had been no warning whisper from Joe, they assumed that the men in the outer cave had not been aroused.
All this work had been done quietly, and since Joe hadn’t given any warning, they figured that the men in the outer cave hadn’t been alerted.
Frank led the way out, the three crawling on hands and knees into the main cave. They could see Joe crawling ahead of them, past the ruby glow of the embers.
Frank led the way out, the three moving on hands and knees into the main cave. They could see Joe crawling ahead of them, past the red glow of the embers.
The snores of the men continued without interruption. Frank was jubilant. The most dangerous part of the affair was over. Could they but gain the entrance in safety and reach their motorboat in the cove before the gang should discover that their prisoners had escaped, all would be well.
The men kept snoring away without a break. Frank was thrilled. The riskiest part of the situation was behind them. If they could just safely get to the entrance and make it to their motorboat in the cove before the gang figured out that their prisoners had escaped, everything would be fine.
Frank caught sight of a flashlight lying in the sand. His own light had been lost in the rock cave the previous day and he knew they would need a light to regain their boat.
Frank spotted a flashlight in the sand. He had lost his own light in the rock cave the day before, and he knew they would need a light to find their way back to the boat.
He reached carefully over for it. His hands closed about the black cylinder and the light was his.
He carefully reached for it. His hands grasped the black cylinder and the light was his.
Chet and Biff nodded appreciatively when they saw what he had done. The flashlight would be a big factor in aiding their escape.
Chet and Biff nodded in approval when they saw what he had done. The flashlight would play a crucial role in helping them escape.
Joe had reached the entrance to the cave by now. They saw him get to his feet and glide silently out into the darkness.
Joe had made it to the cave entrance by now. They watched him stand up and slip quietly into the darkness.
Frank reached the end of the ledge. The flashlight was clutched in his hand. Slowly he rose to his feet. But a small pebble betrayed him. He lost his balance and staggered for a second.
Frank reached the end of the ledge. He held the flashlight tightly in his hand. Slowly, he stood up. But a small pebble gave him away. He lost his balance and wobbled for a second.
Had it not been for the flashlight the emergency would have passed because he flung out his hand and supported himself against the wall of the cave. But the heavy flashlight struck a loose projection of rock.
Had it not been for the flashlight, the emergency would have gone unnoticed, because he reached out his hand and propped himself against the cave wall. But the heavy flashlight hit a loose rock projection.
There was a grinding clatter of stone as the rock came free.
There was a loud clattering of stone as the rock broke loose.
In the dead silence of the cave the noise seemed magnified many times. Frank knew that the sleepers would be aroused. He threw caution to the winds.
In the complete silence of the cave, every sound felt amplified. Frank realized the people resting would be awakened. He disregarded caution.
He leaped forward, gaining the entrance at a bound. Chet Morton and Biff Hooper, seeing that nothing was to be gained by further caution, scrambled to their feet and raced in pursuit.
He jumped forward, reaching the entrance in one go. Chet Morton and Biff Hooper, realizing that being cautious wasn’t going to help, got up quickly and ran after him.
The noise of the dislodged rock had already wakened one of the men. He raised himself on elbow in alarm and peered about. Then he saw the fleeing figures in the mouth of the cave and heard the running footsteps.
The sound of the dislodged rock had already woken one of the men. He propped himself up on his elbow in alarm and looked around. Then he saw the fleeing figures at the cave entrance and heard the sound of footsteps running.
He sprang at once to his feet.
He jumped up immediately.
"They're getting away!" he roared. "Wake up, men! They're getting away!"
"They're getting away!" he shouted. "Wake up, guys! They're getting away!"
Instantly pandemonium prevailed within the cave. The men hastily tumbled out of their blankets, bewildered at being aroused from slumber.
Instantly, chaos erupted in the cave. The men quickly scrambled out of their blankets, confused about being woken from their sleep.
The Hardy boys and their chums, racing across the rocky stretch on the outskirts of the cave, heard the uproar and the cry:
The Hardy Boys and their friends, sprinting across the rocky area on the edge of the cave, heard the commotion and the shout:
"After them! Don't let them escape!"
"After them! Don’t let them get away!"
CHAPTER XVII
Capture
Capture
The men in the cave lost no time in taking up the pursuit. They had been sleeping in their clothes and, once aroused, hurried out of the cave in search of the fugitives.
The men in the cave quickly sprang into action. They had been sleeping in their clothes and, once awakened, rushed out of the cave in search of the escapees.
The boys raced across the rocks. Behind them they could hear shouts as the gangsters called to each other. Then came the crash of a revolver as one of the men pumped shot after shot in their direction.
The boys sprinted over the rocks. Behind them, they heard shouts as the gangsters called out to each other. Then came the sound of a revolver as one of the men fired shot after shot in their direction.
Biff sprawled full length on the rocks.
Biff lay lengthwise on the rocks.
"Are you hurt?" asked Joe, stopping to help him rise.
"Are you okay?" Joe asked, pausing to help him get up.
"No, I'm all right," gasped Biff, scrambling to his feet. He had suffered bruises but seemed otherwise uninjured. However, when he began to run again Joe noticed that he was limping and his progress was slower than formerly.
"No, I'm fine," Biff gasped, getting back on his feet. He had some bruises but looked otherwise okay. However, when he started to run again, Joe noticed he was limping and that he was moving slower than before.
Frank had the battered flashlight, but he did not dare switch it on for fear of revealing their whereabouts to the men. The latter, however, were stumbling along behind, following the trail by reason of the noise the boys made in their mad flight toward the trees.
Frank had the worn-out flashlight, but he didn’t dare turn it on for fear of giving away their location to the men. The men, however, were tripping along behind, following the noise the boys made in their desperate run toward the trees.
The men had the advantage in that they knew every inch of the rocky ground. The boys had to proceed more cautiously because it was unfamiliar to them, especially to Chet and Biff.
The men had the upper hand because they were familiar with every part of the rocky terrain. The boys had to move more carefully since it was new to them, especially Chet and Biff.
Biff was limping along in the rear and Joe purposely slowed down his pace so as to remain with his chum. But the delay was fatal. Out of the darkness came one of their pursuers, and with a growl of triumph he flung himself at Biff.
Biff was limping at the back, and Joe intentionally slowed down so he could stay with his friend. But the delay was disastrous. From the darkness, one of their pursuers emerged, and with a triumphant growl, he lunged at Biff.
His arms encircled the lad's legs in a perfect tackle and Biff went down with a crash. Joe wheeled about and plunged upon them, striking out desperately to fight off Biff's attacker. They struggled fiercely in the darkness. Joe felt his fist crash into the man's face and he heard a grunt of pain. Biff was wriggling out of his assailant's grasp, and the boys might indeed have made their escape had it not been that the other men came running up out of the shadows.
His arms wrapped around the kid's legs in a perfect tackle, and Biff went down hard. Joe turned around and jumped into the fray, swinging wildly to fight off Biff's attacker. They fought fiercely in the dark. Joe felt his fist connect with the man's face and heard a grunt of pain. Biff was squirming out of his attacker's hold, and the boys might have actually escaped if it hadn't been for the other men running up from the shadows.
With a roar of fury, two of them plunged at the boys and hauled them away from their comrade.
With a furious shout, two of them lunged at the boys and pulled them away from their friend.
"After the other two!" shouted a voice, which they recognized as that of Red, "They're heading for the bushes!"
"After the other two!" shouted a voice they recognized as Red's. "They're going for the bushes!"
Joe and Biff found themselves roughly hauled to their feet, their arms held tightly behind them. They heard the clatter of footsteps as two of the other men ran after Frank and Chet.
Joe and Biff were roughly pulled to their feet, their arms held tightly behind them. They heard the sound of footsteps as two of the other guys chased after Frank and Chet.
"Back to the cave with 'em," growled Red. "Looks like we've got one of the guys that helped 'em get away. I've been thinkin' all day that there was some one hangin' around here that we didn't know about."
"Back to the cave with them," growled Red. "Looks like we've got one of the guys who helped them escape. I've been thinking all day that there was someone lurking around here that we didn't know about."
The lads were shoved and pushed ahead of their captors, dragged and bundled across the rocks until they reached the cave. Then they were roughly shoved through the entrance into the light of the fire.
The guys were shoved and pushed in front of their captors, dragged and bundled over the rocks until they got to the cave. Then they were roughly pushed through the entrance into the light of the fire.
"Ah! I thought so!" declared Red. "One of the guys that tried to help them get away." He peered closer at Joe. "Blessed if it ain't one of those two boys that was in the boat with the Hardys that day."
"Ah! I knew it!" Red said. "One of the guys who tried to help them escape." He leaned in closer to Joe. "I can't believe it's one of those two boys who were in the boat with the Hardys that day."
One of the other men ordered the boys to sit down, and they crouched beside the stirred-up fire, sick at heart, wondering how it fared with Frank and Chet.
One of the other men told the boys to sit down, and they huddled next to the flickering fire, feeling uneasy, wondering how Frank and Chet were doing.
When Joe and Biff were captured it was Chet's first impulse to turn and go back, but a warning shout from Frank restrained him.
When Joe and Biff were captured, Chet's first instinct was to turn around and go back, but a shout of warning from Frank stopped him.
"Keep running!" he called. "If they're caught we'll have a chance to get help."
"Keep running!" he shouted. "If they get caught, we'll have a chance to get help."
The wisdom of this course flashed through Chet's mind at once. If they went to the aid of their comrades they would probably all be captured and in a worse position than before. But if two, or even one, managed to escape, it would be possible to bring help to the island and effect the release of the others.
The wisdom of this course hit Chet all at once. If they went to help their friends, they’d probably end up getting caught too, putting them in a worse situation than before. But if two, or even just one, could escape, they’d be able to get help for the island and free the others.
Chet heard Frank crash into the undergrowth. It was pitch dark, and although he tried to follow he knew he had left the trail. He did not call out because he was afraid of revealing his whereabouts to the men behind, but he blundered on, hoping to catch up with Frank. As for the latter, he was quite unaware of Chet's predicament.
Chet heard Frank crash into the bushes. It was completely dark, and even though he tried to follow, he knew he had lost the trail. He didn’t call out because he was worried about giving away his position to the men behind him, but he stumbled on, hoping to catch up with Frank. As for Frank, he was totally unaware of Chet's situation.
Chet crashed into the bushes. Branches whipped his face. Roots gripped his feet. He struggled on through the dense growth, blindly, in the darkness. Far ahead of him he could hear Frank making his way through the underbrush, but when he tried to go toward the sound he found that his sense of direction was confused.
Chet crashed into the bushes. Branches slapped his face. Roots snagged his feet. He pushed through the thick foliage, blindly, in the dark. Far ahead, he could hear Frank moving through the underbrush, but when he tried to head toward the sound, he realized his sense of direction was messed up.
He struggled on for some time. Suddenly he saw a patch of gray light ahead. It was the open sky and he soon plunged out of the undergrowth into a rocky clearing. He breathed a sigh of relief.
He pushed through for a while. Then he spotted a patch of gray light ahead. It was the open sky, and he quickly emerged from the dense foliage into a rocky clearing. He let out a sigh of relief.
But the relief was short-lived.
But the relief didn't last.
A dark figure loomed up before him. He dodged swiftly to one side, but a huge hand caught at his clothing. He was spun violently around and then he was caught by the collar, despite his struggles.
A dark figure appeared in front of him. He quickly jumped to one side, but a massive hand grabbed his clothing. He was spun around forcefully, and then he was seized by the collar, despite his attempts to break free.
"Got you!" grunted the dark figure, with satisfaction. "Now if we can only get the other—"
"Got you!" the dark figure grunted, feeling satisfied. "Now if we can just get the other—"
He said no more, but shoved Chet before him across the rocks. Then it was that Chet found that, instead of fleeing farther away from the cave he had really made a circle in the wood and had emerged directly into the clearing again. He was sick with disappointment. He wriggled and twisted in the grasp of his captor, but the man was too strong for him and he shook Chet vigorously, tripping his feet from under him.
He didn't say anything else, but pushed Chet ahead of him across the rocks. It was then that Chet realized that, instead of running further away from the cave, he had actually gone in a circle and ended up right back in the clearing. He felt sick with disappointment. He squirmed and twisted in his captor’s grip, but the man was too strong, and he shook Chet forcefully, knocking his feet out from under him.
"None of that! You come along with me!" he rasped.
"None of that! You’re coming with me!" he said hoarsely.
And in a few minutes Chet was shoved back into the cave, where he found Biff Hooper and Joe Hardy crouched silently beside the fire, with downcast faces.
And in a few minutes, Chet was pushed back into the cave, where he found Biff Hooper and Joe Hardy sitting quietly beside the fire, looking downcast.
Frank alone had escaped.
Only Frank had escaped.
Frank knew that Chet had got lost but he did not dare call out, for he could also hear the running tramp of feet that told him their pursuers had not yet given up the chase. If he could only reach the cove and get the motorboat started he would be able to go over to the mainland for help. If only one escaped, it would be sufficient to save the others. He could not afford to risk his own capture in seeking Chet.
Frank knew Chet was lost, but he didn’t dare call out because he could hear the sound of feet running, which meant their pursuers were still on their tail. If he could just reach the cove and get the motorboat running, he could head over to the mainland for help. If even one of them made it out, it would be enough to save the others. He couldn’t risk getting caught while trying to find Chet.
He crashed on through the bushes, trying to make as little noise as possible. But he was off the trail, and the tangled undergrowth was growing denser with every forward step he took.
He pushed through the bushes, trying to be as quiet as he could. But he was off the path, and the thick undergrowth was getting denser with every step he took.
He still clutched the flashlight that had been the cause of their undoing. He was glad he had found it, because in the pitch blackness he was unable to find his way. He could hear the roar of the waves, but they appeared to come from all sides and he was unable to judge accurately the route to the shore.
He still held the flashlight that had brought about their downfall. He was relieved he had found it because, in the complete darkness, he couldn't find his way. He could hear the roar of the waves, but they seemed to come from all directions, and he couldn't accurately gauge the path to the shore.
Frank decided that he would not make use of the flashlight until it was absolutely necessary. There was too much danger that its gleam might be seen by one of the searchers. And he knew that the gang would not give up the chase as long as they knew he was on the island.
Frank decided he wouldn’t use the flashlight until it was absolutely necessary. There was too much risk that its light could be spotted by one of the searchers. And he knew the gang wouldn’t give up the hunt as long as they knew he was on the island.
"Perhaps they don't know there are two of us," he thought. "If Joe can convince them that he rescued Chet and Biff single-handed they won't know about me and they won't keep on searching."
"Maybe they don't realize there are two of us," he thought. "If Joe can convince them that he saved Chet and Biff all by himself, they won't know about me and they won't keep looking."
In this lay his only hope—in this and in the chance that he would be able to reach the motorboat and make his escape before being seen. But if the gangsters knew he was still free they would leave no stone unturned to find him, as they would know that if he once left the island they were lost.
In this lay his only hope—in this and in the chance that he could get to the motorboat and escape before anyone spotted him. But if the gangsters realized he was still out there, they would do everything possible to hunt him down, knowing that if he ever left the island, they were done for.
He blundered about in the deep thicket, turning vainly this way and that. Great vines trailed across his face; he brushed aside stubborn branches and soggy wet leaves; he stumbled over roots and little bushes; the deep grass rustled and hissed at his feet.
He stumbled around in the thick underbrush, turning uselessly in every direction. Thick vines brushed against his face; he pushed aside stubborn branches and soaked leaves; he tripped over roots and small bushes; the tall grass rustled and hissed around his feet.
There was no other way. He would have to use the flashlight. The darkness was impenetrable. Trees and bushes enclosed him. He could not see where he was going.
There was no other option. He would have to use the flashlight. The darkness was absolute. Trees and bushes surrounded him. He couldn't see where he was going.
He switched on the light and, to one side of him, descried a sort of passage among the bushes, so he headed in that direction. He managed to get free of the worst of the vines and the thick foliage and found himself in a forest aisle. He went down it, in the direction of the booming surf. His heart beat quickly at the thought that he was now free and that he would soon be back at the boat. What had happened to Chet? He judged that his chum was either captured now or lost in the grove. Frank knew that he could not wait to learn Chet's fate because any delay would be fatal to them all.
He turned on the light and spotted a sort of pathway through the bushes, so he made his way in that direction. He managed to push through the thick vines and foliage and found himself in a forest path. He walked down it, heading toward the sound of the crashing waves. His heart raced at the thought that he was finally free and would soon be back at the boat. What had happened to Chet? He figured his friend was either captured or lost in the trees. Frank knew he couldn't wait to find out Chet's fate because any delay could be deadly for all of them.
He had switched out the flashlight and was plunging along through the darkness when the forest aisle suddenly took a twist and he found himself again floundering in the midst of trees and trailing vines that entangled him.
He had swapped out the flashlight and was pushing through the darkness when the forest path suddenly curved, and he found himself struggling again in the middle of trees and creeping vines that wrapped around him.
Frank switched on the flashlight again.
Frank turned the flashlight back on.
And a second later he heard a grim voice from close by:
And a second later, he heard a harsh voice nearby:
"Throw up your hands!"
"Throw up your hands!"
He wheeled about and found himself suddenly bathed in a ring of light. Some one was standing only a few feet away with a flashlight leveled at him, and in the beam of the flashlight he could see a glittering revolver aimed directly toward him.
He turned around and suddenly found himself surrounded by a ring of light. Someone was standing just a few feet away with a flashlight pointed at him, and in the glow of the flashlight, he could see a shiny revolver aimed straight at him.
"Throw up your hands!" rasped the voice again, "or you'll be shot."
"Raise your hands!" the voice shouted again, "or you'll get shot."
Slowly Frank raised his hands above his head.
Slowly, Frank lifted his hands above his head.
"That's better. Now march back ahead of me. Back to the cave, young fellow. We've got you all now. Forward march!"
"That's better. Now walk back in front of me. Back to the cave, kid. We’ve got you all now. Let’s go!"
CHAPTER XVIII
Back to the Cave
Back to the Cave
"This is a piece of luck!" declared the red-headed man.
"This is lucky!" declared the red-haired man.
He squatted by the fire with his arms folded and surveyed the four prisoners. Frank and Joe had been dragged back to the cave with the others and were now bound and helpless, while the gangsters confronted them.
He squatted by the fire with his arms crossed, looking over the four prisoners. Frank and Joe had been taken back to the cave with the others and were now tied up and defenseless, while the gangsters faced them.
"Who are these two?" asked the man called Pete, indicating the Hardy boys.
"Who are these two?" asked the man named Pete, pointing to the Hardy boys.
Red shook his head.
Red shook his head.
"We've seen 'em before. They were in the boat the day we were looking these two birds over," he remarked, gesturing toward Chet and Biff.
"We've seen them before. They were in the boat the day we were checking out these two guys," he said, pointing at Chet and Biff.
"What's your names?" demanded Pete gruffly.
"What's your names?" Pete asked gruffly.
The Hardy boys glanced at one another. Their captors were not yet aware of their identity and they did not know whether to admit it or not. Frank resolved on silence as the best course.
The Hardy boys looked at each other. Their captors didn’t know who they were yet, and they weren’t sure if they should confess or not. Frank decided that staying quiet was the best option.
"Find out!" he retorted.
"Figure it out!" he retorted.
An ugly look crept into Red's face.
An ugly expression appeared on Red's face.
"Is that so?" he snarled. "Won't talk, eh? I'll soon make you talk."
"Is that so?" he growled. "Not talking, huh? I'll make you talk soon enough."
He leaned forward and wrenched open Frank's coat. Frank's wrists were handcuffed and he was helpless to resist. Red pulled him roughly to one side and groped in the inner pocket of the coat. There was a rustle of paper and he withdrew two or three letters. Frank bit his lip in exasperation. He had forgotten about the letters and he knew that any hope of concealing his identity was now lost.
He leaned forward and yanked open Frank's coat. Frank's wrists were handcuffed and he couldn’t fight back. Red pulled him roughly to the side and rummaged through the inner pocket of the coat. There was a rustling sound and he pulled out two or three letters. Frank bit his lip in frustration. He had forgotten about the letters and knew that any hope of hiding his identity was now gone.
The red-headed man brought the letters over to the fire and squinted at the addresses. His eyes opened wide; his jaw dropped.
The red-haired man brought the letters to the fire and narrowed his eyes at the addresses. His eyes widened; his jaw dropped.
"Frank Hardy!" he gasped.
"Frank Hardy!" he exclaimed.
"What?" demanded one of the other men.
"What?" one of the other guys asked.
"All these letters are addressed to Frank Hardy!" declared the astonished gangster. "What d'you know about that!"
"All these letters are addressed to Frank Hardy!" exclaimed the shocked gangster. "What do you know about that!"
With a sudden movement, Pete grasped Joe by the collar and held him while he turned his pockets inside out. Finally, with an air of triumph, he produced Joe's membership card in a Bayport athletic association, on which his name was written in full.
With a quick motion, Pete grabbed Joe by the collar and held him still as he turned his pockets inside out. Finally, with a look of victory, he pulled out Joe's membership card for a Bayport athletic association, which had his full name on it.
"Joe Hardy!" he read. "Why, these are the real Hardy boys!"
"Joe Hardy!" he exclaimed. "Wow, these are the actual Hardy Boys!"
The gangsters looked at one another with crestfallen expressions, but their momentary astonishment at realization of their mistake was quickly changed to rejoicing.
The gangsters exchanged disappointed looks, but their brief shock at realizing their mistake quickly turned into celebration.
"I told you we weren't the Hardys," put in Chet. "I told you all along that you were making a mistake."
"I told you we weren't the Hardys," Chet said. "I kept saying that you were making a mistake."
"Shut up!" ordered Red. "Yes, men, we made a mistake, all right. We didn't have the Hardy boys after all. But now we have got 'em! I'll say this is a piece of luck! We've got the whole caboodle now."
"Shut up!" Red commanded. "Yeah, guys, we messed up, that's for sure. We didn’t have the Hardy boys after all. But now we do! I’d say this is a stroke of luck! We’ve got the whole thing now."
Meanwhile one of the men had been going more thoroughly through the boys' pockets. Now he grunted.
Meanwhile, one of the men had been going through the boys' pockets more thoroughly. Now he grunted.
"Armed! Would you believe it? Brats like these!"
"Armed! Can you believe it? Kids like these!"
"Take the guns away," came the order from Red.
"Take the guns away," Red ordered.
"What'll we do with the others?" demanded one of the gangsters.
"What are we going to do with the others?" asked one of the gangsters.
"With the two we caught in the first place? We'll hang right onto 'em. We'll hold the Hardy boys for ransom the way we intended to, and we'll make some money out of the other two as well. You two boys," he said, turning to Chet and Biff, "have your people got money?"
"With the two we caught initially? We’ll hold onto them for sure. We’ll get the Hardy boys for ransom like we planned, and we’ll make some cash off the other two too. You two," he said, turning to Chet and Biff, "does your crew have money?"
"Find out!" snapped Chet, following Frank's example.
"Find out!" Chet snapped, copying Frank's example.
"We'll find out, all right!" rasped Pete. "We'll find out. And if they haven't got money it'll be all the worse for the pack of you!" He chuckled suddenly. "We'll make a real haul out of this, men! Four ransoms!"
"We'll find out, for sure!" rasped Pete. "We'll find out. And if they don’t have any money, it'll be even worse for all of you!" He suddenly laughed. "We're going to make a big score out of this, guys! Four ransoms!"
"Yes, and now that we have the real Hardy boys we'll give Fenton Hardy a few anxious minutes," laughed another of the men, from a dark corner of the cave.
"Yeah, and now that we have the real Hardy boys, we'll make Fenton Hardy wait for a bit," chuckled another guy from a shadowy spot in the cave.
"Where is our father?" asked Frank.
"Where's Dad?" Frank asked.
Red scratched his chin meditatively.
Red scratched his chin thoughtfully.
"You're gettin' curious, hey? Want to know where your father is? I'll tell you. He's in a safe place where he can't get out of. Our men out in the West got him."
"You're getting curious, huh? Want to know where your dad is? I'll tell you. He's in a secure location that he can't escape from. Our guys out West have him."
"What are they going to do with him?"
"What are they going to do with him?"
"Ah!" said Red, with an air of mystery. "What are they goin' to do with him? That's the question. One thing is certain—they're goin' to let him live until we collect ransom for you two."
"Ah!" said Red, with a hint of mystery. "What are they going to do with him? That’s the question. One thing's for sure—they're going to keep him alive until we get the ransom for you two."
"And after that?"
"And then what?"
"After that? Well, it's up to the boss. But I'm thinkin' he'll never let Fenton Hardy loose again. He's too dangerous. Maybe, now, my young friends—"
"After that? Well, it’s up to the boss. But I think he’ll never let Fenton Hardy go free again. He’s too dangerous. Maybe, now, my young friends—"
"Don't talk too much, Red," warned Pete, stirring the fire. "Put these kids all in the inner cave and let's go to sleep again."
"Don't talk too much, Red," Pete warned, poking the fire. "Let's get these kids settled in the inner cave and try to get some sleep again."
"I guess you're right, Pete," agreed the red-headed man. "It don't pay to let 'em know too much."
"I guess you're right, Pete," the red-headed man agreed. "It doesn't pay to let them know too much."
With that, the Hardy boys and their two chums were bundled into the other cave, where a long chain was passed beneath the links of their handcuffs and passed through a staple embedded in the rock. The chain was fastened with a heavy padlock. Frank's heart sank as he heard the padlock snapped. There seemed to be no hope of escape now. They were securely chained together in the darkness of the inner cave.
With that, the Hardy boys and their two friends were taken into another cave, where a long chain was threaded beneath the links of their handcuffs and attached to a staple nailed into the rock. The chain was secured with a heavy padlock. Frank felt a wave of despair as he heard the padlock click shut. It seemed like there was no chance of escaping now. They were tightly chained together in the darkness of the inner cave.
Their captors left them.
Their captors abandoned them.
"I guess you'll be safe enough in there until morning," grunted Pete as he departed, last of all. The gangsters returned to their fire and, after a brief discussion in low tones, they wrapped themselves up in their blankets once more.
"I think you'll be fine in there until morning," Pete muttered as he left, being the last one out. The gangsters went back to their fire and, after a quick chat in hushed voices, they bundled themselves up in their blankets again.
The boys talked in whispers. Chet and Biff were anxious to know how the Hardy boys had followed them to the island and, in a few words, Frank told them of the alarm their disappearance had occasioned and of how they had decided to take a chance on searching Blacksnake Island.
The boys spoke in hushed tones. Chet and Biff were eager to find out how the Hardy boys had tracked them down to the island, and in just a few words, Frank explained the worry that their disappearance had caused and how they had chosen to take a risk by searching Blacksnake Island.
"If only we could have got away!" muttered Joe. "We'd have been out toward the mainland in the boat by now!"
"If only we could have escaped!" Joe muttered. "We would have been on our way to the mainland in the boat by now!"
"If even one of us could have got away he could have gone for help," Frank whispered. "Oh, well—here we are, and we have to make the best of it!"
"If just one of us could have escaped, he could have gotten help," Frank whispered. "Oh, well—here we are, and we have to make the best of it!"
"I'm worried about what they said about dad."
"I'm concerned about what they said about dad."
"So am I. We've simply got to get out of here. If we can get word to the Chicago police they may be able to find him before it's too late!"
"So am I. We just have to get out of here. If we can get a message to the Chicago police, they might be able to find him before it's too late!"
The boys were silent. The news that Fenton Hardy had been captured and that he was in the hands of a merciless gang cast a cloud of gloom over them all. They realized only too well their own helplessness in the situation.
The boys were quiet. The news that Fenton Hardy had been taken and was in the hands of a ruthless gang filled them all with despair. They understood just how powerless they were in this situation.
"I'm going to try to smash the lock on this pair of handcuffs," Joe whispered finally. "It seemed rusty to me, when they put them on."
"I'm going to try to break the lock on these handcuffs," Joe whispered finally. "They seemed rusty to me when they put them on."
"We tried that with ours," whispered Chet. "It wasn't any use."
"We tried that with ours," Chet whispered. "It didn't help."
"I may have better luck."
"I might have better luck."
"Wait until you're sure the gang are asleep," whispered Biff. "They might hear you."
"Wait until you're sure the gang is asleep," whispered Biff. "They might hear you."
The boys lapsed into silence. The darkness of the cave was impenetrable. Near the entrance they could see a faint glow of pink from the embers of the fire in the outer cavern, but that was all. They could not even see one another.
The boys fell silent. The darkness of the cave was complete. Near the entrance, they could barely make out a faint pink glow from the embers of the fire in the outer cavern, but that was it. They couldn't even see each other.
The fact that they were chained together made it impossible for them to rest comfortably. The gangsters had not even provided them with a blanket.
The fact that they were chained together made it impossible for them to rest comfortably. The gangsters hadn’t even given them a blanket.
"We've been chained in here every night since they caught us," Chet whispered. "We've had to sleep on the bare rock."
"We've been locked up in here every night since they caught us," Chet whispered. "We've had to sleep on the cold stone."
Finally the silence was broken by the sound of steel against rock. Joe was trying to break the lock of his handcuffs. The effort was difficult, because his hands were cuffed behind him. But, as he had said, the handcuffs were rusty and of an antiquated type. Against the hard rock he could feel them gradually giving way.
Finally, the silence was shattered by the sound of metal hitting stone. Joe was trying to pick the lock on his handcuffs. It was tough because his hands were cuffed behind him. But, as he had mentioned, the handcuffs were old and rusty. Against the hard rock, he could feel them slowly starting to give.
For more than ten minutes he battered the lock, the steel digging into his wrists. He worked as quietly as possible, with long intervals between each attempt. For a while he was afraid the effort would be fruitless, as even the rusty steel seemed obdurate. Then, suddenly, he felt the lock give way. He eased his hands out of the cuffs with a sigh of relief.
For over ten minutes, he pounded on the lock, the metal digging into his wrists. He worked as quietly as he could, taking long breaks between each attempt. At one point, he worried that all his effort would be in vain, since even the rusty steel felt stubborn. Then, all of a sudden, he felt the lock budge. He slipped his hands out of the cuffs with a sigh of relief.
"I'm free," he whispered to the others.
"I'm free," he whispered to the others.
There were suppressed exclamations of delight.
There were muffled expressions of joy.
"How are you going to get us out?" whispered Frank.
"How are you going to get us out?" Frank whispered.
"I'll try to find the keys."
"I'll search for the keys."
A low murmur from the other cave arrested his attention. Swiftly he leaned back against the wall. One of the gangsters was awake. The boys listened. They heard a movement in the outer cave, a jangling of keys, and then a heavy footstep.
A soft whisper from the other cave caught his attention. Quickly, he leaned back against the wall. One of the gangsters was awake. The guys listened. They heard some movement in the outer cave, the jingling of keys, and then a heavy footstep.
Joe thrust his arms behind his back and feigned slumber. He could hear some one entering their cave.
Joe put his arms behind his back and pretended to be asleep. He could hear someone coming into their cave.
Suddenly a bright light flashed in his face. The man on guard had come to inspect the captives and he brought with him a flashlight. Joe kept his eyes closed and breathed heavily. He hoped desperately that the man would not inspect their handcuffs.
Suddenly, a bright light shone in his face. The guard had come to check on the captives and he brought a flashlight with him. Joe kept his eyes closed and breathed heavily. He desperately hoped the guard wouldn’t check their handcuffs.
The fellow appeared satisfied and in a few moments went away. Through narrowed eyelids Joe could see his dark form as he reached the passage between the two caves. He saw the round white circle of light shine for a moment on a small rock shelf in the passageway and he saw the guard reach up and toss a bundle of keys on the shelf. Then the man went on his way, switching out the light.
The guy seemed pleased and left a moment later. With his eyelids slightly closed, Joe could see him as he moved toward the gap between the two caves. He noticed the round white light flicker for a second on a small rock ledge in the passage, and he watched the guard lift his arm and throw a bundle of keys onto the ledge. Then the man continued on, turning off the light.
Joe's heart beat faster.
Joe's heart raced.
This was luck for which he had not dared hope. He now knew where the keys were kept. Could he but reach them without arousing the guard their chances of escape were multiplied tenfold.
This was luck he hadn’t dared to hope for. He now knew where the keys were kept. If he could just get to them without alerting the guard, their chances of escaping would increase tenfold.
He waited until it seemed that hours had passed. None of the boys dared so much as whisper. The silence was profound. From the outer cave they could hear snores, but whether the guard was asleep or not they could not tell.
He waited until it felt like hours had gone by. None of the boys dared to even whisper. The silence was deep. From the outer cave, they could hear snoring, but they couldn’t tell if the guard was asleep or not.
Joe realized that they would have to make their attempt before dawn, but he also knew that he could afford to wait, because the hours just before the break of day are the hours in which the average person sleeps most soundly, and there was every chance that the guard might be asleep by then as well.
Joe understood that they needed to make their move before dawn, but he also knew he could hold off for a bit longer because the time just before daybreak is when most people sleep the deepest, and there was a good chance the guard might be asleep by then too.
At last he decided that it was time to act.
At last, he decided it was time to take action.
He got up quietly and began to make his way across the cave. Inch by inch he crawled across the rocky floor. He scarcely dared breathe for fear of disturbing one of their captors.
He got up quietly and started to cross the cave. Bit by bit, he crawled over the rocky floor. He hardly dared to breathe for fear of waking one of their captors.
He was at the passage at last. The fire in the outer cave had died down. There was scarcely a vestige of light. This gave him hope, for it seemed to indicate that the guard had fallen asleep, otherwise he would have replenished the fire to protect himself against the night chill.
He finally reached the passage. The fire in the outer cave had burnt out. There was barely any light left. This made him hopeful, as it suggested that the guard had fallen asleep; otherwise, he would have fed the fire to guard against the night’s chill.
Joe groped for the little rock shelf. At first it eluded him, but at last his hand closed upon the keys. Carefully, he raised them, his hand clutching them tightly to prevent a betraying jangle of sound.
Joe reached for the small rock ledge. At first, he couldn't find it, but eventually, his hand grasped the keys. Slowly, he lifted them, holding on tightly to avoid making any noise.
He turned slowly to make his way back to the others. In silence he reached them and began to grope for the chain that bound them together. He found the chain at last, then the padlock, and felt in the darkness for the key to fit it.
He turned slowly to head back to the others. Without a word, he reached them and started to search for the chain that connected them. Finally, he found the chain, then the padlock, and felt in the dark for the key to unlock it.
The key at last! It was larger than the others, which he judged were the handcuff keys. The padlock snapped and he unhooked the chain.
The key at last! It was bigger than the others, which he guessed were the handcuff keys. The padlock clicked open and he unlatched the chain.
"That's that," he whispered, quietly. "Now for the handcuffs."
"That's it," he whispered softly. "Now for the handcuffs."
One by one the other boys presented their shackled wrists to him in the darkness and he groped for the key that would set them free. In a tense silence he fumbled with the locks and the handcuffs but, one by one, the handcuffs opened, one by one the boys moved quietly aside, rubbing their chafed wrists.
One by one, the other boys held out their restrained wrists to him in the darkness, and he searched for the key that would set them free. In a tense silence, he struggled with the locks and the handcuffs, but one by one, the cuffs clicked open, and one by one, the boys quietly stepped aside, rubbing their sore wrists.
At last the task was finished. They were free again.
At last, the job was done. They were free once more.
But there still remained the outer cave!
But there was still the outer cave!
CHAPTER XIX
Separated
Divided
Frank Hardy led the way.
Frank Hardy took the lead.
He paused in the passage for a few seconds, surveying the scene in the outer cave.
He stopped in the hallway for a few seconds, taking in the view in the outer cave.
All the men were asleep. They were rolled up in their blankets and lay sprawled in the shadows. There was merely a faint crimson glow from the embers of the fire.
All the men were asleep. They were bundled up in their blankets and lay sprawled in the shadows. There was just a faint red glow from the embers of the fire.
He did not go on all fours; he just crouched low as he moved across the cave among the sleepers. Quick, sure footsteps, as silent as those of a cat, brought him to the outer entrance.
He didn't crawl on all fours; he just crouched low as he moved through the cave among the sleepers. Quick, confident footsteps, as quiet as those of a cat, brought him to the outer entrance.
So much depended on their escape that the lads were uncannily silent. They seemed like mere shadows as they progressed, one by one, to the mouth of the cave. There was not a sound. The snores of the sleeping gangsters were unbroken.
So much depended on their escape that the guys were eerily quiet. They moved like shadows, one by one, toward the mouth of the cave. Not a sound was heard. The snores of the sleeping gangsters continued without interruption.
Frank waited at the entrance. Chet joined him in a few moments. Then came Biff, and finally Joe. Safely out of the cave, the boys halted for a second on the rocks.
Frank waited at the entrance. Chet joined him a few moments later. Then came Biff, and finally Joe. Safely out of the cave, the boys stopped for a second on the rocks.
"I'll take the lead," whispered Frank. "Join hands and follow me."
"I'll take the lead," Frank whispered. "Hold hands and follow me."
It was pitch dark and the rocky path to the outskirts of the wood, he knew, would be treacherous. He reached back and grasped Chet's hand. Then he moved forward, carefully testing every step. On him depended the success of their flight to the wood. One stumble, one dislodged rock, might ruin everything.
It was completely dark, and he knew that the rocky trail to the edge of the woods would be dangerous. He reached back and took Chet's hand. Then he moved forward, carefully checking each step. The success of their escape to the woods depended on him. One misstep, one loose rock, could mess everything up.
Step by step, he moved cautiously forward. He had a good idea of where the woods trail opened, and he made toward it. Once they reached the trail he felt sure they would be safe.
Step by step, he moved carefully forward. He knew where the woods trail opened up, and he headed toward it. Once they reached the trail, he was confident they would be safe.
Frank had an idea. He stopped and turned to the others.
Frank had an idea. He paused and turned to the others.
"If anything happens," he said, in a low voice, "don't stick together. Scatter and try to make for the boat. Even if only one of us makes it he'll be able to get to the mainland."
"If anything happens," he said quietly, "don't stay together. Spread out and head for the boat. Even if just one of us makes it, he'll be able to reach the mainland."
The others whispered assent. He turned and proceeded across the rocks.
The others murmured in agreement. He turned and walked across the rocks.
This safeguard, he felt, was wise. In case the gangsters discovered their escape they would prevent a repetition of the previous occurrence. In the darkness it was entirely probable that at least one, if not more, would be able to evade recapture.
This precaution, he thought, was smart. If the gangsters found out about their escape, it would keep a repeat of what happened before from happening. In the dark, it was quite likely that at least one, if not more, could manage to avoid being caught again.
But as he went on, his hopes rose. There was still not a sound from the cave in the rock. The darkness was in heavy silence.
But as he continued, his hopes began to rise. There was still no sound from the cave in the rock. The darkness was thick with silence.
He could faintly discern the black mass of trees and bushes before him. If they could only reach the trail!
He could barely make out the dark shapes of trees and bushes ahead of him. If only they could get to the path!
But when he eventually came to the undergrowth he found that he had somehow missed the path. The trees were densely massed before him. They would be certain to raise a commotion if they attempted to enter the thicket at that point, he knew. They would be certain of becoming lost as well. They must find the trail.
But when he finally reached the underbrush, he realized he had somehow missed the path. The trees were thick in front of him. He knew they would definitely make a noise if they tried to go into the bushes there. They would also be sure to get lost. They had to find the trail.
Every moment was precious. Frank moved to the left but the bushes were still dense in front of him.
Every moment was important. Frank shifted to the left, but the bushes were still thick in front of him.
Joe moved up beside him.
Joe stepped up beside him.
"I think the trail is farther over," he said quietly.
"I think the path is further ahead," he said softly.
Frank turned in the direction indicated.
Frank turned in the direction that was pointed out.
They found the trail at last. Joe and Frank were ahead. Chet and Biff followed. Here they were unable to avoid making some sound. Twigs and branches crackled underfoot. This was unavoidable, but every noise seemed deafening.
They finally found the trail. Joe and Frank led the way. Chet and Biff followed behind. They couldn't help but make some noise here. Twigs and branches snapped beneath their feet. It couldn't be helped, but every sound felt like it was booming.
Suddenly, from behind them, arose a terrific uproar.
Suddenly, a huge commotion broke out behind them.
Shouts, yells, the crash of a revolver, heavy footfalls, rent the silence into shreds. The sounds came from the cave.
Shouts, screams, the bang of a gun, heavy footsteps shattered the silence. The noise came from the cave.
"They're gone!" roared a voice. "Wake up! They're gone!"
"They're gone!" shouted a voice. "Wake up! They're gone!"
The boys remained stock-still for a moment in the gloom of the trail.
The boys stood frozen for a moment in the dim light of the trail.
"They'll be after us," said Frank quickly. "Take it easy. Make for the cove. I'll take the lead. Make as little noise as you can."
"They’ll be coming after us," Frank said quickly. "Calm down. Head for the cove. I’ll lead the way. Try to be as quiet as possible."
He started off at a trot, and the others followed. Behind them the uproar increased in volume. They could hear the gangsters shouting to one another; they could hear rocks clattering as their pursuers came running down from the cave.
He took off at a jog, and the others kept up. Behind them, the noise got louder. They could hear the gangsters yelling at each other; they could hear rocks tumbling as their pursuers rushed down from the cave.
Their erstwhile captors were rushing directly for the trail. They assumed that the boys would attempt to regain their boat as quickly as possible.
Their former captors were heading straight for the trail. They assumed that the boys would try to get back to their boat as quickly as they could.
A voice was shouting:
Someone was shouting:
"Head them off at the shore! Don't let them get to their boat!"
"Stop them at the shore! Don't let them reach their boat!"
The boys increased their speed. There was no attempt at concealment now. They could hear the branches crashing behind them as the gangsters hurried through the thicket.
The boys picked up their pace. There was no hiding now. They could hear the branches breaking behind them as the gangsters rushed through the brush.
In the pitch blackness of the grove they stumbled and fell, tripped and reeled as they rushed along.
In the pitch blackness of the grove, they stumbled and fell, tripped and swayed as they hurried along.
Chet and Biff, being unused to the trail, were obliged to travel at a slower pace, and in this way they dropped behind. The Hardy boys did not notice. There was such a confusion of sound in the grove, what with the noise of their own flight and the uproar of the pursuit, that they did not know that their chums were straggling.
Chet and Biff, not familiar with the trail, had to move more slowly, causing them to fall behind. The Hardy boys didn't realize this. There was so much noise in the grove from their own running and the chaos of the chase that they were unaware their friends were lagging.
At a fork in the trail, Frank and Joe headed to the left, the path leading downhill at this point, and toward the cove. They could hear the boom of the surf not far away and they knew that they were nearing their goal.
At a fork in the trail, Frank and Joe took the left path, which sloped downwards and toward the cove. They could hear the crashing waves nearby, and they knew they were getting close to their destination.
When Chet and Biff hastened up they failed to notice, in the inky blackness, that the trail branched two ways. Chet was in the lead and his footsteps brought him to the right. He could not hear the footsteps of the Hardy boys ahead but he judged that they were so far in advance that he could not hear them.
When Chet and Biff rushed up, they didn't notice, in the dark, that the path split into two directions. Chet was in the lead and his steps took him to the right. He couldn't hear the Hardy boys in front of him, but he figured they were so far ahead that he just couldn't catch their footsteps.
Their pursuers had become scattered. Some were pursuing them down the trail. Others were skirting the grove, intending to watch the shore. In the distance they could see occasional flashes of light. Once or twice there was a revolver shot.
Their pursuers had scattered. Some were chasing them down the trail. Others were moving around the grove, planning to keep an eye on the shore. In the distance, they could see occasional flashes of light. Once or twice, a gunshot rang out.
"It won't go so well with us if they see us this time," called Frank back to his brother.
"It won't go well for us if they see us this time," Frank shouted back to his brother.
"If we can only beat them to the boat we'll be all right," panted Joe.
"If we can just make it to the boat before them, we'll be fine," panted Joe.
They emerged from the grove. They could see the white line of the surf ahead and the gray shapes of the rocks along the shore. The cove lay below.
They came out of the grove. They could see the white line of the waves ahead and the gray shapes of the rocks along the shore. The cove was below.
The Hardy boys raced down the rocky slope. Only then did they become aware of the fact that their chums were not following.
The Hardy boys sprinted down the rocky slope. It was only then that they realized their friends weren't following them.
Frank stopped and turned.
Frank stopped and turned around.
"Where are Chet and Biff?" he asked, startled.
"Where are Chet and Biff?" he asked, surprised.
"I thought they were right behind," replied Joe blankly.
"I thought they were right behind," Joe replied, sounding lost.
They listened. There were no sounds of running footsteps down the trail. Back in the grove they could hear a frenzied crackling of branches, but whether it was caused by their comrades or by their pursuers they could not tell.
They listened. There were no sounds of running footsteps on the trail. Back in the grove, they could hear a frantic cracking of branches, but they couldn't tell if it was caused by their friends or their pursuers.
"They must have taken the wrong turning in the dark," declared Frank, as the solution dawned on him. "Quick—we'll get to the boat first! If we can find them we'll bring them with us. If we can't we'll have to make for the mainland alone."
"They must have taken the wrong turn in the dark," Frank said, as the solution hit him. "Quick—we'll get to the boat first! If we find them, we'll bring them with us. If we can't, we'll have to head for the mainland alone."
A flash of scarlet light showed against the blackness of the bush as a revolver crashed out, and a scattering of rock close by told them that the bullet had been meant for them. The gangsters were near at hand.
A flash of red light stood out against the darkness of the bushes as a revolver fired, and the sound of rocks scattering nearby told them that the bullet was aimed at them. The gangsters were close by.
Without another word the Hardy boys turned and dashed down the rocky trail leading to the cove. The path was precipitous and rocky. Joe stumbled once and fell headlong, but he was up again in an instant, spurred on by the fear that they would be recaptured. Frank reached the shore first. The motorboat was just where they had left it, but it was drawn up on the sands.
Without saying another word, the Hardy boys turned and raced down the rocky trail to the cove. The path was steep and uneven. Joe tripped once and fell flat, but he was back on his feet instantly, motivated by the fear of being caught again. Frank reached the shoreline first. The motorboat was exactly where they had left it, but it was pulled up onto the sand.
Joe raced up and the boys placed themselves, one on either side of the bow.
Joe rushed up, and the boys positioned themselves, one on each side of the bow.
"All right!" gritted Frank. "Ready!"
"Okay!" gritted Frank. "Ready!"
They shoved desperately at the motorboat, and it began to move slowly out into the water of the cove.
They pushed urgently against the motorboat, and it started to move slowly out into the water of the cove.
The gangsters were drawing closer. The boys heard heavy footfalls on the rocks at the outskirts of the grove.
The gangsters were getting closer. The boys heard heavy footsteps on the rocks at the edge of the grove.
Bang! Bang!
Bang! Bang!
The revolver crashed out again. Bullets splashed into the water. Desperately, the Hardy boys struggled with their boat.
The revolver fired again. Bullets splashed into the water. Desperately, the Hardy boys fought to control their boat.
At last the keel left the sand, and the boat slid out swiftly into the cove waters. Frank and Joe splashed out into the waves and began to scramble over the side.
At last, the keel lifted off the sand, and the boat slid quickly into the cove waters. Frank and Joe splashed into the waves and started to climb over the side.
Frank had a glimpse of a dark figure racing down the rocky slope toward them. He leaped to the engine.
Frank caught sight of a dark figure rushing down the rocky slope toward them. He jumped to the engine.
"Here they are!" roared a voice.
"Here they are!" shouted a voice.
More footsteps came running along the shore. The gangsters were converging toward the cove. Frank worked hastily over the engine. There was a splutter and a roar as the motor responded. The boat began to back slowly out of the cove.
More footsteps ran along the shore. The gangsters were gathering at the cove. Frank hurriedly worked on the engine. There was a sputter and a roar as the motor kicked in. The boat began to slowly back out of the cove.
"Keep down," he cautioned his brother.
"Stay down," he warned his brother.
Joe ducked, and not a moment too soon, for a fusillade of shots suddenly crashed out from the shore. Bullets whistled overhead. Wood splintered as one of them struck the side of the boat. Frank heard a heavy splashing in the water and judged that one of the gangsters was wading out in pursuit.
Joe ducked, and just in time, as a barrage of shots erupted from the shore. Bullets whizzed overhead. Wood splintered when one of the bullets hit the side of the boat. Frank heard a loud splash in the water and realized that one of the gangsters was wading in after them.
The boat moved slowly out to the entrance of the cove. In the darkness it was a ticklish performance. Frank doubted if he could make it. At any time it demanded careful steersmanship, and now there was no time for caution. The cove entrance was merely a faint gray blur against the darkness of the rocks on either side. He guided the Sleuth toward it.
The boat slowly made its way to the entrance of the cove. In the dark, it was a tricky maneuver. Frank wasn’t sure if he could do it. It required careful steering at all times, but now there was no room for hesitation. The cove entrance was just a faint gray smudge against the dark rocks on either side. He steered the Sleuth toward it.
Shots crashed and echoed from the shore. A dark form suddenly rose up beside the boat, with revolver upraised, but Joe launched himself on the man with surprising suddenness. His fist shot out and crashed into the gangster's face. With a muffled cry, the fellow stumbled back and lost his balance, going beneath the waves. He rose again in a moment, waist-deep in water, spluttering and choking, but by that time the Sleuth was several yards away and the water was too deep to permit the fellow to wade out any farther. His revolver was useless, and he began to make his way back to shore, growling to himself.
Shots crashed and echoed from the shore. A dark figure suddenly appeared next to the boat, revolver raised, but Joe launched himself at the guy with surprising speed. His fist shot out and slammed into the gangster's face. With a muffled cry, the guy stumbled back and lost his balance, going under the waves. He surfaced again a moment later, waist-deep in water, sputtering and choking, but by that time the Sleuth was several yards away and the water was too deep for him to wade out any further. His revolver was useless, and he started making his way back to shore, grumbling to himself.
The motorboat reached the cove entrance. The rocks loomed high on either side.
The motorboat arrived at the cove entrance. The rocks towered high on both sides.
Frank held his breath. At any moment he expected to hear the dread sound of the scraping rocks, but the Sleuth glided through the narrow channel without mishap, then shot out to the open sea. He spun the wheel about, brought the boat forward, and a moment later the engine was roaring its staccato defiance to the gangsters in the cove.
Frank held his breath. At any moment he expected to hear the terrifying sound of the scraping rocks, but the Sleuth smoothly navigated through the narrow channel without any trouble, then burst out into the open sea. He quickly turned the wheel, moved the boat forward, and a moment later the engine was roaring defiantly at the gangsters in the cove.
Frank looked back. He could see flashlights bobbing up and down on the beach.
Frank looked back. He could see flashlights moving up and down on the beach.
"They're going for their own boats!" he exclaimed.
"They're getting their own boats!" he exclaimed.
Then, with a grim smile, he bent forward over the wheel. Instead of heading the motorboat out to the open sea, he directed it along the shore, toward the distant cove where the gangsters had hidden their own craft.
Then, with a tight smile, he leaned forward over the wheel. Instead of steering the motorboat out to the open sea, he guided it along the shore, towards the distant cove where the gangsters had concealed their own boat.
CHAPTER XX
Seizing the Boats
Taking the Boats
"What are you going to do, Frank?" shouted Joe Hardy.
"What are you gonna do, Frank?" shouted Joe Hardy.
"They're going after their boats. We know the cove they're in, and if we can get there first I'll tow them out to sea. Then they can't follow us!"
"They're heading for their boats. We know which cove they’re in, and if we can get there first, I’ll tow them out to sea. Then they won’t be able to follow us!"
Thus Frank briefly outlined his daring scheme to his brother. He knew that the gangsters would not expect any such intention and he knew as well that only by some action of this kind could he avoid danger of capture. If the gangsters followed in their own boats there was every chance that they might overtake or outmaneuver the Sleuth. Even if they did not, as long as they retained possession of their own motorboats they could make good their escape. But once marooned on the island, they would be at the mercy of the Hardy boys.
Thus Frank briefly outlined his bold plan to his brother. He realized that the gangsters wouldn't anticipate such a move, and he also understood that only by taking action like this could he avoid the risk of being caught. If the gangsters pursued them in their own boats, there was a real chance they could catch up to or outsmart the Sleuth. Even if they didn’t, as long as the gangsters kept their own motorboats, they could easily make their escape. But once stuck on the island, they would be at the mercy of the Hardy boys.
"We'll have to hurry!" said Joe anxiously.
"We need to hurry!" Joe said anxiously.
He watched the progress of the flashlights on the shore. The Sleuth was well ahead, but the seizure of the boats would take some time. The gangsters were making their way slowly over the rocks on their way to the cove.
He watched the flashlights moving along the shore. The Sleuth was far ahead, but it would take a while to get the boats. The gangsters were slowly navigating the rocks on their way to the cove.
Frank increased the speed of the boat. It leaped through the waves, the motor roaring. The flashlights on the shore were left far behind.
Frank sped up the boat. It soared over the waves, the engine roaring. The flashlights on the shore were quickly left behind.
"We'll make it!" he shouted gleefully to Joe, the spray dashing against his face. He could distinguish the jutting headland that told him the location of the coves.
"We'll make it!" he shouted happily to Joe, the spray splashing against his face. He could see the protruding headland that indicated the location of the coves.
The men on the shore finally seemed to realize his intention. The boys could now hear frantic shouts as the men called to one another and made desperate efforts to reach the boats. But the Sleuth had outstripped them and they were left stumbling among the rocks along the beach.
The men on the shore finally seemed to understand what he was trying to do. The boys could now hear frantic shouts as the men called to each other and made desperate attempts to reach the boats. But the Sleuth had surpassed them, and they were left tripping over the rocks along the beach.
The motorboat swept around the headland and into the cove. Frank had switched on the searchlight above the bow, and in its glare he could see the two motorboats belonging to the gang.
The motorboat rounded the headland and entered the cove. Frank had turned on the searchlight above the bow, and in its beam, he could see the two motorboats belonging to the gang.
It was the work of but a minute to bring the Sleuth alongside, for the craft were riding at anchor. Joe seized a length of rope from the stern, then stood in readiness while his brother brought the Sleuth close to the side of the first craft. He leaped lightly into the other motorboat, lashed one end of the rope to the bow, then returned to the Sleuth again, tying the loose end of the rope securely, so that the motorboat could be towed.
It took just a minute to pull the Sleuth alongside because the boat was anchored. Joe grabbed a length of rope from the back and waited while his brother maneuvered the Sleuth close to the other boat. He jumped easily into the other motorboat, tied one end of the rope to the front, then went back to the Sleuth to secure the loose end of the rope, making it ready to tow the motorboat.
Swiftly, Frank brought his boat around to the bow of the remaining craft, where the process was repeated. Joe snubbed one end of a length of stout rope to the bow, the other to the stern of the next boat. The two craft were now ready to be towed away by the Sleuth.
Swiftly, Frank turned his boat to the front of the remaining vessel, where they repeated the process. Joe secured one end of a thick rope to the front and the other end to the back of the next boat. The two vessels were now ready to be towed away by the Sleuth.
There was a sharp clattering of rock from among the bluffs near the cove. Then a shout:
There was a loud clattering of rocks from the bluffs near the cove. Then a shout:
"Red! They're stealing the boats!"
"Red! They're taking the boats!"
"Head 'em off!" roared another voice frantically from behind. "Don't let them get away!"
"Cut them off!" shouted another voice desperately from behind. "Don’t let them escape!"
But already the engine of the Sleuth was roaring its message of triumph to the pursuers. Slowly, the motorboat began to make its way out of the cove.
But already the engine of the Sleuth was roaring its message of triumph to the pursuers. Slowly, the motorboat began to make its way out of the cove.
And slowly, the ropes tightened. The two motorboats began moving behind. Joe had raised the anchor in each case and the craft were free to follow the lead boat.
And slowly, the ropes got tighter. The two motorboats started moving behind. Joe had raised the anchor in each case, and the boats were free to follow the lead boat.
There was a yell of dismay from the shore.
There was a shout of shock from the shore.
"They're starting out! They've got the boats!"
"They're setting sail! They've got the boats!"
This was followed by a fusillade of shots. The man on the beach opened fire, and his companion farther back among the rocks did likewise. Bullets whistled past the Sleuth. But, in the darkness, the men on shore could take but indifferent aim. Frank had switched out the headlight and the gangsters could see only a ghostly gray shadow on the water.
This was followed by a barrage of gunfire. The man on the beach started shooting, and his partner further back among the rocks did the same. Bullets zipped past the Sleuth. However, in the darkness, the men on shore had a hard time aiming accurately. Frank had turned off the headlights, and the gangsters could only see a faint gray shadow on the water.
The Sleuth picked up speed and the two motorboats behind began to rock and sway as they surged forward. Frank knew that he could not go too fast, otherwise the boats that he was towing would run foul of one another or of his own craft and cause disaster. He contented himself by moving ahead at a moderate rate of speed, knowing well that once he cleared the cove he could afford to snap his fingers at the gangsters marooned on the island.
The Sleuth accelerated, and the two motorboats behind started to rock and sway as they rushed forward. Frank realized he couldn’t go too fast, or the boats he was towing might collide with each other or with his own boat, leading to disaster. He was satisfied to move ahead at a steady pace, fully aware that once he cleared the cove, he could easily disregard the gangsters stranded on the island.
Shouts interspersed with revolver shots told him of their pursuers' wrath. The flashlights danced like fireflies. The full extent of the trick that had been played upon them was just beginning to dawn on the men marooned on the shore.
Shouts mixed with gunfire signaled the anger of their pursuers. The flashlights flickered like fireflies. The gravity of the trick that had been pulled on them was just starting to hit the men stranded on the shore.
The headland loomed to the side, then slipped slowly by. The motorboat was throbbing its way out to open water.
The headland appeared alongside, then gradually passed by. The motorboat was pulsating its way out to the open water.
"We've beaten 'em," declared Frank exultantly.
"We've beaten them," Frank declared excitedly.
"I'll say we have! They'll never get off that island unless they swim."
"I'll say we have! They won't get off that island unless they swim."
"From the fuss they're making, they seem to know it, too."
"Based on all the drama they're causing, it looks like they know it too."
"Where to now?"
"Where to next?"
"The mainland. If we can get to Rock Harbor we'll get help."
"The mainland. If we can reach Rock Harbor, we'll get help."
"How about Chet and Biff?" asked Joe soberly.
"How about Chet and Biff?" Joe asked seriously.
"We can't afford to take a chance on bringing them off the island just now. I hate to desert them, but we can't do anything else. If we went back for them we'd likely undo everything we've done so far. But I think they'll be safe enough. They'll hide in the bushes. Those fellows have been so busy chasing us that they haven't had any time to worry about them."
"We can't risk bringing them off the island right now. I really hate leaving them behind, but we don’t have any other choice. If we go back for them, we’ll probably ruin everything we’ve accomplished up to this point. But I think they’ll be fine. They can hide in the bushes. Those guys have been so focused on chasing us that they haven't had time to think about them."
"Perhaps they think we all got away."
"Maybe they think we all escaped."
"If they do they won't be hunting around for Chet and Biff. In any case, we had the agreement that even if only one of us got away he would come back with help for the rest. They'll know we'll be back."
"If they do, they won't be looking for Chet and Biff. Anyway, we agreed that even if just one of us escaped, he would return with help for the others. They'll know we'll be back."
"So will the gangsters. I'll bet they're worrying about how they can clear away from this island before we get back."
"So will the gangsters. I bet they're stressing about how to escape this island before we return."
Frank headed the boat for the mainland. It was his intention, as he had said, to make his way to Rock Harbor, where they could secure help—officers and men to come back with them to Blacksnake Island to aid in the rescue of their chums and in the capture of the gangsters.
Frank steered the boat toward the mainland. As he had mentioned, he planned to head to Rock Harbor, where they could get help—officers and men to return with them to Blacksnake Island to assist in the rescue of their friends and in capturing the gangsters.
There was the chance, of course, that the latter might have a canoe or a skiff hidden somewhere on the island, but he did not think they would trust themselves to the open water of the channel in any such frail craft. He felt convinced that by seizing the two motorboats they had effectually marooned their enemies.
There was a chance, of course, that the latter might have a canoe or a small boat hidden somewhere on the island, but he didn’t think they would risk going into the open water of the channel in such a fragile craft. He was sure that by taking the two motorboats, they had effectively stranded their enemies.
They passed the last jutting point of the sinister island and the bow of the Sleuth was headed toward the coast.
They passed the last protruding point of the eerie island, and the bow of the Sleuth was aimed toward the shore.
"Perhaps we won't have to go all the way to Rock Harbor," suggested Joe. "If we could meet a ship we might get help."
"Maybe we won't need to go all the way to Rock Harbor," Joe suggested. "If we could meet up with a ship, we might be able to get assistance."
"It seems to me I see a light now. Running low on the water. Do you see it?"
"It looks like I see a light now. We're almost out of water. Do you see it?"
Joe peered into the darkness.
Joe looked into the dark.
"I believe you're right," he said finally. "It seems to be coming this way, too."
"I think you're right," he said at last. "It looks like it's coming this way, too."
"Perhaps some more of the gang."
"Maybe some more of the crew."
"I hadn't thought of that. Better not go too close."
"I hadn't thought of that. It’s best not to get too close."
Frank eyed the approaching light warily. It was just a faint gleam in the darkness and he judged it was from a motorboat which was most certainly bound toward Blacksnake Island. Eventually he could hear the steady throb of the engine.
Frank watched the approaching light cautiously. It was just a faint glimmer in the dark, and he figured it was coming from a motorboat definitely heading toward Blacksnake Island. Eventually, he could hear the steady beating of the engine.
After a moment or so he started up excitedly.
After a moment, he jumped up excitedly.
"Joe! I'd know that engine anywhere."
"Joe! I’d recognize that engine anywhere."
"So would I! It's—"
"So would I! It’s—"
"The Napoli!"
"The Napoli!"
He spun the wheel about so that the Sleuth would cut across the bows of the approaching craft. Steadily, through the darkness, came the throbbing of the engine, and as the boat came closer the Hardy boys became more and more convinced that it was Tony Prito's craft.
He turned the wheel so that the Sleuth would cut across the front of the approaching boat. Gradually, through the darkness, the sound of the engine grew louder, and as the boat got closer, the Hardy boys became more and more sure that it was Tony Prito's boat.
"I've been wondering what became of him," Frank declared. "When he didn't show up earlier I began to think he must have had to call off the trip."
"I've been wondering what happened to him," Frank said. "When he didn't show up earlier, I started to think he must have had to cancel the trip."
"It may not be him after all, but I'm sure it's his boat. If it isn't I'll never believe my ears again."
"It might not be him after all, but I’m positive it’s his boat. If it’s not, I’ll never trust my ears again."
The two boats approached one another. Frank shut down the engine of the Sleuth, rose from his seat, and shouted:
The two boats came closer together. Frank turned off the engine of the Sleuth, got up from his seat, and yelled:
"Napoli, ahoy!"
"Hey, Napoli!"
Almost immediately the roar of the other engine died to a murmur and a well-known voice replied:
Almost immediately, the roar of the other engine faded to a quiet hum, and a familiar voice responded:
"This is the Napoli. Who are you?"
"This is the Napoli. Who are you?"
It was the voice of Tony Prito. Joe gave a yell of delight.
It was Tony Prito's voice. Joe shouted with joy.
"It's us!" shouted Frank. "The Hardy boys!"
"It's us!" yelled Frank. "The Hardy Boys!"
They could hear sounds of excited talking in the other boat, and a suppressed cheer.
They could hear excited chatter coming from the other boat, along with a stifled cheer.
"Coming over!" Tony called out, and in a few minutes the two boats had drawn up alongside. In the glare of the headlight Frank and Joe could see Tony Prito, Jerry Gilroy and Phil Cohen.
"Coming over!" Tony shouted, and in a few minutes, the two boats pulled up next to each other. In the bright light from the headlight, Frank and Joe could see Tony Prito, Jerry Gilroy, and Phil Cohen.
Their greetings were cut short when the boys saw the two trailing boats and Frank tersely explained the situation.
Their greetings were interrupted when the boys spotted the two boats following them, and Frank briefly explained what was happening.
"You couldn't have come at a better time. We found Chet and Biff on the island. They're still there. We tried to escape, but got separated and only Joe and I got away. Chet and Biff are in hiding somewhere and we stole the other motorboats."
"You couldn't have arrived at a better moment. We found Chet and Biff on the island. They're still there. We tried to escape but got separated, and only Joe and I made it out. Chet and Biff are hiding somewhere, and we took the other motorboats."
"Whose motorboats?" asked Jerry.
"Whose boats?" asked Jerry.
"Chet and Biff were captured by a gang of crooks who mistook them for us. These fellows had a cave on the island and two motorboats of their own. When we made our get-away we towed their boats away with us so the men are all marooned there."
"Chet and Biff were captured by a group of criminals who confused them for us. These guys had a cave on the island and owned two motorboats. When we escaped, we towed their boats away with us, leaving the men stranded there."
A chorus of excited questions broke forth as the newcomers demanded further details, but Frank went on:
A flurry of eager questions erupted as the newcomers asked for more information, but Frank continued:
"We're going to the mainland for help. What we want you to do is take charge of these two motorboats and keep cruising around the island to see that the gang doesn't get away."
"We're heading to the mainland for help. What we need you to do is take charge of these two motorboats and keep circling the island to make sure the gang doesn't escape."
"Good!" approved Phil. "And if we can pick up Chet and Biff we'll do it."
"Great!" Phil said. "And if we can get Chet and Biff, we'll do it."
"If you can, without letting the gang get hold of those boats again."
"If you can, without letting the group get their hands on those boats again."
"Fine!" Tony declared. "We'll take the boats. Throw over that rope."
"Fine!" Tony said. "We'll use the boats. Toss over that rope."
He caught the rope deftly, and the captured motorboats were soon being towed by the Napoli, leaving the Hardy boys' craft free for its flight to the mainland.
He skillfully grabbed the rope, and the captured motorboats were soon being towed by the Napoli, allowing the Hardy boys' boat to head to the mainland.
"We'll be back as soon as we can," called out Frank.
"We'll be back as soon as we can," shouted Frank.
"We'll be watching for you."
"We'll be watching for you."
"Good. No use wasting any more time. Good luck!"
"Great. No point in wasting any more time. Good luck!"
"Good luck!" shouted the others.
"Good luck!" shouted the others.
Frank bent over the wheel again. The engine of the Sleuth roared as the speedy craft turned toward the mainland. The Napoli, in its turn, began to forge ahead toward Blacksnake Island, its speed somewhat lessened now by the drag of the captured boats. Tony, Jerry and Phil were agog with excitement over this strange encounter in the darkness and the sensational news the Hardy boys had given them.
Frank leaned over the wheel again. The engine of the Sleuth roared as the fast boat headed toward the mainland. The Napoli, meanwhile, started to move ahead toward Blacksnake Island, its speed slightly reduced now by the weight of the captured boats. Tony, Jerry, and Phil were bursting with excitement over this unusual encounter in the dark and the thrilling news the Hardy boys had shared with them.
So the two motorboats went their separate ways in the darkness of the night—one to the mainland, the other toward the sinister island where Chet Morton and Biff Hooper were marooned with the gangsters.
So the two motorboats headed off in different directions into the dark of night—one towards the mainland, the other heading for the eerie island where Chet Morton and Biff Hooper were stranded with the gangsters.
CHAPTER XXI
At the Island
On the Island
In the meantime, what of Chet Morton and Biff Hooper?
In the meantime, what about Chet Morton and Biff Hooper?
When they took the wrong turn in the trail it was some time before they realized that the Hardy boys were not running along before them. They were blundering along through the undergrowth, in complete darkness, trusting to their chums to guide them through, when finally Chet stopped, panting.
When they took the wrong turn on the trail, it took them a while to notice that the Hardy boys weren't ahead of them anymore. They were stumbling through the underbrush in total darkness, relying on their friends to lead the way, when Chet finally stopped, out of breath.
"Frank and Joe must be running like deer," he muttered. "I can't hear them at all."
"Frank and Joe must be running fast," he muttered. "I can't hear them at all."
"We were all mighty close together a little while ago," returned Biff.
"We were all really close together not too long ago," Biff replied.
"I know. And they seem to have disappeared all of a sudden." The thought struck Chet that they might be on the wrong trail. "Do you think we could have taken a wrong turn?"
"I know. And it feels like they just vanished out of nowhere." The idea hit Chet that they might be on the wrong track. "Do you think we could have gone the wrong way?"
Biff listened. "There's no one ahead of us, that's sure," he said at last. "We must have got separated."
Biff listened. "There's nobody in front of us, that's for sure," he finally said. "We must have gotten separated."
As this conviction forced itself upon them, the two lads were overwhelmed with disappointment. They knew that the Hardy boys would have little enough time to gain the boat and escape without waiting for them, and at the thought that they might be again left on the island at the mercy of their captors they were profoundly discouraged.
As this realization hit them, the two boys were filled with disappointment. They knew that the Hardy boys would have barely any time to reach the boat and escape without waiting for them, and the thought of being left on the island again at the mercy of their captors deeply discouraged them.
"We're up against it again, I guess," declared Chet. "Well, I think we'd better follow this trail anyway, wherever it leads to. Remember what Frank said—that if even one of us reached the boat safely he could get to the mainland and bring back help for the rest."
"We're in a tough spot again, I guess," Chet said. "Well, I think we should follow this trail anyway, no matter where it goes. Remember what Frank said—that if just one of us makes it to the boat safely, he can get to the mainland and bring back help for the rest."
"Yes, that's right. It isn't as bad as it might be."
"Yes, that's true. It's not as bad as it could be."
"I only hope the gang don't capture them before they make the boat safely. Listen!"
"I just hope the gang doesn’t catch them before they get to the boat safely. Listen!"
They stopped in their tracks and listened as the night wind bore to their ears the sound of gunfire from the beach. It was far over to one side of them. They could hear distant shouts, then the spasmodic firing of revolvers followed again.
They halted and listened as the night breeze carried the sound of gunfire from the beach to them. It was far off to one side. They heard distant shouts, followed by the sporadic firing of revolvers once more.
"They must be having a sweet time. I guess the gang are trying to keep them from getting the boat," said Chet.
"They must be having a great time. I bet the group is trying to stop them from getting the boat," said Chet.
Then they heard the muffled roar of the motorboat in the cove.
Then they heard the distant roar of the motorboat in the cove.
"They're getting away!" declared Biff, in excitement. "You can hear the boat backing out."
"They're getting away!" Biff exclaimed, thrilled. "You can hear the boat backing out."
More revolver shots—more shouts—the roar of the Sleuth's engine continued.
More gunshots—more shouting—the roar of the Sleuth's engine kept going.
"As long as they get away safely I'm not worrying much," Chet said. "Just the same, I'd rather be with them. But they'll bring back help."
"As long as they get away safely, I’m not too worried," Chet said. "Still, I’d prefer to be with them. But they’ll come back with help."
"In the meantime, the best thing we can do is to hide."
"In the meantime, the best thing we can do is to stay under the radar."
"The gang will be scouring the island for us now that they know we didn't get away with the others. And they won't be any too gentle with us either, if they get us."
"The group will be searching the island for us now that they know we didn't escape with the others. And they won't be very easy on us either, if they catch us."
Chet and Biff decided that it would be best to get as near the shore as possible before concealing themselves, so as to be ready for a rush to safety should the Hardy boys return with the promised assistance. By the sound of the motorboat and the shooting, they judged that the narrow trail led toward the shore, so they followed it as well as they could in the darkness. The wet branches slashed their faces and they stumbled over roots and slipped in the wet, deep grass, but gradually the sound of the breaking surf drew closer and they knew they were coming nearer to the beach.
Chet and Biff decided it would be best to get as close to the shore as possible before hiding, so they would be ready to rush to safety if the Hardy boys returned with the promised help. From the sound of the motorboat and the gunfire, they figured the narrow trail led to the shore, so they followed it as best as they could in the dark. The wet branches whipped their faces, and they tripped over roots and slipped in the wet, tall grass, but slowly, the sound of the crashing waves got louder, and they knew they were getting closer to the beach.
The path suddenly dipped and they descended a slope, finally emerging from the trees to find themselves on a rocky hillside overlooking the gray shore. They could see the white foam of the breaking rollers, and the gray rocks below but there was no sign of motorboat or of any human being.
The path suddenly sloped down, and they went down a hill, finally stepping out from the trees to find themselves on a rocky hillside looking over the gray shore. They could see the white foam of the crashing waves and the gray rocks below, but there was no sign of a motorboat or any person.
"We may as well stay right on this hillside, behind the rocks," Chet suggested. "If we go roaming about the shore we're likely to run into Red and his gang."
"We might as well stay right here on this hillside, behind the rocks," Chet suggested. "If we go wandering around the shore, we’re probably going to run into Red and his gang."
"Perhaps they've taken their own boats and gone after the Hardy boys."
"Maybe they took their own boats and went after the Hardy boys."
"They may have. But we can't take a chance on it. If any of them are prowling around it would be just our luck to meet them."
"They might have. But we can’t risk it. If any of them are lurking around, it would be just our luck to run into them."
The chums made themselves as comfortable as possible in the shelter of a huge rock, from which they had a good view of the shore and the sea beyond. It was still dark and they had little hope of rescue before morning.
The friends settled in as comfortably as they could underneath a large rock, where they had a clear view of the shore and the sea beyond. It was still dark, and they had little hope of being rescued before morning.
"It'll take them quite a while to get to the mainland and rouse any one to come out here to help us," remarked Chet. "The big thing is for us to keep hidden until daylight and then lay low until we see a chance of rescue."
"It'll take them a long time to reach the mainland and find someone to come out here to help us," Chet said. "The important thing is for us to stay hidden until morning and then remain quiet until we see a chance for rescue."
"You can trust me to lay low. I've no hankering to be dragged back to that cave again."
"You can count on me to keep it low-key. I don’t want to be dragged back to that cave again."
"Me neither."
"Me neither."
The boys lapsed into silence. They realized that conversation was dangerous. At any moment some member of the gang might be venturing near and might hear their voices.
The boys fell silent. They understood that talking could be risky. At any moment, someone from the gang could come close and hear them.
From a distant side of the island they suddenly heard more shots. They broke out in a perfect fusillade of gunfire, and the rocks flung back the echoes, mingled with yells of rage. At the same time, they again heard the sound of the Sleuth's engine, slower this time, as though the craft were but crawling along.
From a remote part of the island, they suddenly heard more gunfire. It erupted in a perfect volley of shots, and the rocks bounced back the echoes, mixed with shouts of anger. At the same time, they heard the sound of the Sleuth's engine again, but this time it was slower, as if the boat were just creeping along.
"I can't understand this," said Chet. "We heard them leave the cove a little while ago. Now they're away down the shore and going slow."
"I don't get this," said Chet. "We heard them leave the cove a little while ago. Now they're way down the shore and moving slowly."
"Perhaps they're having engine trouble," said Biff mournfully.
"Maybe they're having engine trouble," Biff said sadly.
"I can't figure it out at all. It's tough to be sitting here in the dark, not knowing whether they've got away or not."
"I can't figure it out at all. It's hard to be sitting here in the dark, not knowing if they've gotten away or not."
"I don't dare let myself think they haven't got away," declared Biff, with determination.
"I can't let myself believe they got away," Biff stated firmly.
An hour passed. The sounds of the motorboat had long since died away. Once in a while the chums heard voices back in the grove and they knew that at least some of the gangsters had been left on the island. Whether the others had left in pursuit of the Hardy boys, they could not tell. Had they known of the Hardys' coup in taking the gangsters' two boats they would have felt more relieved in mind. The chill of approaching morning had settled over the island, and they huddled together in the shelter of the rock, seeking warmth.
An hour went by. The sounds of the motorboat had faded away. Every now and then, the friends heard voices coming from the grove, and they realized that at least some of the gangsters were still on the island. They couldn't tell if the others had gone after the Hardy boys. If they had known about the Hardys' move in taking the gangsters' two boats, they would have felt more at ease. The chill of the approaching morning had settled over the island, and they huddled together under the rock for warmth.
Suddenly, from the sea, they heard the steady chug-chug of a motorboat that seemed to be progressing slowly along in close proximity to the shore. They looked out and they could see a headlight slowly moving through the darkness.
Suddenly, from the sea, they heard the steady chugging of a motorboat that seemed to be moving slowly along the shore. They looked out and could see a headlight slowly moving through the darkness.
"It's a motorboat, but it's traveling very slowly," said Chet.
"It's a motorboat, but it's going really slowly," Chet said.
"Let's take a chance and hail them."
"Let's take a chance and call them over."
"It might be some of the gang."
"It could be some of the group."
"That's right. But we can go down closer to the shore and see. It may be Frank and Joe looking for us."
"That's right. But we can go down closer to the shore and check it out. It might be Frank and Joe searching for us."
The two lads left the shelter of the rocks and began moving cautiously toward the beach. They realized that there was every chance that the mysterious craft might be one of the gangsters' boats and that they would be risking recapture by making their presence known. But, on the other hand, it might be the Hardy boys returning in an effort to pick them up.
The two guys left the safety of the rocks and started making their way carefully toward the beach. They understood that there was a good chance that the mysterious boat could belong to the gangsters and that revealing themselves could lead to being caught again. But, on the other hand, it might be the Hardy boys coming back to try to pick them up.
They had gone no more than a few yards when a loud voice only a short distance away made them jump with surprise:
They had barely gone a few yards when a loud voice nearby made them jump in surprise:
"Is that one of our boats, Pete?"
"Is that one of our boats, Pete?"
"No. I don't know it at all. There's something funny about this."
"No. I don't know anything about it. There's something off about this."
A rock clattered down the slope. Chet looked back. Two dark figures appeared in sight at the top of the declivity.
A rock tumbled down the slope. Chet glanced back. Two dark shapes came into view at the top of the hill.
The two parties saw one another at the same time.
The two groups noticed each other at the same moment.
"Here they are!" roared one of the men, and he plunged down the slope straight at the astonished boys.
"Here they are!" shouted one of the men, and he charged down the slope right at the stunned boys.
The other man came running after him. The first impulse of the two chums was to run, but they saw that flight would be useless. They were midway on the hillside leading to the beach and the path was treacherous with rocks and loose gravel. They would be overtaken in a moment.
The other guy came running after him. The first instinct of the two friends was to take off, but they realized that running away wouldn't help. They were halfway up the hill leading to the beach, and the path was risky with rocks and loose gravel. They’d be caught up to in no time.
"Fight 'em!" said Chet, gritting his teeth.
"Fight them!" Chet said, through clenched teeth.
The boys stood their ground. The two gangsters, one of whom they recognized as Pete, came floundering down the slope. They had started out in such a rush that now they were not well able to stop, and as the pair came at them the two chums braced themselves for the shock.
The boys held their position. The two gangsters, one of whom they recognized as Pete, came stumbling down the hill. They had rushed in so quickly that they couldn’t stop in time, and as the pair approached them, the two friends braced for the impact.
Biff met the first man squarely. His passion for boxing now stood him in good stead. He judged his distance perfectly. As the fellow came at him, arms swinging, he drove a straight left to the fellow's midriff.
Biff faced the first man directly. His love for boxing was now paying off. He gauged the distance perfectly. As the guy approached him, swinging his arms, Biff delivered a straight left punch to the guy's stomach.
The gangster gasped and doubled up with pain. He wavered for a moment, then Biff swung. His right fist crashed against the man's jaw, and the gangster toppled over on his face. He rolled over in the gravel a few times, then came to a stop, sprawled senseless on the hillside.
The gangster gasped and doubled over in pain. He hesitated for a moment, then Biff swung. His right fist slammed into the man's jaw, and the gangster fell forward onto his face. He rolled around in the gravel a few times, then came to a stop, sprawled out and unconscious on the hillside.
As for Chet, he made use of strategy. When the second man rushed at him he sidestepped neatly.
As for Chet, he used strategy. When the second guy charged at him, he sidestepped smoothly.
His right foot went out. The gangster tripped over it and, so great had been the force of his rush and so sudden was his downfall, that he went ploughing forward on his face for several yards until he came to a ledge of rock. He made frantic efforts to save himself as he felt that he was going over the side, but his descent could not be checked. Chet had a glimpse of desperately waving arms and kicking legs; then his adversary disappeared with a crash. The ledge was only a few feet from the beach, but it was certain that the fall would knock the breath out of the gangster's body for several minutes at least.
His right foot stuck out. The gangster tripped over it, and due to the force of his charge and the suddenness of his fall, he went tumbling forward on his face for several yards until he hit a ledge of rock. He desperately tried to save himself as he felt himself going over the edge, but there was no stopping his fall. Chet caught a glimpse of flailing arms and kicking legs; then his opponent vanished with a crash. The ledge was only a few feet from the shore, but it was clear that the fall would wind the gangster for several minutes at least.
Without another word the boys scrambled back up the hillside. They knew that the gangsters would recover quickly and that the alarm would soon be sounded. They must hide, and that quickly.
Without saying another word, the boys rushed back up the hillside. They knew the gangsters would bounce back quickly and that the alarm would sound soon. They needed to hide, and fast.
They gained the shelter of the bushes just as the gangster who had gone tumbling over the ledge began to find his breath again and shout for help. Desperately, the boys scrambled through the undergrowth, seeking no path, seeking only a hiding place.
They reached the cover of the bushes just as the gangster who had fallen over the edge started to catch his breath and yell for help. Frantically, the boys rushed through the underbrush, looking for no path, only a place to hide.
At length, when they were in a dense thicket where the branches were so closely entwined that further progress seemed impossible, they halted.
At last, when they reached a thick tangle of bushes where the branches were so closely interwoven that moving forward seemed impossible, they stopped.
"This is as far as we can go," panted Chet. "They'll be searching for us now, but they'll never find us in here."
"This is as far as we can go," Chet gasped. "They'll be looking for us now, but they'll never find us in here."
"That was a narrow escape!"
"That was a close call!"
"It sure was. But we gave them something to remember us by."
"It definitely was. But we gave them something to remember us for."
Biff Hooper doubled up his fist with satisfaction.
Biff Hooper clenched his fist in satisfaction.
"I knocked my man colder than a sardine," he declared.
"I knocked my guy out colder than a sardine," he declared.
It was nearing dawn. The first faint streaks of light were appearing in the eastern sky.
It was getting close to dawn. The first faint rays of light were showing up in the eastern sky.
"I wonder where that boat went," said Chet suddenly. "Perhaps it's still near the island."
"I wonder where that boat went," Chet said out of the blue. "Maybe it's still close to the island."
"It wasn't one of the boats belonging to the gang, anyway, by the way those two fellows were talking. If we could get a hiding place a little nearer the shore we might be able to see it."
"It wasn't one of the gang's boats, judging by the way those two guys were talking. If we could find a hiding spot a bit closer to the shore, we might be able to see it."
"Yes—let's get out of this thicket."
"Yeah—let's get out of this thicket."
Quietly, the boys began to withdraw from the deep thicket in which they had become entangled. But the branches cracked underfoot and seemed to have the brittleness of matchwood. The chums were afraid they would be heard.
Quietly, the boys started to pull away from the dense thicket they had gotten stuck in. But the branches snapped under their feet and felt fragile like matchsticks. The friends were worried they would be heard.
"Better stay where we are," muttered Chet.
"Better to stay where we are," muttered Chet.
They remained motionless for some time, and the swift dawn soon began to paint the sky. The darkness diminished and the boys could now see one another plainly, and could see the extent of the deep thicket in which they had become enmeshed.
They stayed still for a while, and soon the bright dawn started to color the sky. The darkness faded, and the boys could see each other clearly, as well as the vast thicket they had gotten tangled in.
"Now let's try to get out," said Chet.
"Now let's try to get out," Chet said.
Again they attempted to make their way out of the thicket, and this time, because they could see what they were doing, their efforts met with more success. But they could not avoid making considerable noise, and the crackling of branches seemed like the reports of rifles.
Again, they tried to find their way out of the thicket, and this time, since they could see what they were doing, their efforts were more successful. However, they couldn't avoid making a lot of noise, and the crackling of branches sounded like gunfire.
Then, to their horror, they heard a voice:
Then, to their shock, they heard a voice:
"I heard a noise in the bushes over there almost an hour ago, and now I hear it again."
"I heard a sound in the bushes over there almost an hour ago, and now I hear it again."
"We'll go over and see," replied another voice.
"We'll go check it out," replied another voice.
The boys looked at one another, then froze into silence. They could hear heavy footfalls near by. Branches crackled.
The boys exchanged glances, then fell silent. They could hear loud footsteps nearby. Branches snapped.
"They're hiding around on this side of the island somewhere," said the first voice. "If I ever lay my hands on 'em—"
"They're hiding somewhere on this side of the island," said the first voice. "If I ever get my hands on them—"
Chet put his finger to his lips as a warning to silence, but there was no need. Biff was scarcely daring to breathe.
Chet put his finger to his lips as a sign to be quiet, but it wasn’t necessary. Biff was barely daring to breathe.
Just at that moment a sound broke forth that sent a thrill of fear through them both.
Just then, a sound erupted that sent a chill of fear through both of them.
It was a sibilant, terrifying hiss, right at their feet.
It was a high-pitched, frightening hiss, right at their feet.
Chet looked down and gave a low cry. A huge blacksnake was coiled in the grass, in readiness to strike.
Chet looked down and let out a low cry. A large black snake was coiled in the grass, ready to strike.
CHAPTER XXII
The Chase
The Pursuit
Chet Morton leaped back with such violence that he collided with his chum. He had seen the serpent in the nick of time, and his backward leap had been so instinctive and so involuntary that he somehow evaded the swift, whiplike thrust of the evil head that plunged at him.
Chet Morton jumped back so forcefully that he bumped into his friend. He had spotted the snake just in time, and his backward leap was so instinctive and automatic that he managed to dodge the quick, snapping strike of the menacing head that lunged at him.
The snake missed, although its body writhed against Chet's boot for a second and the fangs stabbed against the heavy leather. The boot saved the boy. Had the snake struck against his leg he would have been bitten.
The snake missed, but its body twisted against Chet's boot for a moment, and its fangs pierced the thick leather. The boot protected the boy. If the snake had struck his leg, he would have been bitten.
The chums plunged blindly through the thicket.
The friends rushed headfirst through the bushes.
There was no thought of caution now. They were filled with unreasoning terror of the blacksnake, the instinctive revulsion that fills most people at the sight of such a reptile, and they went crashing through the bushes. The noise of their flight did not escape the two rascals who had been searching for them.
There was no thought of being careful now. They were overwhelmed with irrational fear of the blacksnake, the instinctive disgust that most people feel at the sight of such a creature, and they crashed through the bushes. The sound of their escape didn’t go unnoticed by the two troublemakers who had been looking for them.
"I see them!" shouted one of the men. He came plunging through the deep grass at the outskirts of the thicket to intercept the boys.
"I see them!" one of the men shouted. He rushed through the tall grass at the edge of the thicket to catch up with the boys.
Chet saw him in time and veered to one side. He just managed to evade the outflung arm, then went running desperately to the top of the hillside overlooking the sea. Biff came thundering behind, outdistanced the second gangster, dodged the other man, and raced after Chet.
Chet spotted him just in time and swerved to the side. He barely avoided the swinging arm, then took off running frantically to the top of the hillside that overlooked the ocean. Biff came charging behind, outpacing the second thug, dodged the other guy, and raced after Chet.
They went slipping and sliding down the slope. Chet had no clear idea of where they were bound, but he was determined to keep running either until he was captured or overcome with exhaustion.
They were slipping and sliding down the hill. Chet had no idea where they were headed, but he was determined to keep running until he got caught or completely worn out.
But when he came over the brow of the hill and began the steep descent, he saw something in the sea below that made him give an exultant yell.
But when he crested the hill and started down the steep slope, he saw something in the sea below that made him let out a joyful shout.
It was a motorboat, and one that he recognized immediately. The boat was none other than the Napoli, and in it were three figures. Even at that distance he knew them for Tony Prito, Phil Cohen and Jerry Gilroy. Behind the motorboat were two other craft, being towed.
It was a motorboat, and one he recognized right away. The boat was none other than the Napoli, and inside were three people. Even from that distance, he knew them as Tony Prito, Phil Cohen, and Jerry Gilroy. Behind the motorboat were two other boats being towed.
He had not been seen as yet, for he saw that the Napoli was cruising leisurely around the island. He shouted hoarsely to attract attention.
He still hadn't been seen because he noticed that the Napoli was cruising casually around the island. He shouted loudly to get attention.
He saw Tony look up, then speak excitedly to his comrades. They waved frantically in reply. Then the bow of the Napoli began to head in toward the shore.
He saw Tony look up and then speak excitedly to his friends. They waved back frantically. Then the bow of the Napoli started heading toward the shore.
Could they reach the boat in safety? Biff was thundering down the slope only a few feet behind Chet. Rocks and pebbles went bouncing and bounding along in front of them; sand and gravel flew from about their boots. And, coming in swift pursuit, were the two gangsters who had so nearly captured them in the thicket. These men were shouting hoarsely to them to stop.
Could they make it to the boat safely? Biff was racing down the slope just a few feet behind Chet. Rocks and pebbles bounced ahead of them; sand and gravel flew around their boots. And right behind them were the two gangsters who had almost caught them in the thicket. These men were shouting loudly for them to stop.
But the two chums had no intention of stopping. They saw safety in sight. Could they reach the shore and gain the boat before the two gangsters overtook them?
But the two friends had no plans to stop. They could see safety ahead. Could they make it to the shore and reach the boat before the two criminals caught up with them?
Then, out from among the rocks along the beach emerged three figures. Chet's heart sank. They were the other gangsters and they were directly in the path. At the same time, he saw that Tony Prito was bringing the Napoli around, and away from the shore.
Then, from among the rocks along the beach, three figures appeared. Chet's heart sank. They were the other gangsters, and they were right in the way. At the same time, he noticed that Tony Prito was steering the Napoli away from the shore.
Spent and exhausted, he tried to dodge the three men ahead, but the effort was short-lived. One of the three leaped forward and grappled with him. They fell struggling into the sand. The other two leaped at Biff.
Spent and exhausted, he tried to dodge the three guys ahead, but the effort didn’t last long. One of the three jumped forward and tackled him. They fell, wrestling in the sand. The other two lunged at Biff.
The boys fought bravely and desperately. Chet struck out and his fist crashed into the face of the man who had tackled him. The fellow sagged back for a second and Chet tried to free himself from the grasp around his waist, but as he did so one of the other two gangsters came rushing up and launched himself on him.
The boys fought fiercely and with determination. Chet swung and his fist slammed into the face of the man who had tackled him. The guy staggered back for a moment, and Chet tried to break free from the hold around his waist, but as he did, one of the other two gangsters charged at him and jumped on him.
Biff battled with equal ferocity, but he was powerless against the three rascals. He kicked and struggled, but they had him down and they dragged him back behind the rocks, where the others soon brought Chet.
Biff fought back just as fiercely, but he was no match for the three troublemakers. He kicked and struggled, but they pinned him down and dragged him behind the rocks, where the others soon brought Chet.
The red-headed man, with a bruise over one eye, produced a length of stout cord from his hip pocket.
The red-headed man, sporting a bruise above one eye, pulled out a length of strong cord from his hip pocket.
"Tie 'em up!" he snapped. "We've got 'em this time for keeps."
"Tie them up!" he snapped. "We’ve got them this time for good."
Pete grabbed the cord, and in a few minutes Chet's wrists were bound tightly behind his back and his ankles were securely tied. Pete cut the cord and used the remainder for binding Biff. The two chums were helpless.
Pete grabbed the cord, and in a few minutes, Chet's wrists were tightly bound behind his back and his ankles were securely tied. Pete cut the cord and used the rest to tie up Biff. The two friends were helpless.
As for Tony Prito, in the Napoli, he had quickly seen that it would be impossible, even foolhardy, to attempt to rescue his two chums. In the first place, there were five boys against five men, the latter desperate and fully armed. The only result would be the capture of them all and the capture, as well, of the three motorboats by the gangsters.
As for Tony Prito, in the Napoli, he quickly realized that trying to rescue his two friends would be impossible and reckless. First of all, there were five boys against five men, who were desperate and fully armed. The only outcome would be their capture and the gangsters getting all three motorboats.
"I hate to see them caught with us so close, but what can we do?" he said, turning to the others, as he slowly brought the Napoli around.
"I hate seeing them trapped with us so near, but what can we do?" he said, turning to the others, as he slowly maneuvered the Napoli around.
"If the men catch us and the motorboats, the boys will only be worse off than they were before."
"If the guys find us and the motorboats, the boys will be in an even worse situation than they were before."
"I guess you're right," agreed Jerry Gilroy. "I sure thought for a minute that we were going to be able to save them. Between the crowd of us we could have held off those other two toughs long enough to get Chet and Biff on board, but when the others showed up I knew it was all off."
"I guess you're right," Jerry Gilroy agreed. "For a moment, I really thought we could save them. With all of us together, we could have held off those two tough guys long enough to get Chet and Biff on board, but when the others showed up, I knew it was a lost cause."
"The fellows put up a good fight, anyway," declared Phil Cohen. "I hope those villains don't treat 'em too rough."
"The guys put up a good fight, anyway," said Phil Cohen. "I hope those jerks don't treat them too badly."
"We'll get them free yet," asserted Tony. "I don't know how it's going to be done, but we'll get 'em free. We've still got all the motorboats and the gang can't leave the island, that's sure."
"We'll get them free eventually," Tony said confidently. "I don’t know how we’ll do it, but we’ll get them free. We still have all the motorboats, and there's no way the gang can leave the island, that's for sure."
When he had brought the Napoli out a safe distance from shore, Tony decided to drop anchor.
When he had taken the Napoli out a safe distance from shore, Tony decided to drop anchor.
"We'll stick around," he decided. "They'll know that we aren't going to desert them anyway."
"We'll hang out," he decided. "They'll see that we aren't going to abandon them anyway."
So the Napoli, with the two captured motorboats drifting behind, remained at anchor, while the three chums scanned the rocky shore. Once in a while they saw one or another of the gangsters emerging from behind the boulders to gaze at them, then return.
So the Napoli, with the two captured motorboats trailing behind, stayed anchored while the three friends looked over the rocky shore. Every now and then, they spotted one of the gangsters appearing from behind the boulders to watch them, then retreating.
"We've got them guessing," chuckled Tony. "They don't know what to make of us. They know we have their boats, but they don't know who we are or how we got 'em."
"We've got them all puzzled," Tony chuckled. "They have no idea what to think of us. They know we have their boats, but they don't know who we are or how we got them."
Two hours passed. The sun rose higher in the sky. Blacksnake Island, in all its sinister ugliness, simmered in the morning heat. There was no further sign of life from the shore. Although the boys in the motorboat did not know it, the boulders behind which Chet and Biff had been carried hid the trail up to the grove and thence to the cave in the rocks. The gangsters had decided to return to this cave and Chet and Biff, with their ankle bonds untied, had been roughly ordered to their feet and bade proceed with the gangsters up the hidden trail. They had not been seen from the boat because a heavy veil of overhanging branches from the trees masked the trail where it wound up the hillside.
Two hours went by. The sun climbed higher in the sky. Blacksnake Island, in all its sinister ugliness, simmered in the morning heat. There was still no sign of life from the shore. Although the boys in the motorboat didn’t realize it, the boulders that had hidden Chet and Biff concealed the path leading up to the grove and then to the cave in the rocks. The gangsters had decided to return to this cave, and Chet and Biff, with their ankle bonds untied, had been roughly ordered to their feet and told to follow the gangsters up the hidden trail. They hadn’t been spotted from the boat because a heavy curtain of overhanging branches from the trees concealed the path as it twisted up the hillside.
Toward mid-morning Tony chanced to look up and gaze out toward the mainland. He leaped up with a frantic yell.
Toward mid-morning, Tony happened to look up and stare out at the mainland. He jumped up with a frantic shout.
"Here they come!" he shrieked. "Here they are!"
"Here they come!" he shouted. "Here they are!"
The others rose and stared. Then, as the meaning of what they saw dawned on them, they cheered hoarsely, and danced with delight until the motorboat rocked and swayed beneath their feet.
The others stood up and stared. Then, as the realization of what they saw hit them, they cheered loudly and danced with joy until the motorboat rocked and swayed under their feet.
Cleaving the waves, came a low, rakish craft, speeding along with white wings of foam at her prow. It rushed silently toward them with the grace of an arrow. It was a United States revenue cutter, and when the boys in the boat witnessed its approach they knew that the Hardy boys had been successful in obtaining the aid they had gone to seek.
Cleaving the waves was a sleek, fast boat, speeding along with white foam at its front. It rushed silently toward them with the grace of an arrow. It was a United States revenue cutter, and when the boys in the boat saw it coming, they knew the Hardy boys had successfully gotten the help they had gone to find.
The boys cheered and waved their arms, trying to signal to the cutter that they had located Chet and Biff. Finally, Tony started up the engine and brought the Napoli alongside. The cutter slowly came to a stop, there was a clank and a clatter as the anchor was sent over.
The boys cheered and waved their arms, trying to signal to the cutter that they had found Chet and Biff. Finally, Tony started the engine and brought the Napoli alongside. The cutter slowly came to a stop, and there was a clank and a clatter as the anchor was dropped.
A husky revenue officer with a revolver strapped to his waist leaned over the side and hailed them.
A burly revenue officer with a revolver holstered at his waist leaned over the side and called out to them.
"Did you find them?" he roared.
"Did you find them?" he shouted.
"They were caught again, right on this shore!" shouted Tony. "The gang are still here."
"They got caught again, right here on this shore!" shouted Tony. "The gang is still here."
"Fine! We'll be right over. Tie your craft alongside and come along in our boat!"
"Okay! We'll be there soon. Tie your boat next to ours and come aboard!"
The lads needed no second urging. A ladder was flung over the side and, after securely tying the Napoli, they clambered up on the deck of the cutter where they found the Hardy boys awaiting them.
The guys didn't need any more motivation. A ladder was tossed over the side and, after securely tying the Napoli, they climbed up onto the deck of the cutter where they found the Hardy boys waiting for them.
In a few swift words Tony acquainted them with the circumstances surrounding the recapture of Chet and Biff. The revenue officer who had first hailed them nodded with satisfaction.
In just a few quick words, Tony filled them in on what happened with the capture of Chet and Biff. The tax officer who had first called out to them nodded in approval.
"As long as we know that those rascals haven't left the island, it's all right," he declared. "We'll have them in hand before long."
"As long as we know those troublemakers haven't left the island, it's fine," he said. "We'll have them under control soon."
He turned and gave a curt order to one of his men and in a remarkably short space of time there were a dozen broad-shouldered chaps in readiness, with rifles and revolvers. Another order, and a boat was lowered over the side.
He turned and issued a brief command to one of his men, and in a surprisingly short time, a dozen broad-shouldered guys were ready, armed with rifles and revolvers. With another order, a boat was lowered over the side.
"Away we go!" announced the officer. "It won't be long now."
"Away we go!" the officer said. "It won't be long now."
CHAPTER XXIII
Home Again
Back Home
Tony Prito and his chums guided the landing party to the boulders behind which the gangsters and their captives had disappeared, but when Frank Hardy saw that the prey had flown he assumed the rôle of guide.
Tony Prito and his friends led the landing party to the boulders where the gangsters and their captives had vanished, but when Frank Hardy saw that the target had escaped, he took on the role of guide.
"They've gone up to the cave," he said. "I know the way."
"They've gone up to the cave," he said. "I know how to get there."
With Joe, he went in advance of the party. Tony, Phil and Jerry came behind, with the officer and his men, their faces alight with anticipation of a battle, clambering up the hillside in their wake. The sturdy, tanned men were alert and ready for the approaching fight.
With Joe, he moved ahead of the group. Tony, Phil, and Jerry followed behind, along with the officer and his men, their faces lit up with excitement for the battle ahead, climbing up the hillside after them. The strong, sun-tanned men were vigilant and prepared for the upcoming fight.
Through the grove, down the leafy trail, the Hardy boys led them, and at last they came within sight of the clearing. The great rock and the dark entrance of the cave were in sight. There was no sign of any human being.
Through the grove, down the leafy path, the Hardy boys led them, and finally, they came into view of the clearing. The big rock and the dark entrance of the cave were visible. There were no signs of any people.
"Deploy!" ordered the officer.
"Deploy!" said the officer.
The men scattered. The Hardy boys and their chums, being unarmed, were obliged to watch from the shelter of the grove, because they realized that there would probably be gunfire.
The men ran in different directions. The Hardy boys and their friends, being unarmed, had to stay hidden in the grove, knowing that gunfire was likely.
The men began to make their way across the open space, running from rock to rock, keeping well scattered, all eying the entrance to the cave.
The men started to move across the open area, sprinting from one rock to another, staying well spread out, all watching the entrance to the cave.
Suddenly, a shot sounded from the cave entrance. Almost simultaneously one of the revenue men fired. The boys had seen no one in the cave but the keen eyes of the rifleman had, and when the body of a man slumped forward out of the cave, falling on the rocks, with a revolver clattering from his nerveless fingers, his judgment was verified.
Suddenly, a gunshot echoed from the cave entrance. Almost at the same time, one of the agents fired. The boys hadn’t seen anyone in the cave, but the sharp eyes of the rifleman had, and when a man’s body lurched forward out of the cave, collapsing onto the rocks with a revolver dropping from his lifeless grip, his instincts were confirmed.
And this, to the disappointment of the watchers, was the end of the fight. For the gangsters, like so many of their kind, were cowardly and they became unnerved at the fate of the first of their men who had shown fight.
And this, to the disappointment of the onlookers, was the end of the fight. The gangsters, like many others of their kind, were cowardly and got shaken up by the fate of the first of their men who had fought back.
Out of the cave entrance came a man bearing aloft a white handkerchief in token of surrender. He was followed by the others, with hands upraised, and behind them came Chet Morton and Biff Hooper, their wrists still bound, but their faces alight with joy, in contrast to the surly visages of the gangsters.
Out of the cave entrance came a man holding up a white handkerchief as a sign of surrender. He was followed by the others, with their hands raised, and behind them were Chet Morton and Biff Hooper, their wrists still tied, but their faces full of joy, in stark contrast to the grumpy looks of the gangsters.
"Well, well!" declared the officer in charge, as he confronted the rascals, noting the frowning red-haired man. "If it isn't Red Hawkins and his gang! And you too, Pete! We've been looking for your hangout for the past three months—and for you as well. Put the cuffs on 'em, boys."
"Well, well!" the officer in charge said as he faced the troublemakers, spotting the scowling red-haired man. "If it isn’t Red Hawkins and his gang! And you too, Pete! We’ve been searching for your hideout for the last three months—and for you too. Put the cuffs on them, guys."
In a few moments the gang were securely handcuffed. The man who had been shot was attended to and it was found that he had been wounded, but after a brief examination and the rendering of first aid, the officer assured the victim that he would live to face trial with the rest for the abduction of Chet and Biff.
In a few moments, the gang was securely handcuffed. The man who had been shot received medical attention and it was determined that he had been injured, but after a quick examination and some first aid, the officer assured the victim that he would survive to stand trial alongside the others for the kidnapping of Chet and Biff.
"And if that charge falls through—which it won't," he assured them all, "we have a list of other charges against you, as long as your arm."
"And if that charge doesn't hold up—which it won't," he reassured them, "we have a list of other charges against you, as extensive as your arm."
But the Hardy boys and their chums were oblivious to this scene. They were too busy staging an impromptu reunion. Chet Morton and Biff Hooper, freed of their bonds, were busy shaking hands all round and trying to explain to their excited comrades some of the adventures they had gone through since leaving Bayport.
But the Hardy boys and their friends had no idea what was happening. They were too caught up in having an unexpected reunion. Chet Morton and Biff Hooper, free from their restraints, were busy shaking hands all around and trying to share with their excited buddies some of the adventures they had experienced since leaving Bayport.
Then the Hardy boys were called on to explain how they had encountered the revenue cutter and how they had told their story and prevailed on the revenue men to come with them to Blacksnake Island to effect the rescue of their chums.
Then the Hardy boys were asked to explain how they had come across the revenue cutter and how they had shared their story and convinced the revenue officers to accompany them to Blacksnake Island to rescue their friends.
"But we can talk it over better on the way back," declared Frank.
"But we can discuss it better on the way back," Frank said.
"Coming back with us?" asked the officer. "We're taking these men to Rock Harbor, but you're welcome to come along."
"Are you coming back with us?" the officer asked. "We're taking these guys to Rock Harbor, but you're welcome to join us."
"No thanks—we'll be going back in the motorboats."
"No thanks—we'll be heading back in the motorboats."
"I see. Well, we'll take this gang back to the ship. Forward—march, you!" he shouted to the crestfallen gangsters.
"I get it. Alright, let’s take this crew back to the ship. Move out—go!" he yelled at the disappointed gangsters.
So the party returned to the shore and Red Hawkins and his four men were herded into the boat. They had not said a word, but on their way back to the cutter Red turned to the Hardy boys and snarled:
So the party went back to the shore, and Red Hawkins and his four men were pushed into the boat. They hadn’t said anything, but on their way back to the cutter, Red turned to the Hardy boys and growled:
"Well, you've got me, but our men in the West got your father. We've got that much satisfaction, anyway!"
"Well, you’ve got me, but our guys in the West captured your dad. At least we've got that satisfaction!"
With that he lapsed into silence, realizing that his words had the immediate effect of dampening the spirits of the Hardy boys and their chums.
With that, he fell silent, realizing that his words had immediately brought down the spirits of the Hardy boys and their friends.
Back at the revenue cutter, Frank and Joe said good-bye to the officer and his men, leaving Red and his gang in their charge. The motorboat had been towed behind the ship and they resumed their places in the Sleuth and cast away.
Back at the revenue cutter, Frank and Joe said goodbye to the officer and his crew, leaving Red and his gang in their care. The motorboat had been towed behind the ship, and they returned to their spots in the Sleuth and set off.
Tony Prito and the others took their places in the Napoli while Chet and Biff returned to the Envoy. One of the captured boats turned out to be none other than Biff's own craft, which the gangsters had been using while they were prisoners in the cave. Thus the journey home began.
Tony Prito and the others took their spots in the Napoli while Chet and Biff headed back to the Envoy. One of the captured boats was actually Biff's own, which the gangsters had been using while they were locked up in the cave. And so, the journey home began.
Although there was rejoicing in the other boats and much good-natured badinage was passed about, the Hardy boys found it difficult to be cheerful. Red's words had brought back to them their fears concerning the safety of their father and they dreaded the news that might await them when they returned to Bayport.
Although there was celebration in the other boats and a lot of lighthearted teasing going on, the Hardy boys struggled to feel happy. Red's words had reminded them of their worries about their father's safety, and they feared the news that might be waiting for them when they got back to Bayport.
"If there is no news from him, I think we should go to Chicago and search for him," said Frank gravely.
"If we don't hear from him, I think we should go to Chicago and look for him," Frank said seriously.
"I'm with you in that. But perhaps it won't be so bad. Red may have been only trying to frighten us."
"I'm with you on that. But maybe it won't be so bad. Red might have just been trying to scare us."
"I hope so. If that was his object he sure succeeded."
"I hope so. If that was his goal, he definitely succeeded."
"At any rate, we found the missing chums."
"Anyway, we found the missing friends."
"Another feather in our cap, eh?" grinned Frank. "If dad does come back safely he won't have any reason to be ashamed of his sons."
"Another win for us, right?" Frank grinned. "If Dad comes back safe, he won't have any reason to be embarrassed by his sons."
"The Mortons and the Hoopers will be glad. The whole city will be in a fuss over what happened to Chet and Biff."
"The Mortons and the Hoopers will be happy. The entire city will be in a stir over what happened to Chet and Biff."
This proved to be the case. When the three motorboats returned to Barmet Bay and finally docked at Bayport they found a cheering throng awaiting them, for the news had been sent to the city by the revenue men from Rock Harbor, and the anxieties of the boys' families were set at rest. The Hoopers and Mortons, in particular, had been almost frantic with worry and Chet and Biff were given a welcome befitting heroes of an expedition given up for lost for many years.
This turned out to be true. When the three motorboats returned to Barmet Bay and finally docked at Bayport, they found a cheering crowd waiting for them because the news had been sent to the city by the revenue officers from Rock Harbor, relieving the worries of the boys' families. The Hoopers and Mortons, in particular, had been almost frantic with anxiety, and Chet and Biff received a welcome that was appropriate for heroes of an expedition thought to be lost for many years.
Nor were the Hardy boys and their chums forgotten in the welcome. Chet and Biff gave full credit to the Hardys for the part they had played in the round-up of the gangsters. When Frank and Joe were finally able to break away from the crowd and make their way back home, the news of the exploit was beginning to spread rapidly through the city.
Nor were the Hardy boys and their friends overlooked in the welcome. Chet and Biff fully acknowledged the Hardys for their role in taking down the gangsters. When Frank and Joe finally managed to escape the crowd and head back home, the news of their adventure was starting to spread quickly through the city.
When they came within sight of the familiar house they broke into a run. They raced up the front steps. They flung open the front door and burst into the hallway, almost knocking over Aunt Gertrude, who was dusting.
When they saw the familiar house, they started running. They sprinted up the front steps. They threw open the front door and charged into the hallway, nearly knocking Aunt Gertrude over as she was dusting.
"Lands sakes!" she exclaimed. "Can't you boys ever learn to come into a house properly? I never seen the like in all my born days! Go right back out that door and come in again like gentlemen!"
"Lands sakes!" she exclaimed. "Can't you boys ever learn to come into a house properly? I've never seen anything like this in all my life! Go right back out that door and come in again like gentlemen!"
"Home again!" exclaimed Frank, with a grin. Then he turned anxiously to his aunt. "Any word yet from dad?"
"Home again!" Frank said with a grin. Then he turned anxiously to his aunt. "Have you heard anything from Dad yet?"
"He's in the library!" sniffed Aunt Gertrude.
"He's in the library!" sniffed Aunt Gertrude.
"In the library!" exclaimed the boys, in astonishment.
"In the library!" the boys exclaimed, surprised.
"Yes, in the library. And what of it? Where did you expect he'd be? Up in the attic?"
"Yeah, in the library. So what? Where did you think he’d be? In the attic?"
But the Hardy boys did not wait to reply. With a whoop of delight they rushed through the living room and into the library, where they found Fenton Hardy seated at the table. Their father got up quickly as they rushed at him, and in a moment all three were shaking hands and chattering in gladness and relief.
But the Hardy boys didn't wait to respond. With a cheer of excitement, they dashed through the living room and into the library, where they found Fenton Hardy sitting at the table. Their dad quickly stood up as they ran toward him, and in no time, all three were shaking hands and talking in joy and relief.
"We heard you'd been caught by the gang!" gasped Frank.
"We heard you got caught by the gang!" Frank exclaimed.
Fenton Hardy smiled. "It was the other way around," he corrected them. "The gang was caught by me."
Fenton Hardy smiled. "Actually, it was the other way around," he corrected them. "I caught the gang."
"And we caught the rest of them!"
"And we got the rest of them!"
"Not Red Hawkins and his crew?"
"Not Red Hawkins and his team?"
The Hardy boys nodded. Their father gazed at them in incredulous astonishment for a moment. Then he slapped them heartily on the back and indicated the chairs near by.
The Hardy boys nodded. Their dad looked at them in disbelief for a moment. Then he gave them a hearty slap on the back and pointed to the nearby chairs.
"And I thought they'd clear out when they knew Baldy and the others were behind the bars! Why, this rounds up the entire pack! Tell me about it. But—first of all, have Chet and Biff been found?"
"And I thought they'd leave once they realized Baldy and the others were locked up! This really captures the whole crew! Fill me in. But—first off, have Chet and Biff been located?"
The boys nodded.
The guys nodded.
"We found them on Blacksnake Island. That's how we rounded up the gang. They captured Chet and Biff in mistake for us. They had 'em in a cave."
"We found them on Blacksnake Island. That's how we gathered the gang. They captured Chet and Biff by mistake for us. They had them in a cave."
Then, in the seclusion of the study, the Hardy boys told of their search for the missing chums, of their deduction that the boys might have gone to Blacksnake Island, of their arrival on the island and the finding of the gangsters and their cave.
Then, in the quiet of the study, the Hardy boys recounted their search for the missing friends, their conclusion that the boys might have gone to Blacksnake Island, their arrival on the island, and the discovery of the gangsters and their cave.
Fenton Hardy listened to the recital with sparkling eyes, for he realized that his sons had played a part that made him proud of them, and when the tale was finished his approval was evident by the manner in which he pounded the desk with his fist.
Fenton Hardy listened to the performance with bright eyes, knowing that his sons had done something he was proud of, and when the story ended, his approval was clear in the way he slammed his fist on the desk.
"Fine!" he declared. "It was real detective work in the first place and real grit and courage from then on. I'm very proud of my boys."
"Fine!" he said. "It was true detective work from the start and real grit and courage after that. I'm really proud of my guys."
"But all the time," added Frank, "we were worried about you. The men said you had been captured in the West."
"But all the time," Frank added, "we were worried about you. The guys said you had been captured out West."
"It was a false report," said their father. "They thought they had captured me, but it wasn't for long. I played into their hands once, just to find out where they were all hiding. But I had another detective to shadow me and when I found out where the gang were gathered I gave the signal and we rounded them up."
"It was a fake report," their father said. "They thought they had caught me, but it didn't last long. I let them think they had me once, just to figure out where they were all hiding. But I had another detective following me, and when I found out where the gang was meeting, I signaled, and we rounded them up."
"And now I hope the whole kit and bilin' of you will stay at home for a while!" declared a voice from the doorway. "I declare I never did see such a family for the men-folks to go gallivantin' around the country and never stayin' at home. It's a wonder to me, Laura, that you put up with it."
"And now I hope all of you will stay home for a while!" said a voice from the doorway. "I can't believe how this family is always running around and never staying at home. It’s amazing to me, Laura, that you deal with it."
"Well," smilingly replied Mrs. Hardy, who had entered the room with Aunt Gertrude, "with three first-rate detectives in the family, I'm afraid I can't expect anything else. And they always come home again."
"Well," Mrs. Hardy said with a smile as she walked into the room with Aunt Gertrude, "having three top-notch detectives in the family, I can’t really expect anything different. And they always come back home."
Aunt Gertrude sniffed.
Aunt Gertrude frowned.
"I'll guarantee that if I visit here much longer I'll see that those two boys haven't much chance for more detectiving!" she announced. "I'll cure 'em, so I will. It's no business at all for boys."
"I'll bet that if I stick around here any longer, I'll see that those two boys don't have much chance for more detective work!" she declared. "I'll put an end to it, I will. It's not a job for boys at all."
Mrs. Hardy smiled serenely.
Mrs. Hardy smiled peacefully.
Fenton Hardy winked gravely at his sons, so Aunt Gertrude's threat did not greatly disturb them.
Fenton Hardy gave a serious wink to his sons, so Aunt Gertrude's threat didn't bother them much.
There were to be more exciting adventures in store for the Hardy boys, and what some of these were will be related in the next volume of this series, entitled "The Hardy Boys: Hunting for Hidden Gold," a strenuous story of the West.
There are more exciting adventures ahead for the Hardy boys, and some of these will be shared in the next book of this series, titled "The Hardy Boys: Hunting for Hidden Gold," an action-packed story set in the West.
"You're welcome to try, Aunt Gertrude," said Mr. Hardy; "but I'm afraid you'll never cure my sons of wanting to be detectives. I've set them the example, you see."
"Feel free to try, Aunt Gertrude," said Mr. Hardy; "but I'm afraid you'll never stop my sons from wanting to be detectives. I've set the example, you see."
"More's the pity," sniffed Aunt Gertrude. "Why couldn't you have been a plumber? It's safer."
"That's too bad," sniffed Aunt Gertrude. "Why couldn't you have been a plumber? It's safer."
"But not as exciting," said Fenton Hardy, with a laugh.
"But not as exciting," said Fenton Hardy, laughing.
THE END
THE END
MYSTERY STORIES FOR BOYS
Mystery Stories for Boys
By FRANKLIN W. DIXON
By Franklin W. Dixon
THE HARDY BOYS: THE TOWER TREASURE
THE HARDY BOYS: THE HOUSE ON THE CLIFF
THE HARDY BOYS: THE SECRET OF THE OLD MILL
THE HARDY BOYS: THE MISSING CHUMS
THE HARDY BOYS: HUNTING FOR HIDDEN GOLD
THE HARDY BOYS: THE TOWER TREASURE
THE HARDY BOYS: THE HOUSE ON THE CLIFF
THE HARDY BOYS: THE SECRET OF THE OLD MILL
THE HARDY BOYS: THE MISSING CHUMS
THE HARDY BOYS: HUNTING FOR HIDDEN GOLD
GROSSET & DUNLAP, PUBLISHERS, NEW YORK
GROSSET & DUNLAP, PUBLISHERS, NEW YORK
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!